faculty of medicine - handbook 1983 - Digitised Collections

FACULTY OF MEDICINE

HANDBOOK 1983

PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY

This handbook gives specific information for students of the faculty of Medicine. It should be read in conjunction with the general publi-cation. Student Diary, available free to all Students at enrolment or re-enrolment.

In exceptional circumstances the Council is empowered to suspend subjects and vary the syllabus of a subject. Details of any such alteration will be available from the appropriate Faculty or Board of Studies Office and will be announced on departmental notice-boards.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Welcome to Students 5 History of Medical School 7 Faculty Administration 8 Faculty of Medicine 8

CHAPTER 1 Important Dates 11

Applications, Enrolments, Terms and Examinations, Graduation

CHAPTER 2 Degrees and Diplomas 12

Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery Bachelor of Medical Science M.D., M.S., M.G.O. and. M.ied. Postgraduate Diplomas Ph.D.

CHAPTER 3 Advice to Those Preparing to Enter the Medical Course 16

Special Course Requirements; Preparatory Studies

CHAPTER 4 Policies Governing Admission 17

Principles of Selection First Year Quotas Second and Later Years Admission from other Tertiary Institutions

CHAPTER 5 Scholarships, Bursaries, Prizes and Financial Assistance 24

Undergraduate Awards Postgraduate Awards

CHAPTER 6 Notices to Medical Graduates 27

Hospital Appointments Registration in the United Kingdom

CHAPTER 7 Regulations 30

Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery Degree of Bachelor of Medical Science Degree of Doctor of Medicine Degree of Master of Surgery Degree of Master of Medicine Degree of Master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics Diploma in Public Health Postgraduate Medical Diplomas Other Postgraduate Medical Diplomas Diploma in Psychological Medicine Diploma in Diagnostic Radiology Diploma in Laryngology and Otology Diploma in Audiology

CHAPTER 8 Details of Subjects for Degrees of M.B., B.S. 43

1. General Requirements:

Matriculation; Prerequisites; Admission to First Year; Atten-dance Requirements; Medical Students' Advisory Service; Vacation Study; Honours Awards; Leave of Absence; Assess-ment; Years, Subjects and Times of Examination; Examina-tions; Supplementary Examinations;. Faculty Passes; Special Consideration and Special Examinations; Student Appeals; Repetition of Years and Suspension

2. Time Tables 3. Summary of Principal Dates 4. Years and Subjects 5. Clinical Instruction

CHAPTER 9 Details of Subjects for Higher Degrees

Degree of Doctor of Medicine Degree of Master of Surgery Degree of Master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics Degree of Master of Medicine

CHAPTER 10 Details for Postgraduate Diplomas

CHAPTER 11 Teaching and Research Staff, Staff of Associated Institutions

BOOK LISTS

89

109

127

202

221 APPENDICES

Appendix 1:

Appendix 2:

Appendix 3:

Appendix 4: Appendix 5:

University General Principles of Selection for Entry to First Year Undergraduate Courses University General Principles of Selection for Entry to Second and Later Years of Undergraduate Courses University's General Principles of Selection for Entry to Postgraduate Courses Continuing Education Courses University Entrance Requirements for 1983

WELCOME TO STUDENTS

It is a pleasure to welcome you as a member of the faculty of Medicine. You are joining a strong and vigorous academic group within the Univer-sity and embarking on what should prove to be a very challenging career. This offers opportunities to develop knowledge, skills and experience in a wide variety of fields which span a range from the most intimate and personal problems of patients to matters which are of a most complex technological and scientific nature.

The faculty of Medicine in this University was founded in 1862, only seven years after the formal opening of the University. It was the first medical school to be established in Australia and has a long tradition in both teaching and research. In the last 25 years it has expanded rapidly and attained a standing in medical research, in teáching and in clinical practice of which it has every right to be proud when compared with other medical schools in the western .world. During this period, most of the existing clinical academic departments have been established and the medical complex developed in the south-west corner of the University campus. In addition to these facilities, there are now three general clinical schools associated with the faculty in addition to a number of spec:alist clinical schools. A department of Community Health has also been established which provides access to a community setting for teaching and research relevant to health care.

The undergraduate course provides an opportunity for students to gain a firm grounding in medical science in the context of both physical and behavioural problems. Although the first three years are based primarily on the University campus, students are given opportunities to see medicine being practised in hospitals and in the community and to gain an idea of the relevance of their studies to later medical practice through presentation of clinical problems in the course of teaching. Some students with a particular interest in medical science may interrupt their course for one year to undertake a research degree, Bachelor of Medical Science, in any one of the departments of the faculty. In the clinical years, students are based at one of the three general clinical schools but gain experience in a variety of other settings relevant to the very varied demands of medical practice.

I draw your attention to the objectives of the course as set out at the beginning of Chapter 2. These reflect the purpose of the educational programme which you will be undertaking and although examinations are held throughout the course to give a clear indication to you and the faculty of the progress you are making, the real goal must be preparing yourself effectively for medical practice and the examinations are not more than a yardstick to ensure that this is happening. I hope very much that you will find time to maintain interests aid contacts outside medicine during your undergraduate years and to participate in general student affairs in the University and in the faculty. For students to equip themselves well for the practice of medicine they need to master not only a substantial body of knowledge and skills, but also to mature to the point that they understand themselves, develop good relationships with other people and an understanding of their com-mitments and responsibilities to both individuals and the community. For

5

those who have problems of either a personal nature or with their study, there are many who are willing and able to help; the important thing is to seek advice early.

1 wish you every success in the course and hope that you will enjoy your time with us.

D. G. Penington, Dean, Faculty of Medicine.

HISTORY OF MEDICAL SCHOOL

1862 Medical School established 1876 Faculty of Medicine created

DEANS OF THE FACULTY OF MEDICINE 1876-86 GEORGE BRITTON MALFORD

1886-9 HARRY BROOKES ALLEN

1890-6 GEORGE BRITTON MALFORD

1897-1924 HARRY BROOKES ALLEN

1925-9 RICHARD JAMES ARTHUR BERRY

1929-38 WILLIAM ALEXANDER OSBORNE

1939-43 PETER MacCALLUM 1944-5 ROBERT MARSHALL ALLAN

1946 ROY DOUGLAS WRIGHT 1947-49 PETER MacCALLUM 1950-52 ROY DOUGLAS WRIGHT

1953-71 SYDNEY SUNDERLAND

1971-77 SYDNEY LANCE TOWNSEND

1978- DAVID GEOFFREY PENINGTON

7

FACULTY ADMINISTRATION

Dean, PROFESSOR D. G. PENINGTON

Deputy Dean, PROFESSOR G. B. RYAN

Assistant Registrar (Medicine), DARRELL M. MEAD

Administrative Officer (Medicine), GLENDA J. NICOL

Senior Administrative Assistant (Medicine), ELIZABETH A. McCORMlCK

Correspondence should be addressed to the Registrar.

Personal enquiries should be made to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine)

FACULTY OF MEDICINE (as at June 1982)

DEAN—PROFESSOR D. G. PENINGTON

DEPUTY DEAN—PROFESSOR G. B. RYAN

ASSISTANT DEAN (Pre-Clinical)—PROFESSOR D. O. WHITE

ASSISTANT DEAN (Clinical)—PROFESSOR P. S. KINCAID-SMITH

THE VICE-CHANCELLOR

THE DEPUTY VICE-CHANCELLORS

THE VICE-PRINCIPAL

Council Members:

MR J. I. HAYWARD MR D. D. WESTMORE PROFESSOR EMERITUS SIR LANCE TOWNSEND PROFESSOR EMERITUS R. D. WRIGHT

Representative of the Graduate Committee: DR. G. W. COOPER

Professors:

PROFESSOR ATTW000 PROFESSOR BALL• PROFESSOR BEISCHER PROFESSOR BENNETT PROFESSOR BROWN PROFESSOR CAMERON PROFESSOR CAMPBELL PROFESSOR CLARK PROFESSOR CLUNIE PROFESSOR CROCK PROFESSOR DARIAN-SMITH PROFESSOR B. M. DAVIES PROFESSOR DANKS PROFESSOR DAY PROFESSOR DENTIN PROFESSOR DOYLE

• Co-opted.

8

Faculty Members

PROFESSOR HARDY PROFESSOR HARE PROFESSOR HIRD PROFESSOR HURLEY PROFESSOR KINCAID-SMITH PROFESSOR KUNE PROFESSOR LEACH PROFESSOR LOUIS PROFESSOR LOVELL PROFESSOR MARTIN PROFESSOR McKELLAR PROFESSOR McKENZ1E PROFESSOR SIR GUSTAV NOSSAL PROFESSOR PENINGTON PROFESSOR PEPPERELL PROFESSOR PITTARD PROFESSOR PRINSLEY PROFESSOR RAND PROFESSOR RYAN PROFESSOR SCHREIBER PROFESSOR WEBSTER PROFESSOR D. O. WHITE

Non-Professorial Chairmen of Departments

DR L. R. FINCH DR S. L. SKINNER

Ex Officio:

Chairman, Health Commission—DR G. TREVAKS Nominee, Health Commission—DR J. L. EVANS Comwlth Director Health (Vic.i—DR R. C. WEBB

Associate Deans (Clinical):

Royal Melbourne Hospital—DR R. A. MELICK St Vincent's Hospital—DR J. J. BILLINGS Austin and Repatriation General Hospitals—DR B. SWEET

Nominees of Clinical Schools:

Royal Melbourne Hospital—DR P. GREENBERG, MR R. J. S. THOMAS, MR G. SYME

St Vincent's Hospital—DR W. C. HEATH, MR T. ANTONIE Austin and Repatriation General Hospital—MR R. KERNUTT,

MR K. MILLAR, DR R. SMALLWOOD Royal Children's Hospital—DR L. E. G. SLOAN, MR K. STOKES Royal Women s Hospital—MR B. L. G. KNEALE, MR I. C. ROSS Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital—DR W. E. GILLIES Fairfield Hospital—DR I. GUST Peter MacCallum Clinic—DR J. P. MADIGAN Mercy . Maternity Hospital—MR G. MANLY Mount Royal Hospital—DR S. J. H. SHEPHERD

9

Faculty of Medicine

Nominees of:

Victorian Medical Postgraduate Foundation—MR M. R. LUXTON Australian Medical Association (Victorian Branch)—

DR J. F. MACDONALD

Non-professorial Staff Representatives:

DR R. McD. ANDERSON DR J. FORSYTH MR J. G. BULS MR J. FORBES DR J. H. DREW DR D. G. CHRISTIE DR M. R. FENNESSY DR J. R. FLIEGNER DR i. H. JONES DR D. G. LEGGE DR H. MACLEAN DR W. H. SAWYER DR G. YOUNG MR F. W. RlCKARDS DR M. J. ROBINSON MR М . C. DOUGLAS DR E. M. WINTOUR-COUGHLAN DR B. M. TRESS DR G. WHELAN

Elected Student Representatives:

MR D. M. CASALAZ MR G. J. GLADMAN DR S. G. GOURLAY MISS S. Н OO КЕУ MR J. C. JAMIESON MR J. L. SLAVIN MR C. J. WORSNOP

10

CHAPTER 1

IMPORTANT DATES

APPLICATIONS FOR ADMISSION

Applications for admission to First Year should be made on the appro-priate form, which must be lodged at Victorian Universities Admissions Committee, 11 Queens Road, Melbourne, Vic. 3001 by the Friday nearest to the end of October in the year preceding that for which entry is sought.

Applications for admission to any subsequent year should be lodged with the Assistant Registrar (Medicine) on the forms available from the faculty office by the first Friday in November of the year preceding that for which entry is sought.

ENROLMENTS

See Student Diary, and enrolment information from Studentś ' Records at time of enrolling.

TERMS AND EXAMINATIONS All undergraduates should consult Time-table and Summary of Principal Dates for 1983 in Chapter 8.

1st Series 2nd Series Postgraduate

Examinations?

Entries

Exam. Entries Exam. close

begins

close begins

MGO Part 1 MGO Part 2 Clinicais during week

commencing Diplomas Part 1 Diplomas Part 2

(except DDR) DDR

Jan. 14 Feb. 7 July 15 Aug. 15 Jan. 14 Feb. 28 July 15 Aug. 15

Mar. 14

Aug. 22 Jan. 14 Feb. 7

July 15 Aug. 15 Jan. 14 Feb. 28

Aug. 22 Sept. 19

Feb. 28 April

Aug. 27 Oct.

GRADUATION

Apply by:

21 January 24 June

4 November

For Conferring of Degrees on:

9 and 19 March, 9 and 23 April 6 August 11 December .

Ť Entries for these examinations should be lodged at the Faculty Of iсе . Lete entries cannot be accepted.

11

CHAPTER 2

DEGREES AND DIPLOMAS BACHELOR OF MEDICINE AND BACHELOR OF SURGERY

Candidates admitted to this course at First Year level must:

(1) Pass the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination in four Group 1 subjects at the one examination at not more than two attempts;

(2) obtain Grade D or higher at the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination In English', Chemistry and in either Physics, a branch of Mathematics or Biology; and

(3) gain selection in the First Year quota.

Other candidates must have satisfied university entrance requirements under other provis'ons or been granted an exemption from satisfying those requirements on the grounds of other studies and must have satisfied the subject prerequisites for the course. The medical course comprises six years of full-time undergraduate studies for the combined degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery (MB, BS).

OBJECTIVES OF THE MEDICAL COURSE

In passing through the undergraduate curriculum students should acquire:

1. a basis of essential factual knowledge and understanding of prin-ciples relating to the structure and function of the human body;

2. an understanding of principles in the analysis of human behaviour and social functioning relevant to health and disease;

3. a capacity to apply scientific knowledge and attitudes in the analysis of problems at each stage of the educational process;

4. a capacity and motivation for continuing independent learning;

5. an understanding of disease processes and mechanisms in struc-tural and functional terms together with a grasp of their clinical manifestations and treatment;

6. essential skills in the acquisition and interpretation of clinical observations;

7. a capacity to communicate with patients and their relatives, with medical colleagues and members of other health professions;

8. an understanding of professional responsibility in relation to indi-viduals and the community.

STRUCTURE OF THE COURSE

A revised curriculum for the pre-clinical years (One to Three) was intro-duced in 1980 commencing with the First Year programme. The revised Second Year was mounted in 1981 and the revised Third Year in 1982.

I The subject English as a Second Language may be substituted for the subject English in appropriate cases.

12

Degrees and Diplomas

A revised clinical curriculum (years Four to Six) has also been intro-duced commencing with the Fourth Year in 1981 and the Fifth Year in 1982. The revised Sixth Year will be mounted in 1983.

The course may be divided into the following main stages:

1. The Basic Sciences and Medical Sciences These subjects are studied in the first three years of the course, providing the scientific basis for the student's subsequent clinical training. Biology, Chemistry and Physics are taught by the Faculty of Science and are presented in the first two terms of First Year. Training in human Anatomy extends through the whole of the First Year and the first two terms of the Second Year of the course. Behavioural Science is also studied in these two years—Medical Psychology, Medical Sociology and Growth, Development and Ageing are studied during First Year, and Abnormal Psychology is offered in Second Year. During the latter part of First Year students also undertake a short course in First Aid. Physiology commences in the third term of First Year, and continues to the end of second term of the Second Year. A course in Neuroscience is mounted by the departments of Anatomy and Physiology in the third term of Second Year. Biochemistry extends throughout Second Year, and also into Third Year as a substantial part of a course in Metabolism and Endocrinology. The para-clinical subjects, Pathology, Pharmacology and Microbiology Including Immunology are studied throughout Third Year. Social and Preventive Medicine will be presented in the first term of this year.

Advanced Study Units are offered in the second and third years of the course, involving critical review and study in depth of an area of medicine already introduced. The units are mounted in both campus and clinical departments and each student must complete at least two of these units by the end of third year. Correlation seminars are mounted weekly throughout the third year. These provide for presentation of material which integrates teaching in the third year subjects, and demon-strates relevance of second year studies on the one hand and relationship to clinical problems on the other.

Results obtained in all subjects studied in the second and third years of the course (excluding correlation seminars and Advanced Study Units) contribute a 20 per cent weighting toward the student's final assessment at the end of the six year course.

2. The Clinical Sciences

At the end of the third year students are allocated to one of the three general teaching hospitals associated with the University of Melbourne. These are: Austin/Repatriation Hospital at Heidelberg, Royal Melbourne Hospital in Parkville, and St. Vincent's Hospital, Fitzroy. As far as possible students are allocated to the hospital of their choice but it may be necessary in certain years for some other allocation to occur. It 1s here that students spend much of the next three years of their course, except for periods of placement or training at specialist institutions such as the Royal Women's Hospital or Mercy Maternity Hospital, the Royal Children's Hospital, Fairfield Hospital, Mt. Royal Hospital and psychiatric hospitals,

Studies taken in the clinical years include medicine, surgery, principles of clinical pharmacology, microbiology, pathology, radiology, obstetrics

13

Faculty of Medicine

and gynaecology, paediatrics, psychiatry, community and forensic medicine, primary medical care, infectious diseases, geriatric medicine, casualty, trauma, resuscitation, anaesthetics, ophthalmology, otorhino-laryngology (diseases of the ear, nose and throat), immunology, derma-tology. At the beginning of the final year of the course students undertake a 10-week options period of study during which they pursue one or more particular approved topics in general practice, hospitals or elsewhere. Often this options period is undertaken at approved interstate or overseas institutions.

A career in medicine is potentially one of the most exciting and challeng-ing of all professions. Whatever facet of medicine one chooses to enter, be it general practice, teaching, research or one of the spec'alities, the graduate will be required to keep abreast of advances in the major areas of medical knowledge. At the same time, the graduate will be made keenly aware of the many problems which remain to be solved.

For further information see Advice for Those Preparing to Enter the Medical Course (Chapter 3) and Policies Governing Admission (Chapter 4).

BACHELOR OF MEDICAL SCIENCE

A course for the degree of Bachelor of Medical Science is available to encourage medical students to obtain a knowledge in depth of one of the subjects of the medical course and to enter the research field after completion of the medical undergraduate course. Students who have shown special aptitudes in their studies (after Second Year in the areas of Anatomy, Biochemistry, Physiology and otherwise after the Third Year of the Medical Course) and who are recommended by the chairman of the appropriate department, may be approved to undertake advanced studies in one of the medical departments for one year. Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Medical Science will be required to submit for examination a detailed report on the advanced work carried out and may be required to pass in examinations prescribed by the faculty of Medicine. .

Applications for aprovai of candidature for the course should be submitted to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine) on the forms available from the Faculty office,

DOCTOR OF MEDICINE; MASTER OF SURGERY; MASTER OF GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS; MASTER OF MEDICINE

The University offers teaching programmes and/or acts as an examining body for these higher degrees. Candidates may proceed by examination and/or by thesis, depending on the qualification being pursued. The appropriate regulation and details of subjects should be consulted in each case. Attendance at courses of instruction is not compulsory. Candidates for the Master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics may wish to take advantage of a course for the Part I examination which is conducted in the department of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, Royal Women's Hospital. Enquiries should be made to the Professorial Unit at the hospital.

14

Degrees and Diplomas

The Assistant Registrar (Medicine), should be consulted with reference to:

(1) first enquiries regarding eligibility and current details; (2) approval of experience and of candidature for examinations; (3) examination entries and the submission of theses.

The Students Records Office deals with enrolments, examination time-tabI es, results, and applications for degrees to be conferred.

POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMAS

The University also offers teaching programmes and/or acts as an examining body for the following post-graduate specialist diplomas:

Diploma in Ophthalmology' Diploma in Laryngology and Otology Diploma in Diagnostic Radiology' Diploma in Therapeutic Radiology' Diploma in Psychological Medicine Diploma in Anaesthetics2 Diploma in Audiology

Courses and examinations for the Diploma in Public Health have been suspended.

At the present time courses of Instruction are available for the following diplomas and enquiries should be made to the appropriate area as shown below.

Diploma in Laryngology and Otology Diploma in Audiology

Diploma in Psychological Medicine

of Otolaryngology Royal Victorian Eye and Ear

}Department

Hospital. Department of Psychiatry, Clinical Sciences Building Royal Melbourne Hospital.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

This degree for full-time research workers is under the control of the Academic Board. Intending candidates should consult the Secretary for Graduate Studies.

The future of this diploma is under review. Discontinuation of this diploma has been proposed.

15

CHAPTER 3

ADVICE TO THOSE PREPARING TO ENTER THE MEDICAL COURSE

SPECIAL COURSE REQUIREMENTS

Special course requirements for admission to the medical course are compulsory. Students are required to have successfully completed the Victorian Higher School Certificate Exam°nation by obtaining grade D or higher in four Group 1 subjects at the one examination at not more than two attempts, and to have obtained at the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination grade D or higher in English', Chemistry and one of either Physics, a branch of Mathematics or Biology.

PREPARATORY STUDIES FOR THE MEDICAL COURSE

For Year 11, students are advised to include the following studies:

English, Chemistry, at least two subjects from the areas of Biology, Physics and Mathematics, and at least one subject from the non-scientific areas. For the Higher School Cert'ficate examination (Year 12) students must include the following studies:

English, Chemistry and one of Biology, Physics or a Mathematics but students are encouraged to take at least two of this latter group plus at least one other Group 1 subject of their choice, preferably in the non-scientific area. For selection purposes, only one mathematics Group 1 subject can be counted in the "best four" score unless only four subjects are being taken. University entrance requirements provide that a student may not receive credit for General Mathematics and either of Pure Mathematics or Applied Mathematics. The subject Physics in the First Year of the course assumes familiarity with the basic concepts of Physics. Students who have not taken H.S.C. Physics are strongly advised to undertake the recommended preliminary reading before lectures commence.

The subject English as a Second Language may be substituted for the subject English in appropriate cases

16

CHAPTER 4

POLICIES GOVERNING ADMISSION Enquiries should be made from the Assistant Registrar (Medicine). before the Higher School Certificate year is commenced.

PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION Applicants are advised to consider the General Principles of Selection and the Special Principles of Selection which are appropriate to the level at which they may be seeking entry to courses. Principles of Selection cover the following areas:

General Principles of Selection for Entry to First Year Undergraduate Courses. (See Appendix 1.) Special Principles of Selection for Entry to First Year Undergraduate Courses in the Faculty of Medicine. (See below.) General Principles of Selection for Entry to Second and Later Years of Undergraduate Courses. (See Appendix 3.) Special Principles of Selection for Entry to Second and Later Years of Undergraduate Courses in the Faculty of Medicine. (See below.) Principles of Selection for Entry to the Post-Graduate Education Courses. (Not applicable to this Handbook.) Principles of Selection for Entry to First and Second Year of the Bachelor of Social Work Course. (Not applicable to this Handbook.) General Principles of Selection for Entry to Postgraduate Courses.

Potential applicants, after reading the relevant sets of principles, should seek further information from the faculties or board of studies in whose courses they are interested, or the Office for Prospective and New Students, if they need assistance in interpreting these principles in the light of their own circumstances and background.

Applicants who have attempted or completed tertiary studies will be considered for entry at the highest level for which they are assessed to be eligible, if they are not assessed as eligible for the level sought. Course application forms make provision for these arrangements and applicants who are unsure of their eligibility for a particular year or level of entry are encouraged to seek advice. The number of places available in each course is i'mlted afd there may be quotas in specific years of a course and, in some cases, subjects or units.

UNIVERSITY'S GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR ENTRY TO FIRST YEAR UNDERGADUATE COURSES

See Appendix 1 at back of this Handbook.

UNIVERSITY'S ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR 1983 AND THE VICTORIAN HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFICATE EXAMINATION


UNIVERSITY'S GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR ENTRY TO SECOND AND LATER YEARS OF UNDERGRADUATE COURSES


17

Faculty of Medicine

UNIVERSITY'S GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR ENTRY TO POST-GRADUATE COURSES


FIRST YEAR FACULTY'S SPECIAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR ENTRY TO THE FIRST YEAR UNDERGRADUATE COURSE

1. Preamble

Except to the extent that they are expressly modified hereby, the General Principles of Selection for Entry to First Year Undergraduate Courses are incorporated with these special principles of selection for the first year of the undergraduate course of the faculty.

2. Eligibility

Applicants for admission to the course for the degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery must, at the first or second attempt, have obtained a grade of D or higher in four subjects including English', Chemistry and one of Physics, Biology or a branch of Mathematics at the Higher School Certificate examination or its equivalent, and the results obtained in any subjects attempted subsequent to a second attempt shall not be counted in the formula. Mature age applicants should note that a pass in the test in Englishl is not an acceptable alterna-tive to the obtaining of a grade of D or higher in English.

З . Selection

3.1 The results obtained in English and Chemistry, If not among the applicant's 'best four' subjects, and the best result obtained in Physics, Biology or a branch of Mathematics, if one of these subjects is not among the applicant's 'best four' subjects, shall be substituted for the result obtained in one or more of the 'best four' subjects referred to in the formula adopted under the General Principles of Selection, provided that the result obtained in a second branch of Mathematics shall not be included, except if no other result is available.

3.2 Where an applicant has attended for more years than are usual in the senior years of secondary school before sitting for the Higher School Certificate examination or its equivalent, the total of the calculation pursuant to the formula shall be reduced by up to 10%, dependent upon the circumstances.

3.3 The Selection Committee may interview any applicant who shall not have attained the age of 17 years by 31 March in the year for which application for selection is made, for the purpose of determining whether the age of that applicant may adversely affect the applicant's ability to pursue successfully the course.

3.4 In assessing an applicant who has commenced but not completed a tertiary course, selection will be based on performance during tertiary studies in addition to performance at the HSC examination.

The English Test as offered up to 1981. 1 Thgi subject English as a Second Language may be substituted for the subject

English in appropriate cases.

18

Policies Governing Admission

3.51n considering an overseas applicant for selection, account will be taken of the availability to the applicant of medical education in the applicant's own country and the existence of any agreed programmes of assistance to that country.

4. Reservation of places in quota (deferment) 4.1 The number of reserved places granted in any year shall not nor-

mally exceed by more than 50% the annual average number of such places granted over the preceding three years. Preference in granting reserved places will be given in accordance with quota score ranking.

4.2 An applicant who is ranked in the lowest 20% of those to whom places have been offered and who has requested the reservation of a place in the succeeding year's quota must submit a reason for the request. A submission from a school principal may also be considered. If, in the opinion of the selection committee, the reason is insufficient, the request may be refused.

4.3 Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 3.5 of the General Principles of Selection, applicants who have been granted reserved places shall notify the Assistant Registrar of the faculty by 31st December of the year for which deferment has been granted, whether or not the reserved place will be taken up in the following year.

SECOND AND LATER YEARS FACULTY'S SPECIAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR ENTRY TO SECOND AND LATER YEARS

1. Preamble

Except to the extent that they are expressly modified hereby, the General Principles of Selection for Entry to Second and Later Years of Under-graduate Courses are incorporated with these special principles of selection for second and later years of the undergraduate courses of the faculty.

2. Applications

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 of the General Principles of Selection, all applicants for selection for second year or a later year of the course must lodge applications with the Assistant Registrar (Medicine) using an "Application for Admission" form' obtainable from the Registrar's Enquiry Office or any faculty office. The closing date for applications shall be the first Friday in November of the year preceding that for which selection is sought.

3. Eligibility and Level of Entry 3.1 Second Year Entry for Certain Applicants

Applicants who are: (a) students seeking a transfer from another medical school which,

in the opinion of the faculty, is of equivalent academic standing; (b) university graduates or undergraduates from a course providing

experience comparable to first year of the medical course (e.g. Dentistry, Science, Veterinary Science);

1. Applicants must complete any other appropriate form If required.

19

Faculty of Medicine

(c) graduates with approved degrees or diplomas in science or science-related studies from colleges of advanced education; and who have completed training and studies which the faculty, on the advice of the Selection Committee, considers satisfactory, shall be eligible for selection for entry to the course at the level of second year or in cases deemed appropriate by the Faculty, for entry to the course to undertake in one year combined Second and Third Year studies pursuant to Regulation 3.35.4(2).

3.2 Third and Fourth Year Entry for Applicants from Medical Schools of Equivalent Standing

Applicants seeking to transfer from another medical school which, in the opinion of the faculty, is of equivalent academic standing, and who have completed training and studies relevant to medicine to a standard which the faculty, on the advice of the selection com-mittee, considers satisfactory shall be eligible for selection for entry to the course at the level of third or fourth year.

3.3 Applicants from other Australian, New Zealand or United Kingdom medical schools Applicants who produce satisfactory evidence of having successfully completed examinations in the pre- and para-clinical subjects in other Australian, New Zealand or United Kingdom medical schools may be eligiЫ e for selection for entry to the course at the level of second year, or third or fourth year as deemed by the selection committee to be appropriate. The selection committee may, on the basis of an applicant's academic record, select an applicant con-ditionally on the basis of the applicant's passing a qualifying examination in any of the preceding subjects in the course.

3.4 Applicants from European, North American or South African university medical schools of approved standing

3.4.1 Applicants who have graduated from or completed a portion of a course in, other European, North American or South African Medical Schools of approved standing, and who produce satis-factory evidence that they have passed appropriate examinations in Anatomy (including Histology and Embryology), Biochemistry, Physiology, Behavioural Science and Neuroscience shall be required to present for the second year annual examinations and such additional tests as faculty may determine in these subjects as qualifying examinations in order to be eligible for selection for entry to the course at the level of third year.

3.4.2 Applicants who have completed studies and examinations in the subjects noted in paragraph 3.4.1 above, together with appropriate studies in Pathology, Microbiology and Immunology, Pharma-cology, Metabolism and Endocrinology; and Social and Preventive Medicine may be required to present for such tests as the faculty may determine as qualifying examinations in order to be eligible for selection for entry to the fourth year of the course.

3.4.3 For the purpose of receiving instruction, applicants who so desire may seek permission from the chairmen of the departments con-cerned to attend lectures in the second or third year subjects. Those who attend lectures must comply with any enrolment pro-cedures which might be required.

20


3.4.4 Credit for subjects passed in a previous year will not necessarily be granted in consideration for selection in a subsequent year.

3.4.5 All examinations required by the faculty to be taken as a qualifying test must be passed within one twelve month period.

3.5 Applicants from any other medical school of approved standing Applicants who produce satisfactory evidence of having completed examinations in the pre- and para-clinical subjects from a university medical school which the faculty considers to be of a satisfactory academic standard, shall be required to present for the appropriate examinations at second year, and such additional tests as faculty may determine in these subjects as qualifying examinations in order to be eligible for selection for entry to the course. Subject to special permission from the Dean, applicants may be admitted to lectures as set out in 3.4.3 above.

4. Selection

4.1 The selection committee may require an applicant to attend for such interviews and written tests as it considers appropriate for determin-ing the applicant's competence in English expression and compre-hension.

4.2 In ranking applicants the selection committee may, at its discretion: (a) give greater weight to results obtained in subjects most relevant

to the medical course: (b) take into account results in such tests of knowledge and com-

petence in subjects for which credit is sought, as are prescribed by the selection committee; and

(c) take into account information supplied by an applicant's referees.

5. Conditional Selection Admission may be granted to second or later year of the course subject to the satisfactory completion of such preliminary studies or examination as the faculty may determine on the advice of the selection committee.

6. Reservation of Places in Quotas (Deferment) 6.1 Reserved places may only be granted in extraordinary circumstances,

and at the discretion of the faculty, to applicants who have been selected for a second or later year of the course.

6.2 Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 4.3 of the General Principles of Selection, applicants who have been granted reserved places shall notify the Assistant Registrar of the faculty by the first Friday in November of the year for which deferment has been granted, whether or not the reserved place will be taken up in the following year.

QUOТ AS

FIRST YEAR QUOTA 210 (Provisional).

SECOND AND LATER YEAR QUOTAS The provisional quota for Second Year is 220 plus up to ten places (for students who may be eligible for exemption from all or part of the requirements of individual subjects in Second Year), comprising,

21

Faculty of Medicine

(i) All students passing First Year and proceeding to Second Year (ii) Students permitted to repeat Second Year

(iii) Second Year students permitted to resume the course after leave of absence.

If the total of the above categories does not reach 220:

(iv) University graduates or undergraduates from Sciences—Dentistry, Veterinary Science, Science, etc,

(v) Students who have a genuine change of home to Victoria after completing the first or later year of a medical course in another State.

(vi) Students holding other approved degrees or diplomas from colleges of advanced education

shall be admitted, if necessary after selection, on the basis of academic merit.

In addition, there shall be power for the selection committee to recom-mend the admission of students to a combined Second and Third Year course which, if successfully completed, would permit entry to Fourth Year. It is envisaged that such students would hold a higher degree with major studies in Pathology, Microbiology or Pharmacology. To enable these students to reach the standard required for entry to Fourth Year, they would be required to undertake, after receiving credit for previous studies, a combined course of Second and Third Year subjects.

The provisional quota for Third Year is 230, comprising,

(i) All students passing Second Year and proceeding to Third Year (ii) Students permitted to repeat Third Year

(iii) Third Year students permitted to resume the course after leave of absence.


(iv) Students transferring from other medical schools who are deemed to have obtained a standard equivalent to that of our Second Year (to be subject to selection on the basis of academic merit if necessary).

The provisional quota for Fourth Year is 230, comprising, • (i) All students passing Third Year and proceeding to Fourth Year (ii) Students permitted to repeat Fourth Year (lit) Fourth Year students permitted to resume the course after leave

of absence.


(iv) Suitabl y qualified students admitted on the basis of studies from interstate or overseas medical schools (to be subject to selection on the basis of academic merit if necessary).

The provisional quota for Fifth Year is 230, comprising,

(i) All students passing Fourth Year and proceeding to Fifth Year. (ii) Students permitted to repeat Fifth Year.

(iii) Fifth Year students permitted to resume the course after leave of absence.

• This would include students admitted to a combined Second and Third Year referred to under the policy of Second Year.

22


If the total of the above categories does not reach 230: (iv) Suita ьІ y qualified students admitted on the basis of studies from

interstate medical schools (to be subject to selection on the basis of academic merit If necessary).

GENERAL POLICY GOVERNING ADMISSION FROM OTHER TERTIARY INSTITUTIONS

The Medical Practitioners Act 1970 makes it possible for a person to be entitled to apply to be registered as a legally qualified medical practitioner in the State of Victoria if that person holds the Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery of any university in Aus-tralia as to at least the last three academic years of a regular course of medical and surgical study at that University.

As a consequence, the faculty of Medicine has formulated the following general policy governing the admission of students who have completed the whole or part of a medical course elsewhere: t General principles applicable to all candidates. (a) No student is permitted to qualify for the degrees of M.B., B.S. un-

less otherwise eligible for registration in Victoria. (b) Students who do not speak English as their native tongue are re-

quired to pass a test in English. (c) Students who have completed part of a medical course in an over-

seas university may be required to undergo tests and satisfy chairmen of departments as to their knowledge of prerequisite subjects fo• the purpose of assessing any credit they may receive in the course.

(d) The number of students admitted on the basis of studies undertaken at other institutions to any year of the course shall be subject to any quota and selection process that may be found necessary.

(e) Students not considered eligible for admission to the later years of the course must comply with the policies governing selection to any quota which applies to First or Second Years.

Reference should also be made to the Faculty's Special Principles of Selection for Entry to Second and Later Years elsewhere in this chapter and to a document available from the Assistant Registrar (Medicine).

23

CHAPTER 5

SCHOLARSHIPS, BURSARIES, PRIZES AND FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE

The awards summarized in the following list are available to medical students. The approximate value of each award is given, together with the office at which full information may be obtained. Other awards availabIe in clinical years to students of particular schools appear under "Clinical Instruction at Recognized Teaching Hospitals" in Chapter 8.

See also the University's Calendar for financial assistance, scholarships and awards available to students generally. Information may also be ob-tained from the Student Financial Aid Office, 272 Faraday St., Carlton.

Financial assistance may be given during a course from the F. Gordon Elford Fund. See Regulation R 7.86

UNDERGRADUATE AWARDS—M.B., B.S. COURSE

Unless specified otherwise, these are awarded at Annual Examinations Full information may be obtained from the Assistant Registrar (Medicine).

First Year:

Chemistry—Exhibition ($30). . Physics—G. A. Syme Exhibition ($30). Physics—T. F. Ryan Roentgen Prize (Medal, plus $20) for essay. Biology—W. H. Swanton Exhibition (S40). Biology—Baldwin Spencer Prize (books to value of $33). Anatomy—Mathew W. Mckenzie Award ($50).

Second Year:

Anatomy—Dwight Prize ($100). Anatomy—Exhibition ($20). Behavioural Science 2—Geigy Prize (S50). Physiology—Burroughs Wellcome Prize ($100). Biochemistry—Exhibitions ($50, S20). Thomas and Elizabeth Ross Scholarship—($500 ea.) for additional year

of study leading to the degree of Bachelor of Medical Science.

Third Year:

Anatomy—T. F. Ryan Prize (Medal, plus $20). Pharmacology—Boots Prize ($75). Pathology—Walter and Eliza Hall Exhibition (860). Microbiology including Immunology—Medishield-Ramsay Prize (8100). Thomas and Elizabeth Ross Scholarship—($500 ea.) for additional year

of study leading to the degree of Bachelor of Medical Science.

Fourth Year:

Cadetships (Army, Navy, Air Force) are offered each year to under-graduates qualified to enter the clinical section of the course. Full information should be obtained from the Commonwealth Department

•concerned.

24

Scholarships, Bursaries, Prizes and Financial Assistance

Medishield-Ramsay Prize in Clinical Microbiology ($100).

Thomas and Elizabeth Ross Scholarship—($500 ea.) for additional year of study leading to the degree of Bachelor of Medical Science.

Fifth Year:

Community Medicine and Clinical Practice—Prize ($10). Crawford Molfison Prize in Community and Forensic Medicine ($200). Medical Officers of Health Section of A.M.A. Prize in Primary Medical

Care—($50).

Sixth Year:

Medicine—

Carnation Prize in Paediatrics ($105). Grieve Memorial Prize in Paediatrics ($200). Jamieson Prize in Clinical Medicine ($123 approx.). John Adey Prize in Psychiatry ($102 approx.). Keith Levi Memorial Scholarship ($264 approx.). Robert Gartley Healey Prize in Medicine ($341 approx.). Upjohn Award in Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics ($150).

Surgery-

В eanе y Scholarship ($366 approx.). Clara Myers Prize in Surgical Paediatrics ($254 approx.). Robert Gartley Healey Prize in Surgery ($341 approx.). Proxime Accessit Prize in Surgery ($250 approx.).

Obstetrics and Gynaecology-

Dr. Kate Campbell Prize in Neonatal Paediatrics ($129 approx.). Edgar and Mabel Coles Prize in Obstetrics ($200). Fulton Scholarship ($304 approx.). Hubert Sydney Jacobs Prize in Clinical Gynaecology ($100) Robert Gartley Healey Prize in Obstetrics ($341 approx.). Sir A. E. Rowden White Prize in Clinical Obstetrics ($500). Max Kohane Prize in Obstetrics and Gynaecology ($60).

General—

E. H. Ems ey Prize in Anaesthetics (Medal and $45). A.M.A. Prize ($1,000).

All Clinical Years:

Dermatology—

Herman Lawrence Prizes ($100 + Books) Special examination.

Occupational Medicine—

Edgar Rouse Prizes ($350, $175) Special examination.

Ophthalmology—

Australian College of Ophthalmologists Prize ($100 approx.) Special examination.

Otolaryngology-

Hedley F. Summons Prize ($200 approx.) Special examination.

25

Faculty of Medicine

POSTGRADUATE AWARDS

Information may be obtained from the Assistant Registrar (Medicine), concerning the following:

Beaney Scholarship in Pathology. Thomas and Elizabeth Ross Scholarship. Sir Thomas Peel Dunhill Research Scholarship. Sir Thomas Naghten Fitzgerald Scholarship. Arthur Nyulasy Scholarship in Gynaecology. Armytage Prize. Stewart Scholarships in Medicine and Surgery. Melbourne Medical Postgraduate Committee, Gordon-Taylor Scholarship .

David В . Rosenthal Scholarship. Selwyn-Smith Medical Research Prize. Sheppard M. Lowe Scholarship. Hugh Noel Puckle Scholarship. R. B. McComas Scholarship. Felix Meyer Scholarship. Velma Stanley Award. Alcock Medical Research Scholarship. Fletcher Scholarship. Thompson Medical Research Scholarship.

The Secretary for Graduate Studies should be consulted concerning all other postgraduate awards.

26

CHAPTER 6

NOTICES TO MEDICAL GRADUATES HOSPITAL APPOINTMENTS

The Board of Management of The Royal Melbourne Hospital,. Parkville, makes annual appointments of medical graduates. The current establish-ment provides for 42 interns (first year graduates), 30 second year Junior Resident Medical Officers, 11 third year Senior R.M.0.s and 3 third year Senior Resident Surgical Officers, 10 General Surgical Registrars, 10 General Medical Registrar posts suitable for training in general medicine. In addition there are 7 Specialist Medical Registrar positions suitable for advanced training in medical specialities and 6 trainees in General Practice. There are also 8 Specialist Surgical Registrar positions suitable for training in surgical specialities: Twenty-two Specialist Registrar positions are available in the Specialities of Anatomical Pathology (2), Anaesthetics (7), Haematology (2), Intensive Care Unit (1), Microbiology (1), Psychiatry (3), Radiology (1). In addition, the Board of Manage-ment appoints annually a Junior Resident Dental Officer and a Resident Dental Registrar for a period of 12 months. All of these positions may include rotations to Victorian suburban and country hospitals along with hospitals in New Guinea. For further Information, graduates should direct their enquiries to the Director of Medical Services. The Royal Melbourne Hospital Post Office, 3050. The Sister Administrator of St. Vincent's Hospital will appoint for 1983 41 interns for one year. The current establishment also provides for 32 Junior Resident Medical Officers (second year graduates), 12 Senior Resident Medical Officers (third year graduates), 8 General Medical Registrars, 7 General Surgical Registrars and Registrar positions in the various specialities as follows:- Cardiology (2), Dermatology (1), Gastroenterology (1), Psychiatry (3), Renal Medicine (1 ), Anatomical Pathology (2), Haematology (2), Microbiology (1), . Radiology (6), Cardin-thoracic Surgery (1), Neurosurgery (1), Orthopaedic Surgery (2), Plastic Surgery (1), Urology (1 ), Neurology (1), Anaesthetics (8), and Rehabilitation Medicine (1), Endocrinology (1), Nuclear Medicine (1), Paediatric Medicine (1), Rheumatology (1), Biochemistry (1). In addi-tion, a Junior Resident Dental Officer is appointed annually. These appointments will be for 52 weeks.

The Board of Management of Austin Hospital, Heidelberg, makes annual appointments of medical graduates. The current establishment provides for 32 interns (first-year graduates), 22 Junior Resident Medical Officers (second-year graduates), 13 Senior Resident Medical Officers (third-year graduates), 5 Medical Registrars, 7 Surgical Registrars and Registrars in special departments-Anaesthetics (12), Radiology (4). Psychiatry (8), Orthopaedic (2), Anatomical Pathology (2), Paediatrics (2), Bio-chemistry, Haematology, Dermatology, Gynaecology, Haematology (Clinical), Neurology, Renal Medicine, Cardiothoracic Surgery, Micro-biology, Spinal Unit, Gastroenterology Fellow (2), Endocrinology Fellow (1), Vascular Surgery Fellow (1), Clinical Pharmacology Fellow (2), Cardiology Fellow (2), Orthopaedic Fellow (1), Plastic Surgery (1).

The Repatriation General Hospital, Heidelberg,' makes annual appoint-ments of medical graduates. The current establishment provides for 16

27

Faculty of Medicine

interns (first-year graduates), 12 Junior Resident Medical Officers (second-year graduates), 11 Senior Resident Medical Officers (third-year graduates), 14 Medical Registrars (including thoracic, rehabilitation, gastroenterology, oncology, neurology, renal medicine, research, cardi-ology, nuclear medicine, haematology and general medicine), 11 Surgical Registrars (including specialist registrars in ENT, ophthalmic surgery. urology, research), 4 Psychiatry Registrars, 1 Radiology Registrar, 3 Pathology Registrars, 2 Anaesthetic Registrars.

Advice concerning the appointment of interns (first-year graduates) is available from the Victorian Medical Postgraduate Foundation, Intern Matching Service, "Trawalla", 22 Lascelles Ave., Toorak, 3142; Tele-phone 240 8671.

The Management of the following hospitals and others may also appoint Junior Resident Medical Officers:

Metropolitan Hospitals: Alfred Hospital, Austin Hospital, Prince Henry's Hospital, Queen Victoria Memorial Hospital, Fairfield Hos-pital, Footscray and District Hospital, Box Hill and District Hospital, Preston and Northcote Community Hospital, Sandringham and District Hospital, Caulfield Hospital, Royal Southern Memorial Hospital, Williamstown Hospital, Frankston Community Hospital, Hampton Hospital, Mount Royal Hospital. Base Hospitals: Ballarat, Bendigo, Geelong, Mildura, Gippsland (Sale), Glenelg (Hamilton), Mooroopna, Wangaratta, Warrnambool, Wimmera (Horsham), Goulburn Valley (Mooroopna). District Hospitals: Latrobe Valley (Yallourn) and Central Gippsland (Traralgon), Swan Hill, West Gippsland (Warragul), Echuca, Dandenong, Ararat, Castlemaine, Colac, East Gippsland (Bairns-dale), Wodonga, Maryborough.

For advice on appointments to Base and District Hospitals the Health Department should be consulted.

Vacancies for similar positions in Western Australia and Tasmania occur. Non-metropolitan towns in South Australia, New South Wales and Queensland frequently advertise for Junior Residents.

REGISTRATION IN THE UNITED KINGDOM

Before applying for full registration with the General Medical Council in Britain, medical graduates must have acquired the following experience:

(i) the equivalent of six months in medicine and six months in surgery as a resident house officer in an approved hospital; or

(ii) a rotating internship of twelve months in an approved hospital.

A working entry certificate is required prior to taking up employment in the United Kingdom. This may be arranged through the office of the British Consulate-General, 330 Collins St., Melbourne, or from offices in other capital cities.

The National Advice Centre for Postgraduate Medical and Dental Educa-tion and Training in London operates a central reference service which is conducted in association with the Victorian Medical Postgraduate Foundation. This service enables applicants for positions in the United

28

Notices to Medical Graduates

Kingdom to refer employing authorities direct to the National Advice Centre for copies of their confidential references. Intending applicants must, in the first instance, contact the V.M.P.F. Detailed information and application forms for registration and the central reference service are available from the Victorian Medical Postgraduate Foundaton, 22 Lascelles Avenue, Toorak 3142; Telephone 240 8671.

29

CHAPTER 7

REGULATIONS

REGULATION 3.35—DEGREES OF BACHELOR OF MEDICINE AND BACHELOR OF SURGERY

1. A candidate for the degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery shall, after matriculating, pursue his studies for not less than six years, attend such lectures and classes and perform such practical work and pass such examinations as may be prescribed.

2. No candidate shall be admitted to the course for the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery unless, subject to dispen-sation by the Academic Board in special cases, having sat for the Higher School Certificate examination on not more than two occasions, he has:

(a) at one sitting obtained grade D or higher in four subjects; and (b) obtained grade D or higher in English, Chemistry and one of Physics,

Biology or a branch of Mathematics.

3. The subjects of the course for the degrees and the conditions on which such subjects may be taken shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Medicine and published with the details of subjects.

4. (1) To pass a Year of the course, a candidate shall comply with one of the following conditions:

(a) he shall pass at the examinations in or obtain credit for each subject of that Year; or

(b) he shall be passed by the faculty in the Year of the course as a whole. In awarding such pass, the faculty shall take into account his performance in all subjects in accordance with principles determined by the faculty from time to time and approved by the Academic Board. A candidate passed by the faculty in the Year as a whole who has not passed at the examination in, or obtained credit for, any particular subject shall not be recorded as having passed in that subject.

(2) (a) Except where otherwise prescribed by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects or where special permission is given by the faculty, a student shall pass one Year of the course in accordance with the preceding sub-sections before being allowed to proceed to the succeeding Year of the course.

(b) Provided that where in the details of subjects it is prescribed that any subject shall rank as a single subject which may be passed separately a candidate who fails in the examination in that subject only may be permitted by the faculty in its abso-lute discretion to proceed with the work of the next succeeding year in such manner and subject to such conditions as may be prescribed.

(3) A candidate who has not passed a Year of the course in accor-dance with sub-section (1) hereof must repe.at the whole of that Year of the course unless special permission to do otherwise is granted by the faculty.

30

Regulations

5. (i) The examinations in Medicine shall be conducted by a board of examiners of which a Professor of Medicine shall be a member and act as chairman.

(11) The examinations in Surgery shall be conducted by a board of examiners of which a Professor of Surgery shall be a member and act as chairman.

(Iii) The examinations in Obstetrics and Gynaecology shall be conduc-ted by a board of examiners of which a Professor of Obstetrics and Gynaecology shall be a member and act as chairman.

6. Repealed.

7. Unless otherwise provided, a candidate who fails to pass any sub-ject or subjects may at the discretion of the faculty of Medicine on the unanimous recommendation of the board of examiners be required to give further evidence before re-examination of having attended such further instruction or having performed such further practical work as the faculty may direct

8. Hospital work shall be as prescribed by details of subjects or announcements published by the faculty and subject to any such pro-visions by announcements made at the recognized hospitals and shall not be subject to statutes and regulations governing University terms and vacations.

9. The faculty may require attendance at any lectures or demonstra-tions or the performance of any practical work prescribed in the details of subjects during such part of any vacation as it may deem fit.

10. Candidates who have passed all the prescribed examinations and fulfilled all the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery.

11. Where pursuant to regulations subsequently repealed or amended a candidate has obtained credit or may retain credit in the course for the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery, the faculty may determine In what further subjects he must pass in order to obtain the degree; and, notwithstanding anything to the contrary, the faculty may ex-empt him from such subjects of the course as are in Its opinion the substantial equivalent of subjects already passed pursuant to the repealed or amended regulations.

REGULATION 3.71—DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF MEDICAL SCIENCE

1. (1) A candidate for the degree of bachelor of Medical Science shall pursue for not less than one year a course of advanced studies in—

(a) one of the following; (1) Anatomy;

(ii) Biochemistry; (iii) Physiology; or

(b) such other subject as the faculty of Medicine may from time to time approve for the purposes of this regulation.

(2) A candidate pursuing advanced studies in a subject listed in paragraph (a) of sub-section (1), may commence the course at any time after completing the Second Year of the course for the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery but may not be admitted to the degree of bachelor of Medical Science before completing the Third Year of the latter course.

31

Faculty of Medicine

(3) A candidate pursuing advanced studies In any subject approved by the faculty pursuant to paragraph (b) of sub-section (1), may com-mence the course at any time after completing the Third Year of the course for the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery. 2. Before commencing his course, a candidate shall obtain the approval of the faculty and of the chairman of the department in which he proposes to carry out his course, and the chairman of that department shall with the approval of the faculty prescribe for him the advanced studies to be pursued by him. 3. No candidate shall be admitted to the course unless (a) in the opinion of the faculty he has shown special aptitude for his studies in the course for the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery and (b) he has been recommended by the chairman of the department in which his advanced studies are to be carried out as a person fit to carry out such studies. 4. The chairman of the department in which the candidate proposes to carry out his course of advanced studies may, with the approval of the faculty, require the candidate to attend lectures, carry out practical work, and pass an examination in a subject or subjects, or any part or parts of a subject or subjects, related to his course.' 5. A candidate shall submit for examination a detailed report on the advanced studies carried out by him and may be required to pass a written examination or a viva voce examination, or both, concerning the subject of such report. 6. A candidate who has submitted a satisfactory report on his advanced studies and fulfilled all other conditions prescribed for him may be admitted to the degree of bachelor of Medical Science.

REGULATION 3.36—DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF MEDICINE

1. The faculty of Medicine may admit as a candidate of doctor of Medicine— (a) any person who is a

Surgery; or (b) who holds a degree or degrees recognized by the faculty for the

purposes of this regulation and for the purposes of Regulation 3.3.1 and in either case is a graduate of at least two years' standing. 2. (1) A candidate may proceed to the degree by submitting a thesis or published work satisfactory to the examiners on a subject approved by the faculty as relevant to the theory or practice of Medicine. Such thesis or published work must in the opinion of the faculty be a substantial contribution to knowledge and the outcome of original research by the candidate.

(2) Where required by the examiners, a candidate shall present for an oral or other examination on the subject of the thesis. 3. At least one of the examiners of the thesis or published work shall be an external examiner.

[TEMPORARY REGULATION 1. A candidate who before 31st December 1977 has successfully completed the examinations prescribed for Part I pursuant to the regulations in force at 1st March 1977 may qualify for the degree as if those regulations had remained in force.

'Where the prescribed ancillary work is to be carried out in a department outside the faculty of Medicine the candidate will be subject to any legislation governing that course.

bachelor of Medicine and

for the degree

a bachelor of

З 2

Regulations

2. This temporary regulation shall expire on 31st December 1982.1

REGULATION 3.37 — DEGREE OF MASTER OF SURGERY

1, (1) There shall be a degree of master of Surgery ("the degree"), (2) A person who-

a) (i) is a bachelor of Medicine and a bachelor of Surgery; or

(ii) holds a degree or degrees recognized by the faculty of Medicine ("the faculty') pursuant to Regulation 3.3.1 (1)(b);

in each case of not less than two years standing; and (b) has not less than two years' experience as a medical officer

in a hospital affiliated for the purposes of teaching with a university recognized by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty for the purposes of this regulation;

may, subject to the. consent of the faculty, be admitted to . candidature for the degree.

2. A candidate shall engage in a course of study and research in a discipline related to surgery being one of such disciplines as are approved from time to time by the Academic Board on the recom-mendation of the faculty.

3. (1 ) A candidate shall obtain the approval of the faculty for the course of study and research proposed by the candidate before commencing the course and for any change in the candidate's course proposed after commencing it.

(2) The faculty may, for the purposes of section 6(1((b), approve retrospectively a period of research undertaken in a discipline approved pursuant to section 2.

4. The examination for the degree shall be in two parts, Part I and Part II.

5. (1) The subjects of Part I and the syllabus of each subject shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published annually with the details of subjects.

(2) A candidate who presents evidence satisfactory to the faculty that he or she— (a) has passed an examination or examinations which are

comparable to Part I of the examination and have been approved for the purpose by the faculty; or

(b) has had other professional education and experience rele-vant to the approved discipline which is satisfactory to the faculty;

may be exempted from Part I of the examination and given credit therefor.

6. (1) Before presenting for Part Il of the examination a candidate shall— (a) have passed in or obtained credit for Part I of the exami-

nation; and (b) have completed a period of research, of not less than

twelve months if undertaken full-time or a period which is deemed by the faculty to be its equivalent if undertaken part-time, in a discipline approved pursuant to section 2.

в 33

(2)

Faculty of Medicine

(2) Part II of the examination shall consist of the presentation of a thesis dealing with some aspect of the discipline approved for research pursuant to sub-section (1).

7. No candidate shall be admitted to the degree who— (a) is a graduate of less than five years' standing; or (b) has not devoted at least three years since graduating to the

practice and study of surgery and the disciplines relevant thereto.

8. A candidate who has satisfied the examiners in Part li of the examination and has otherwise complied with the provisions of this regulation may be admitted to the degree of master of Surgery.

REGULATION 3.94 — DEGREE OF MASTER OF MEDICINE

There shall be a degree of master of Medicine. A person who— (a) (i) is a bachelor of Medicine and a bachelor of Surgery,

or (ii) holds a degree or degrees recognized by the faculty

of Medicine ("the faculty") pursuant to Regulation 3.3.1(1)íb),

in each case of at least two years' standing; (b) has had not less than two years' experience as a medical

officer in a hospital affiliated for the purposes of teaching with a university recognized by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty for the purposes of this regulation; and

(c) has obtained the consent of the faculty to candidature—may be admitted to candidature for the degree of master of Medicine.

The degree may be obtained either by course work or by thesis.

2. (1) A candidate for the degree by course work shall pursue a course of study and training in a discipline being one of such disciplines as may be prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects.

Before commencing the course for the degree, the candidate shall obtain the approval of the faculty for a course of study and training in a prescribed discipline approved by the faculty ("the approved discipline") and shall obtain the approval of the faculty for any subsequent change in such course.

The examination for the degree by course work shall be in two parts, Part I and Part il. The subjects of each Part and the syllabus of each subject of examination shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published annually with the details of subjects.

A candidate who presents evidence satisfactory to the faculty of having— (a) passed an examination or examinations which are com-

parable to Part I of the examination and have been approved for the purpose by the faculty; or

1. (1)

(2)

(3)

34

Regulations

(b) had other professional education and experience relevant to the approved discipline which is satisfactory to the faculty;

may be exempted from Part I of the examination and given credit therefor.

(4) Part I1 of the examination shall consist of written, clinical and oral examinations, as prescribed, in the approved discipline.

(5) Before presenting for Part Il of the examination a candidate shall have passed in or obtained credit for Part I of the examination.

(6) Before completing Part Il of the examination a candidate shall have completed a course of study and training in the approved discipline of not less than twelve months if undertaken full-time or a period which is deemed by the faculty to be its equivalent if undertaken part-time.

4. A candidate for the degree by thesis shall— (a) pass in, or as provided in section 3, obtain credit for Part I of

the examination referred to in section 3; (b) complete a period of research in a discipline approved (whether

prospectively or retrospectively) by the faculty being one of the disciplines prescribed pursuant to section 2(1) ("the approved discipline') which period shall be not less than twelve months if undertaken full-time or a period deemed by the faculty to be its equivalent if undertaken part-time; and

(c) submit for examination published or unpublished work based upon that research and dealing with some aspect of the approved discipline.

5. A candidate who-

a) is a graduate of not less than five years' standing; (b) has devoted at least three years since graduation to practice and

study relevant to the approved discipline; (c) has satisfied the examiners pursuant to either section 3 or

section 4; and (d) has otherwise complied with the provisions of this regulation; may be admitted to the degree of master of Medicine.

REGULATION 3.38—DEGREE OF MASTER OF GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS

1. Candidates for the degree of master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics must—

(a) hold the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery in the University; or

(b) hold any other degree or degrees whether in this University or any other university or institution which degree or degrees is or are, whether separately or in combination, recognized by the faculty of Medicine pursuant to Regulation 3.3.1 as appropriate for the pur-poses of this regulation.

2. Candidates shall not be admitted to Part I of the examination unless they are bachelors of Medicine and bachelors of Surgery or the holders of other degrees recognized as provided in section 1(b) hereof of at

35

Faculty of Medicine

least two years standing and unless they have two years' experience as a resident medical officer in a general hospital. Provided that a candidate who has spent only one year as a resident medical officer in a general hospital may be approved as a candidate for Part I if, in addition, he has also spent one year as a resident medical officer in a special paediatric hospital.

3. Candidates shall not be admitted to Part Il of the examination or be permitted to present a thesis unless they are bachelors of Medicine and bachelors of Surgery or the holders of other degrees recognized as provided in section 1 (b) hereof of at least five years' standing, at least two years which have been spent in obstetrical and gynaecological training of a type approved by the faculty of Medicine, and as prescribed in details of subjects.

4. Candidates may proceed to the degree of master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics either by examination only, or by examination and thesis: Provided that the examiners of the thesis may allow any candidate to proceed by presentation of a thesis only. Candidates proceeding by thesis only must first satisfy the requirements as to general and special experi. ence specified in sections 2 and 3. A thesis must relate to the theory or practice or both of Gynaecology and Obstetrics or Gynaecology or Obstetrics and must be a substantial contribution to knowledge and the outcome of original research by the candidate.

5. The examination for the degree of master of Gynaecology and Ob. stetrics shall consist of two parts—

Part I—Anatomy Embryology and Histology Physiology and Biochemistry

Part II—Pathology and Microbiology in relation to Gynaecology and Ob stetrics Obstetrics, including neo-natal Paediatrics and Gynaecology.

6. The two parts may be taken concurrently but no candidate shall re-ceive credit for part Il at any examination unless at that or some previous examination he has passed in part I.

7. The examination in part 1 shall be partly written and partly oral. The examination in part Il shall be written, clinical and oral, but in Pathology and Microbiology the examination shall be written and oral and there shall be a practical test.

8. A candidate proceeding by examination and thesis shall submit the thesis or published work for approval by the faculty of Medicine as relevant to the theory or practice or both of Gynaecology and Obstetrics or Gynaecology or Obstetrics. If the thesis gives evidence of research and ability satisfactory to the examiners, the candidate shall be exempted from such part of the written examination as the examiners of the thesis shall determine.

9. In every appointment of examiners for part li at least one examiner shall be an external examiner.

10. Candidates who have satisfied the examiners as herein prescribed and have fulfilled all other prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics.

36

Regulations

REGULATION 3.39—DIPLOMA IN PUBLIC HEALTH

(The course and examination for this diploma are temporarily suspended The text of the regulation was last printed in the Calendar for 1956.)

REGULATION 3.40—OTHER POSTGRADUATE MEDICAL DIPLOMAS

1. There shall be post-graduate medical diplomas in various specialties as follows—

Diploma in Ophthalmology Diploma in Therapeutic Radiology Diploma in Anaesthetics

2. Every candidate for such a diploma shall—


(b) hold any other degree or degrees whether in the University or any other university or institution which degree or degrees are, whether separately or in combination, recognized by the faculty of Medicine pursuant to Regulation 3.3.1 as appropriate for the purposes of this regulation; or

(c) being resident in Victoria or coming to the University for a pre-scribed period of study, hold a qualification entitling the holder thereof to registration as a legally qualified medical practitioner in Victoria.

3. (1) The examination for each diploma shall be in two parts.

(2) The subjects of each part and the syllabus of each subject shall be as prescribed and published annually in the details of subjects.

4. Examinations in each part shall, if candidates present themselves, be held twice in each year at times to be prescribed by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects.

5. Before presenting for part I a candidate shall present evidence that he has been in practice for the period and of the nature prescribed by the Academic Board pursuant to section 6 sub-section (2) hereof.

6. (1) Before presenting for part I1 a candidate shall pass in part I and shall satisfy the faculty of Medicine that--

(a) he has been in practice for the period prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the advice of the faculty; and

(b) subsequent to graduation he has had—

(i) training in general medicine and surgery in a general hospital, and

(ii) special training in a hospital or hospitals (including the appropriate special clinics of a general hospital) con-cerned with the appropriate specialty as prescribed by the faculty.

(2) The minimum period and nature of practice and the general nature and duration of the training required for each diploma

37

Faculty of Medicine

shall be prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects.

7. Repealed.

8. The faculty may on application grant a candidate total or partial exemption from examination in any subject the content of which is substantially the same as that of a subject previously passed by the can-didate for a higher degree or another postgraduate diploma in this Uni-versity.

9. Candidates who have passed in both parts of the examination and who have otherwise fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be granted the appropriate diploma.

10. Subject to section 2 but notwithstanding any other provision in this regulation a diploma may be awarded to a candidate who has not less than ten years' standing as a medical graduate and who has been associated, in a manner approved by the faculty, with the practice of the appropriate specialty for not less than five years as a member of the staff of an approved hospital:

Provided that—

(a) an application for admission to candidature under this section shall be made to the Registrar in writing accompanied by a statement defining precisely the applicant's experience in the appropriate specialty;

(b) an approved candidate shall submit to the Registrar three printed copies of a thesis or published work dealing with some aspect of the appropriate specialty;

(c) the thesis or work shall be examined as provided in regulation 4.6 for the examination of theses for higher degrees;

Id) the examiners shall not certify that a candidate has passed unless they are satisfied that the thesis submitted makes an original and substantial contribution to knowledge of the appropriate specialty.

(e) if the candidate 'does not pass this examination the faculty may or the recommendation of the examiners prescribe what further ex-amination the candidate shall be required to pass to obtain the diploma.

REGULATION 3.40А —DIPLOMA IN PSYCHOLOGICAL MEDICINE

1. A candidate for the diploma in Psychological Medicine shall be a bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery in the University or the holder of degrees or diplomas considered by the faculty to be their equivalent for the purpose of the diploma or, being resident In Victoria, or coming to the University for a prescribed period of study, shall possess a qualification entitling him to registration as a legally qualified medical practitioner in the State of Victoria.

2. Each candidate shall pursue a course of study as may be prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Medicine and published in the details of subjects.

3. (1) The examination for the diploma shall be in two parts, Part I and Part Ii.

38

Regulations

(2) The subjects of each part and the syllabus of each examination shall be prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects.

4. Examinations in each part shall be held twice in each year if candidates present themselves. Examinations in Part I shall be held in February and August and examinations in Part II in March and Sep-tember.

5. Before presenting for Part I a candidate shall present evidence that he has held a resident medical appointment in a general hospital during which he has had appropriate experience, the duration and nature of which shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and pub-lished in the details of subjects. In each of in-patient Medicine and Surgery.

6. Before presenting for Part I1 a candidate shall pass in Part I and shall satisfy the faculty of Medicine that—

(a) he has been in practice for a period not less than the period pre-scribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty; and

(b) he has had special training in appropriate hospitals or units. The general nature and duration of the special training and the minimum period of practice required shall be prescribed by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published each year in the details of subjects.

7. Candidates who have passed in both parts of the examination and who have otherwise fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be granted the diploma.

8 Subject to section 1 but notwithstanding any other provision in this regulation a diploma may be awarded to a candidate who is a medical graduate of not less than ten years standing and who has been associated, in a manner approved by the faculty, with the practice of Psychiatry as a specialty for not less than five years as a member of the staff of an approved hospital: Provided that— (a) an application for admission to candidature under this section

shall be made to the Registrar in writing accompanied by a statement defining precisely the applicant's experience In the specialty;

(b) an approved candidate shall submit to the Registrar three printed copies of a thesis or published work dealing with some aspect of the specialty;

(c) the thesis or work shall be examined as provided in regulation 4.6 for the examination of theses for higher degrees;

(d) the examiners shall not certify that a candidate has passed unless they are satisfied that the thesis submitted makes an original and substantial contribution to the knowledge of the specialty;

(e) if the candidate does not pass this examination the faculty may on the recommendation of the examiners prescribe what further examination the candidate shall be required to pass to obtain the diploma.

39

Faculty of Medicine

REGULATION 3.406 — DIPLOMA IN DIAGNOSTIC RADIOLOGY

1. A candidate for the diploma in Diagnostic Radiology shall— ( а ) hold the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of

Surgery in the University; or (b) hold any other degree or degrees whether in the University or

any other university or institution which degree or degrees are. whether separately or combination, recognized by the faculty of Medicine pursuant to Regulation 3.3.1 as appropriate for the purposes of this regulation; or

(c) being resident in Victoria or coming to the University for a prescribed period of study, hold a qualification entitling the holder thereof to registration as a legally qualified medical practitioner in Victoria.

2. Each candidate shall pursue for not less than three years a course of study and training as may be prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Medicine and published in the details of subjects.

3. The subjects of examination and the syllabus of each subject of examination shall be as prescribed and published annually in the details of subjects.

4. The examination for the diploma shall, if candidates present them-selves, be held twice in each year at times to be prescribed by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects.

5. Before enrolling for the course a candidate shall present evidence that—

(a) he has spent at least two years in a resident medical appointment in a general hospital, or its equivalent, during which time he has had four months' experience in each of general Medicine and Surgery; or the equivalent of such experience;

(b) he holds a full-time appointment in a department of Diagnostic Radiology in a hospital approved for the purpose by the faculty.

6. Before presenting for the examination a candidate shall satisfy the faculty of Medicine that—

( а ) he has completed satisfactorily the course of study and training as prescribed in the details of subjects;

(b) he has passed examinations in Anatomy and Physics, approved for the purpose by the faculty.

6A. No person shall be admitted to candidature for the diploma after 31 December 1982.

7. Candidates who have passed the examination and who have otherwise fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be granted the diploma.

REGULATION 3.40C — DIPLOMA IN LARYNGOLOGY AND OTOLOGY

1. A candidate for the diploma in Laryngology and Otology shall—


(b) hold any other degree or degrees whether in the University or any other university or institution which degree or degrees are, whether separately or in combination, recognized by the faculty of Medicine pursuant to Regulation 3.3.1., as appropriate for the purposes of this regulation; or

40

Regulations

(c) being resident in Victoria or coming to the University for a prescribed period of study, hold a qualification entitling the holder thereof to registration as a legally qualified medical practioner in Victoria.

2. Each candidate shall pursue a course of study as may be pre-scribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommenda-tion of the faculty of Medicine and published with the details of sub-jects.

З . (1) The examination for the diploma shall be in two parts, Part I and Part II.

(2) The subjects of each part and the syllabus of each examin-ation shall be prescribed and published annually in the details of subjects.

4. An examination in each part shall, if candidates present themselves, be held twice in each year at times to be prescribed by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects.

5. Before presenting for Part I a candidate shall present evidence that he has been in practice in a general hospital or its equivalent for a period not less than that prescribed from time to time by the Aca-demic Board on the advice of the faculty.

6. Before presenting for Part II a candidate shall pass in Part I and shall satisfy the faculty of Medicine that the candidate—

(a) has been in practice for a period not less than that prescribed by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty.

(b) has had training in general medicine and surgery in a general hospital or its equivalent, and

(c) has had special training in a hospital or hospitals concerned with the specialty (including the appropriate special clinics of a gene-ra1 hospital),

the nature and duration of which shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects.

7. The faculty may on application grant a candidate total or partial exemption from examination in any subject the content of which is sub-stantially the same as that of a subject previously passed by the candi-date as a candidate for a higher degree or another postgraduate diploma in the University.

8. Candidates who have passed in both parts of the examination and who have otherwise fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be granted the diploma.

9. Subject to section 1 but notwithstanding any other provision in this regulation a diploma may be awarded to a candidate who is a medical graduate of not less than ten years' standing and who has been associated, in manner approved by the faculty, with the practice of Otolaryngology as a specialty for not less than five years as a member of the staff of an approved hospital: Provided that—

(a) an application for admission to candidature under this section shall be made to the Registrar in writing accompanied by a

41

Faculty of Medicine

statement defining precisely the applicant's experience in the specialty;

(b) the faculty shall be satisfied that the applicant has had adequate training in Otolaryngology as judged after an assessment of his formal training experience and competence;

(c) an approved candidate shall submit to the Registrar three printed copies of a thesis or published work dealing with some aspect of the specialty;

(d) the thesis or work shall be examined as provided in Regulation 4.6 for the examination of theses for higher degrees;

(e) the examiners shall not certify that a candidate has passed unless they are satisfied that the thesis submitted makes a substantial contribution to the knowledge of the specialty;

(f) if the candidate does not pass this examination the faculty may on the recommendation of the examiners prescribe what further examination the candidate shall be required to pass to obtain the diploma.

REGULATION 3.80—DIPLOMA IN AUDIOLOGY

1. A candidate for the diploma in Audiology shall be a graduate who satisfies the faculty of Medicine (hereinafter called "the faculty") that he has adequate scientific training.

2. (1) Before commencing the course, each candidate must obtain the approval of the body of the faculty for his candidature.

(2) For each applicant the faculty may prescribe appropriate pre-liminary courses of study and examinations which the applicant must complete before he can be accepted as a candidate for the diploma in Audiology.

3. After being accepted a candidate shall pursue for at least one year a course of advanced study, attend lectures and classes and under-take practical work as may be prescribed by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects.

4. The faculty may exempt a candidate from such examinations as are in its opinion the substantial equivalent of examinations already passed by the candidate.

6. Candidates who have passed the examinations prescribed by the faculty and who have otherwise fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be granted the diploma in Audiology.

42

CHAPTER 8

DETAILS FOR 1982

DEGREES OF M.B., B.S.

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

MATRICULATION

Students qualified to do so must sign the Matriculation Roll in accordance with instructions given in the Student Diary.

PREREQUISITES

In addition to being qualified to matriculate, students normally must satisfy the following prerequisites: (a) pass the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination by ob-

taining grade D or higher in four Group 1 subjects including English at the one sitting at not more than two attempts;

(b) pass at the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination in Eng-lishi, Chemistry and in either Physics, a branch of Mathematics or Biology.

Other candidates must have satisfied university entrance requirements under other provisions or been granted an exemption from satisfying those requirements on the grounds of other studies and must have satisfied the subject prerequisites for the course.

ADMISSION TO THE FIRST YEAR

The number of students admitted to the course in medicine is restricted. The quota for 1983 is expected to be 210 including 15 places available for overseas students, i.e., students with permanent residence overseas, but not including Australian citizens resident overseas. The basis of selection is academic merit, judged in the first instance, by reference to the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination. See further details concerning admission in Chapter 4.

ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENTS

Attendance at lectures is not compulsory, but students, particularly in first year, are expected to attend lectures. However, attendances at demon-strations, practical work and clinical instruction are compulsory for students in all years of the course and, in addition, competent perform-ance in carrying out the duties and work prescribed in all subjects is required. Failure to comply with these requirements may lead to dis-qualification from presenting at examinations. Students prevented by illness or other serious cause from satisfying attendance requirements should report their absences to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine), so that dispensation may be granted by the faculty, if necessary.

The subject English as a Second Language may be substituted for the subject English in appropriate cases.

43

Faculty of Medicine

The provisions in the details of subjects and time-table as to the number of lectures, tutorials, etc., and the hours of practical work are included for general guidance only, and indicate the maximum formal commit-ment of teaching time. Students should consult faculty and department notice-boards regularly for details of teaching commitments.

MEDICAL STUDENTS ADVISORY SERVICE (M.S.A.S.)

The M.S.A.S. has been set up by the Medical Students' Society in response to faculty and student concern for medical student welfare. It was felt that the pre-clinical years of the medical course were "special"; that they may present students with unique problems, of both an academic and a personal nature which may require the develop-ment of special strategies in order to cope. The problems which students have complained about in the past involved the development of new study techniques and study organization skills to cope with their medical studies, how to use their study time to best advantage, and sometimes even which texts to use and/or buy. Other problems have involved coping with the stress of the course, and perhaps more personal problems. The M.S.A.S. was formed in the expectation that medical students who had already "been through" the process could be a source of information to other medical students about the course. The advisors are volunteers and are regularly available during the year, normally at lunch-time.

VACATION STUDY

Students are expected to use a considerable part of the vacations for read-

Ing and study purposes. In some cases specific references are made in the booklists section at the rear of the handbook; in others a list of suitable books will be posted on the appropriate notice-boards; in all cases of doubt the lecturers concerned should be consulted.

HONOURS AWARDS•

Honours results (H1, 12, 13) afd pass results are awarded in all years except Fourth Year where a Pass/Fail system is used. The subjects First Aid (First Year), Obstetrics and Gynaecology, Paediatrics, and Psychiatry (Fifth Year) are assessed on a Pass/Fail basis. Advanced Study units in Second and Third Years are awarded on an Honours/ Pass/Fail basis.

LEAVE OF ABSENCE

Leave of absence for periods up to twelve months may be granted in approved circumstances (refer Regulation 3.1.14, University Calendar)

and enquiries should be directed to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine).

ASSESSMENT

The method of assessment and the relative weighting of essays, assign-ments, practical work, written or oral examinations or any other form of examination contributing to the overall assessment in a subject or unit of a subject will be notified to students by posting the relevant informa till on departmental notice-boards, normally no later than two weeks after the commencement of the subject or unit.

The system of recording examination results is under review and may be changed for 1983. Enquiries should be made to the Assistant Registrar (Medicinel.

44

Degrees of M.B., B.S.

Students are advised that they should retain all written work returned to them to assist the examiners where necessary in reviewing and considering all constituent parts of the examination.

YEARS, SUBJECTS AND EXAMINATION

Years Subjects for Examination Times of Examination

Revised Curriculum:—

First 600-004 BIOLOGY (Medical Course)

610-005 CHEMISTRY (Medical Course)

640-007 PHYSICS A (Medical Course)

or 640-009 PHYSICS B

(Medical Course) 500-101 BEHAVIOURAL

SCIENCE 1

516-011 ANATOMY 536-011 PHYSIOLOGY 585-011 FIRST AID

Second 516-021 ANATOMY 521-021 BIOCHEMISTRY 536-021 PHYSIOLOGY 554-201 BEHAVIOURAL

SCIENCE 2 500-202 NEUROSCIENCE

ADVANCED STUDY UNITS (Second Year)

, Refer details of subjects.

J Refer details of subjects.

Third

531-031 PATHOLOGY 534-031 PHARMACOLOGY 526-032 MICROBIOLOGY

incl. IMMUNOLOGY 521-031 METABOLISM and

ENDOCRINOLOGY 585-301 SOCIAL and

PREVENTIVE MEDICINE 500-302 CORRELATION

SEMINARS ADVANCED STUDY

UNITS (Third Year)

Refer details of subjects.

45

Faculty of Medicine

Fourth 500-490 FOURTH YEAR MB BS comprising

500-491 MEDICINE 500-492 SURGERY

Fifth 500-592 PSYCHIATRY 500-591 PAEDIATRICS 500-594 COMMUNITY

MEDICINE and CLINICAL PRACTICE

500-593 OBSTETRICS and GYNAECOLOGY

Sixth 500-691 MEDICINE 500-692 SURGERY 500-693 OBSTETRICS and

GYNAECOLOGY 500-694 PAEDIATRICS 500-695 PSYCHIATRY

J At the end of Fourth Year.

}

Refer details of subjects.

I Refer details of subjects.

EXAMINATIONS

At all examinations during the course students may be required to present for orals and/or extra written or clinical tests during the examination periods and students must be available at short notice. Students should consult departmental, faculty, and clinical school notice-boards for information about examinations.

SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS

(Regulation 4.5, University's Calendar) These may be granted in the first, second, third and sixth years of the course. These examinations are normally held in February of the follow-ing year, after failure at the fourth term examination. Students with one failure will ordinarily be admitted to such Supplementary Examinations. All other students are subject to the judgement of the appropriate Unsatisfactory Progress Committee.

FACULTY PASSES

Pursuant to Regulation 3.35.4(1 lb), a student in the pre-clinical years may be granted a Faculty Pass in the year as a whole under the following conditions:—

Where a candidate has failed by a small margin one of the major subjects in the year providing that the candidate has passed satis-factorily in all other subjects in that year.

Note: The following subjects are not considered subjects for the purposes of awarding a faculty pass and the rules relating to their completion are specified in the details of subjects in the Handbook.

FIRST YEAR

First Aid.

46


SECOND YEAR

Advanced Study Units (Second Year).

THIRD YEAR

Correlation Seminars, Advanced Study Units (Third Year). Decisions about Faculty Passes are considered at the end of the year and are not open to application by students.

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION AND SPECIAL EXAMINATIONS

(Regulation 4.5А , University's Calendar)

Students whose studies during the year have been affected by illness or other serious cause may apply for special consideration in their examinations. Applications should be made in writing together with a medical certificate or any other appropriate evidence, to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine) before the commencement of the examination and not later than three days after the examination. Students who are physic-ally able to sit for the examination are expected to do so, even if their studies have been impaired. If you cannot sit for an examination because of illness or other serious cause, notify the Assistant Registrar (Medicine) in writing, with a medical certificate or other evidence immediately and within three days of the examination. If you become ill during an examination, contact the Supervisor and apply to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine) in writing immediately and within three days of the examination. All requests for special consideration are treated as confidential and are brought to the attention of the special consideration committee, and may be referred to the appropriate boards of examiners for consideration. Special Examinations may also be granted after consideration of an application for Special Consideration. Students do not need to apply for special examinations.

STUDENT APPEALS TO ACADEMIC BOARD

1. Any student aggrieved by an examination result, or procedural irregu-larity in relation thereto, may appeal to the Academic Board; provided that no appeal shall be brought on the grounds that the examiners were wrong on a matter of academic expertise except where bias or bad faith is in issue. Every such appeal shall be made in writing and shall set out the grounds on which the appeal is brought and where bias or bad faith is alleged shall set out the grounds on which the allegation is based.

2. On receipt of an appeal the Chairman of the Academic Board, or where the Chairman of the Board is involved in the appeal the next most senior academic member of the Board not involved in the appeal, shall have a discretion, in the first instance, to refer the matter of the appeal to the Dean of any Faculty concerned.

3. Before an appeal is heard, the following persons shall, if previously involved in the matter, be invited to submit a written statement afd may be invited to appear personally or by nominee before the panel hearing the appeal:—

the appellant, with or without a representative the Chairman of the Department or relevant Examination Board

47

Faculty of Medicine

the Dean of the Faculty concerned the Chairman of the Board of Studies concerned the Chairman of the Ph.D. Committee the Chairman of the Master of Environmental Studies Committee any other person who in the opinion of the panel could assist the

determination of the appeal.

4. The decision of the Board shall be final and shall be reported to the next full meeting of the Academic Board.

REPETITION OF YEARS AND SUSPENSION FOR UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS

In accordance with R.2.5, the faculty of Medicine is required to give consideration to the further progress in the medical course of students who fail in or are absent from examinations. As such it is faculty policy for these students to be considered by the Unsatisfactory Progress Committee for the appropriate year. It should be noted that the com-mittee's function is to determine the most suitable course for a student's academic future rather than simply to discipline the student for unsatisfactory progress. In exercising its duty the committee does have a responsibility to ensure that available quota places are taken by those students most likely to complete their course in reasonable time. All students will be given the opportunity to make a written and/or personal appeal to the committee.

A student recommended for suspension from the course may appeal to the Academic Board.

The faculty of Medicine has established a set of guidelines for its Unsatisfactory Progress Committees, however it is important to realise that these principles are treated as guidelines only, and not as hard and fast rules. The committees are able to retain their flexibility and discre-tion in making recommendations after consideration of all available information. The following guidelines are currently applicable:

1. In the absence of persuasive extenuating circumstances SUSPENSION should be recommended by the Unsatisfactory Progress Committee if a student: —fails the same or different years of the course on two or more

occasions —at the first attempt, fails in at least three (3) of the major subjects

in one of the pre-clinical years of the course

viz.: First Year Anatomy, Behavioural Science, Biology, Chemistry, Physics A or B, Physiology (the subject First Aid is not subject to unsatisfactory progress rules). Second Year Anatomy, Biochemistry, Physiology, Behavioural Science, Neuroscience (Advanced Study Units are not subject to unsatisfactory progress rules). Third Year Metabolism and Endocrinology. Microbiology including Immunology, Pathology, Pharmacology, Social and Preventive Medicine (Correlation Seminars and Advanced Study Units are not subject to unsatisfactory progress rules).

2. In general, other failed students in the pre-clinical years should be considered on their individual circumstances for admission to supple-mentary examination(s), or be permitted to repeat.

48


3. Fourth Year Decisions on Fourth Year failures will be at the discretion of the Unsatisfactory Progress Committee, taking into account all available information on the student's performance and previous record.

4. Fifth and Sixth Year Normally there are no restrictions upon repetition of Fifth and Sixth years, but disciplinary action may be taken in cases of unsatisfactory progress. Students who fail one of the four subjects in Fifth Year will be permitted to repeat the subject as part of their options study at the beginning of Sixth year.

Repetition of a year involves repetition of all attendances and other requirements in all subjects except in special circumstances when waiving of this requirement may be considered. Students whose recommendation for suspension has been confirmed by the Academic Board may seek advice from the Assistant Registrar (Medi-cine) concerning re-admission to the course. In considering the recom-mending to the Academic Board of re-admission, the Second and Later Years Selection Committee will ordinarily require evidence of the academic rehabilitation through satisfactory completion of a degree, and be satisfied that circumstances affecting previous performance no longer apply.

49

M F Tu W Th

li-1 2c

12-1 c

10-11c

9-10c

11-12c

BIOLOGY Lectures Practical classes

CHEMISTRY Lectures Practical classes

TO BE ARRANGED

2-З a 12-1

TO BE ARRANGED

BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE I Lectures

Tutorials

ANATOMY Lectures

Practical classes and Tutorials

2-3а

10-11c

9-10c 3-4а

12-1

2-5d

10-11 в

2-5d

10-1c• 10-1c• 25c

9-10c 10-1a• 2-5a•

2 5а •

9-10a

9-10d

12-5e

9-11e

PHYSICS A/B Lectures

Tutorialsc

PHYSIOLOGY Lectures Practical classes

Tutorialse

FIRST AID Lectures (2 weeks) Prac. Classes

(2 weeks)

10-i ie

TO BE ARRANGED

10-11в 2-3 3-5d

Faculty of Medicine

Timetable for 1983• •

FIRST YEAR

Term 1

March 7 to May 15 Term 2

June 6 to August 7 Term 3

September 5 to October 30

(a) Term 1 only. (b1 Term 2 only. (c) Terms I and 2. (dl Terms 2 and 3. (e) Term 3 only.

•Alternative times. Notices will be placed on departmental noticeboards informing students which period they should attend.

••This timetable is subject to alteration and the locations of classes have still to be finalised. Noticeboards should be consulted during Orientation Week for information.

50

9-10c 2-За

10-1c

9-10e

10-12e'

2-5d

9-10c 2- Зс

10.1c 3-5c

9-10e 2-3e

10-12e' 3-5e'

11-12a

8.45-10.452c

12-1

8.45-10.452c 8.45-10.453€

8.45-10.45e

2-3d 3-5d

М Tu W

ANATOMY— Lectures

Practical Classes

PHYSIOLOGY—Lectures Practical Classes Hospital Demonstra-

tions/Combined Teaching Sessions

BIOCHEMISTRY—Lectures Practical Classes

Hospital Demonstra-tions/Combined Teaching Sessions

NEUROSCIENCE—Lectures

Practical Classes

Hospital Demonstrations

BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE—Lectures Tutorials

ADVANCED STUDY UNITS—

F Th

9-10b 10-11c 10-51c 11-51c

9-10a 10-51c 10-53e

9-10 11-51c 11.53e

9-10e 10-11e

10-53e i i_53e

11-1d


Timetable for 1983•'

SECOND YEAR

Term 1 February 21 to May 15 Term 2 June 6 to July 31 Term 3 September 5 to October 30

fat Term 1 only. (b) Term 2 only. (cl Terms 1 and 2. Idl Terms 2 and 3. (e) Terms 3 only. 111 Practical classes in Physiology and Bidchemistry on alternate weeks. See departmental

noticeboards for details. 121 Shared time for Physiology and Biochemistry. Sce departmental noticeboards for details. 131 Shared time for Biochemistry and Neuroscience. See departmental noticeboards for details.

'Alternative times. Notices will be piaci d on departmental noticeboards informing students which period they should attend.

"This timetable is subject to alteration and the locations of classes have still to be finalised. Noticeboards should be consulted in weeks before commencement of academic year.

51

10-12'

12-1

10-12'

10-12'

9-10 25"

10-12'

9-10

10-12'

10-12"

12-1

2-5

W Th M Tu F

SOCIAL & PREVENTIVE MEDICINE—Lectures

METABOLISM & ENDOCRINOLOGY—Lectures

CORRELATION SEMINARS—

MICROBIOLOGY— Lectures

Museum Practical (incl. Tutorial)

PATHOLOGY—Lectures

Museum Practical (incl. Tutorial)

PHARMACOLOGY—Lectures Practical Tutorial

ADVANCED STUDY UNITS

9-10

10-12'

10-1 "d

10-12'

12-1"

12-la

2-3 Ь Ρ

34а 12-1 c

10-11

9-10

34а

2-ЗЬ

10-12'

10-1—d

9-10

10-12'

12-1"

3-4a

2-3 Ь Ρ

Faculty of Medicine

Timetable for 1983"

THIRD YEAR

Term 1

February 21 to May 15 Term 2

June 6 to July 31 Term 3

September 5 to October 30

(a) Term 1 only. (bl Term 1 and 2 only. (cl Term 2 and 3 only. (dl Commencing after Easter.

One-Quarter of students attend each time. " One-half of students attend each time.

Two A.S.U.'s to be completed by end of Third Year. " Timetable subject to alteration and location of lectures still to be finalised. Students must

consult Departmental notice-boards for details of class allocations and venues.

52

teams ¡

Тагт

...f .

38

39

40

41

42

43

9 0 AG

27 seit vec

TEACHING OUTLINE FIFTH YEAR 1983

‚ac.

1-j 51А Year

D

5th Yeac 51А Year ср 5.

A 8 C 8 0

Meek Caе m. 27 Dec.

5th Year cps. А '8

Week Comm.

2 1 о 3 Jan 27

28

4 Jul WritTen

11 VAC

З 17 29 l8 4 24 30 25

14

15

16

17

18

19

ź о

5

б

7

8

9

10

11

17

13

21

22

23

74

21 aster 28

21

Aust. 31 Da

28

25

14

23

з 0

16

13

7 Мег

4 A

7 Feb

2 Ia

6 Jun

31

32

33

34

4іЈ 5

36

37

44

46

47

48

49

50

45

14

•21

28

I A

8

15

22

29

5 ЅР

12

19

26

з Oct

10

17

24

31

7 Nov

I. weeks

0 д G

11

18

5 Dec

12

25 20 Gi l ń lZá VAC 51 19

26

CTRA—Casualty. Trauma, Resuscitation & Anaesthetics (4 weeks) PMC—Primary Medical Care (2 weeks) ID—Infectious Diseases (2 weeks)

53

52 26

Ex

am

inati

on

s

SU

MM

AR

Y O

F PR

INC

IPA

L D

AT

ES

-1983

Se

cond

Ye

ar

Th

ird

Y

ear

•оУ v ф .. Ф С L Ф Ф У Ф ы

Ф Š

• У о Ф Т з

о ) ы ы Ф ; .t. ы v Т 3 Фв _ w co Ф ,С о

У О О Ф ć c_vE

Ф .9 co ' cы Е Ф

C — Ф O V _

C ф I-

E' E л Ecu О и O Ф ' E o C C I о С Ф 4' о _o 3 0 0- u= о ` о о C C C Ф и о И Ф о

•У и C — Ф ы ф с Ф Ф У V > Ф •E V '. Ф

U• Q о о л с

и по LD.-0 Г о м .- c л м м м

ы « л т ?«

2 Q 0 2. о 2- о

г. тин

ти ) н

ти

У Ф С Ф Ф c Ф 1] С б

и u -', и сг ) с д

.- N м .- N м .- N N)

v

Faculty of Medicine

о о о о " .

— — — и г и L ø t и 3 • • . 3 3 3 . • • ы • .

и ø и . сі .Ф Ý N, eГ О)

т 3 О ø3 °3 ы N о от 3 Ог° м > й

Ф .О С Ф д С Ф д С >> 0 Ф l) О >z>

Ф 7 — Ф 7— О о о o (flCfl.._ (flu) ..- и и •.- ZZ ‚fl(fl..- м 0 г

й т

Ф и и

} C ?

L° ů= LL

54


4. YEARS AND DETAILS OF SUBJECTS

FIRST YEAR 610-005. CHEMISTRY (MEDICAL COURSE)

Two lectures per week in terms 1 and 2, together with one 3-hour practical session per week during term 1. A preliminary standard equiva-lent to the H.S.C. examination in Chemistry will be assumed.

SYLLABUS The syllabus will consist of basic physical chemistry and organic chemistry. The topics treated will form a basis for subsequent study in . biochemistry, physiology and pharmacology; where possible illustrative material will be drawn from medical investigations and practice.

PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY

introduction to Thermodynamics: heat, work, first law. Enthalpy changes in chemical reactions. Use of tabulated enthalpy values.

Chemical Equilibrium: ideal law and real behaviour for gaseous equilib rium—intermolecular forces and thermodynamic activity. Solution equilibria studied via electrochemical cells. Thermodynamic reversibility. maximum work, Gibbs free energy. Ionic activity, measurement of activity coefficients, pH, sodium and potassium ion activity. Standard free energy of formation. Use of tabulated values. Use of different standard states for biochemical reactions.

Phase Equilibrium: liquid-vapour, osmotic equilibria. Molecular weight measurements for biological macromolecules.

Ionic Solutions: Conductance: analytical applications. Conductance and ionic size. Water and water-solute interactions.

Chemical Kinetics: reaction rates and reaction mechanism. Activation energy. Simple enzyme kinetics. Fast reaction techniques.

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Bonding, structure and elementary stereochemistry of carbon compounds. An outline of physical and chemical properties of the major groups of monofunctional compounds in terms of molecular structure and ele-mentary electronic theory. An introduction to the chemistry of carbohy-drates, lipids, proteins and other biologically important macromolecules.

LABORATORY WORK The experiments will illustrate and extend the physical and organic chemistry lecture courses; some inorganic chemistry experiments of direct relevance to biological processes will also be included. The practical classes for this subject are taken in the Chemistry Labora-tory of the Redmond Barry Building. The department supplies all the apparatus.

ASSESSMENT One 1-hour written paper at the end of term 1 and one 2-hour written paper at the end of term 2. Practical work assessed continually throughout term 1.

55

Faculty of Medicine

640-007 PHYSICS A (MEDICAL COURSE) •

Three lectures per week and one tutorial every second week during terms 1 and 2.

This course will assume a knowledge of Physics and Mathematics equivalent to H.S.C. Physics and Pure Mathematics. The preliminary reading is suggested to introduce students to applications of physics in biological sciences.

SYLLABUS The course will consist of a study of physics illustrated throughout by applications to biological systems and clinical technology. The assumption of a greater level of previous knowledge of mathe-matics and physics will permit a greater degree of emphasis to be placed on biological applications than is possible in Physics B. Topics will be selected from:—

Mechanics. Calculus and the laws of motion, energy and momentum, dynamics and statics of particles, rigid bodies and fluids. Applications: motion of vertebrates, accident trauma, blood flow, blood pressure.

Properties of Matter. Elasticity and the strength of materials, viscosity and surface tension, wetting of fluids. Applications: skeletal strength, blood flow, respiration.

Thermal Physics. Temperature and thermometry , internal energy and entropy, heat transfer, metabolic energy and entropy in life processes. Maxwell-Boltzmann law and chemical kinetics. Transport processes, diffusion, osmosis, Donnan transport, active and passive transport.

Optics. Refraction, lenses, optical instruments, the eye and refractive disorders. Microscopy — optical and electron, colour vision, properties of light.

Acoustics. Wave propagation, displacement and pressure, acoustic impedance. Applications: ultrasonics in clinical practice. The ear and the voice. Sound levels.

Electricity and Magnetism. The laws of electromagnetism, electrostatics, circuit electricity, electronics, operational amplifiers, analogue and digital systems. Biological E.M.F.'s, feedback and system control electrical safety, clinical instrumentation.

Atomic Physics. Photons and the properties of light, infra-red radiation, lasers, holography. X-rays, properties of ionising radiation, radiation detectors. Biological effects of radiation, radiation units.

Nuclear Physics. Radioactivity — natural and induced. Isotopes and radioactive decay. Nuclear accelerators and reactors. Radiation diag-nostics and therapeutics.

ASSESSMENT One 1-hour written paper at the end of term 1 and one 3-hour written paper at the end of term 2.

640-009 PHYSICS B (MEDICAL COURSE)

Three lectures per week and one tutorial every second week during terms 1 and 2.

Students will enrol in one of either Physics A or Physics 6 on the advice of the faculty.

56


This course will assume familiarity with the basic concepts of Physics. Students who have not taken H.S.C. Physics are strongly advised to undertake the recommended preliminary reading before lectures com-mence. The preliminary reading is also suggested to other students as an introduction to the application of physics in biological sciences.

SYLLABUS The course will consist of a study of physics illustrated throughout by applications to biological systems and clinical technology. The areas of physics to be studied will be selected from those listed for Physics A.

ASSESSMENT One 1-hour written paper in the last week of term 1, and one 3-hour written paper at the end of term 2.

600-004 BIOLOGY (MEDICAL COURSE)

Three lectures per week in term 1, and two lectures per week in term 2. One 3-hour practical per week throughout both terms. A knowledge of HSC Biology is not essential, but would be an advantage. SYLLABUS The functional anatomy and embryology of vertebrate animals with an account of their evolution; lower life forms of medical impor-tance, including viruses, bacteria, fungi, protista and invertebrate ani mals; the processes of photosynthesis and respiration; ecological systems.

The course will include: Functional Anatomy of a Vertebrate. The cell. Animal histology. Classifi-cation of vertebrates. The skin. Skeletal and muscular systems. Digestive and circulatory systems. Blood. Respiratory and excretory systems. Re-productive and nervous systems. The process of evolution.

Lower Life Forms. Viruses, bacteria, fungi. Photosynthesis and respiration. Protista, coelenterata, platyhelminthes, nematode, insecte, arachnida, mollusca.

Ecological systems.

LABORATORY WORK Introduction to histology; dissection of representa-tive vertebrates; invertebrate animals with emphasis on parasitic or toxic organisms. Students will be notified at the beginning of the year when these practical classes will be held.

ASSESSMENT One 1-hour written paper at the end of term 1; a 3-hour written paper on the whole course following term 2. Practical work will be assessed throughout the course and students who do not perform satisfactorily will be required to sit a 3-hour practical examination at the end of term 2.

500-101 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE 1

A co-ordinated programme in behavioural sciences. The syllabus has three components: medical psychology, medical sociology, and growth, development and ageing.

MEDICAL PSYCHOLOGY

Two lectures per week in terms 1 and 3 and one lecture per week in term 2. One tutorial every second week throughout the year. At the end of each block of lectures the succeeding lecture will be replaced by two optional seminars to be conducted simultaneously and offering alternative topics.

57

Faculty of Medicine

SYLLABUS A brief history and introduction to psychology. Subsequently various themes are developed in teaching blocks.

Development: The psychological development of the human being from infancy to old age, including a study of human sexuality.

Social psychology. The influence of other people on the individual's behaviour.

Personality and motivation. An overview of the major theories.

Cognitive Psychology. A study of the information processing functions including perception, memory, learning, thinking and intelligence.

MEDICAL SOCIOLOGY One lecture per week in term 1 and the first half of term 2, together with two concurrent seminars offering alternative topics, at the end of each block of lectures. Three field visits during terms 1 and 2. Optional tutorials during terms 1 and 2.

SYLLABUS The medical profession and organization of medical care using a sociological perspective; some ethical issues relevant to the practice of medicine. The doctor-patient relationship. The health of disadvantaged groups; social factors in the causation of disease. Prevention, cure and care.

Field Visits: These will include two visits by students to selected general practitioners, community health centres and other organizations concerned with health care.

GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT AND AGEING

Two lectures per week in term 1.

SYLLABUS The nature of growth. Maturation. Neurological growth. Body tissues. Puberty. Regulation of growth. Critical periods. Nutrition. Appe-tite. Behaviour and growth. Reasons for ageing. Effects of ageing. Dependency. Support services. Attitudes of old people.

ASSESSMENT Medical Psychology: Two essays of up to 3000 words during the year, each worth 25% of the final mark. One 3-hour written examination following term 3 (50% of marks).

Medical Sociology: Two essays of up to 3000 words. One to be com-pleted by the end of term 1 and the second at the end of the lecture course in mid-second term. Each essay is worth 25% of total marks. One 2-hour written examination following term 2 (50% of marks). Growth, Development and Ageing: One 1 t/2-hour written examination on completion of the course in term 1.

516-011 ANATOMY

Two lectures per week in term 1, three lectures per week in term 2, and four lectures per week in te-m 3. Two 1-hour tutorials and three 2-hour practical classes per week in terms 2 and 3.

SYLLABUS The structure, organization and development of the human body. There are four major components of the course: (1) Topographic Anatomy, (2) Histology, (3) Embryology and (4) Genetics.

Topographic Anatomy. Topographic, radiographic, surface and applied anatomy of limbs and back. Emphasis is placed on the clinically Im-portant aspects of anatomy.

58


Histology. Cell biology of mammalian cells, light and electron micro-scopic structure of cells and tissues in man. Emphasis is placed on the relationships between structure and function. Embryology. Mammalian reproduction and the formation of germ cells, embryo formative processes, the development of basic tissues, foetal-maternal relationships and placental biology. Genetics. DNA and genetic control mechanisms, basic elements of human genetics.

In addition, seminars will be conducted concerning the effective use of library facilities, information retrieval and the development of learning skills relevant to medical studies.

LABORATORY WORK Topographic Anatomy. Two sessions per week in terms 2 and 3 in which the limbs and back of the human body are dissected. Histology. One session in most weeks of terms 2 and 3 in which the microscop?c structure of cells and tissues is examined. Embryology. Laboratory sessions in selected weeks of terms 2 and 3 in which the microscopic structure of early embryos, basic tissue histo-genesis and the placenta are examined. Genetics. Practical sessions in selected weeks of term 3.

REQUIREMENTS Students must provide themselves with a set of dissect-ing instruments and a half set of bones. Students are supplied with slides and a microscope by the department, or may provide their own microscope. Microscopes supplied by the department are for use within the department only . Students are required to wear white coats in the dissecting room.

ASSESSMENT A practical examination at the end of term 2. A 3-hour written paper and a practical examination following term 3.

536-011 PHYSIOLOGY 3 lectures per week in term 3, and four 5-hour practical classes, com-mencing in the first week of term 3.

SYLLABUS The syllabus provides an introduction to cellular physiology. It is concerned both with those properties that characterize all living cells, and with those that are unique to special cell types such as nerve and muscle and blood cells. Students are required to attend 3 lectures and up to 5 hours laboratory class work per week and one small group tutorial per fortnight.

Principles—physiological regulation, homeostasis. Cell Membranes—nerve and muscle fibres, resting potentials, action potentials and their physio-chemical basis, excitation-contraction coupl-ing in muscle, the synapse and neuromuscular function, chemical trans-mission, excitary and inhibitory synaptic potentials, simple reflexes. Body fluids—composition, compartments and balance. Blood—haemostasis, haemopoiesis and immune mechanisms.

LABORATORY WORK Laboratory experiments and demonstrations are co-ordinated with the lecture course.

ASSESSMENT A written examination lasting 11 hours following term 3. Assessment is also based on the laboratory class work which may Include assignments during term 3.

69

Faculty of Medicine

Details of these assessing procedures and their weighting will be posted on the notice-boards Iate in term 2.

585-011 FIRST AID A short course in term 3 covering the following topics.

SYLLABUS Principles of first aid, wounds, bleeding, shock, asphyxia, cardiac arrest, resuscitation, fractures, dislocations, sprains, burns bites and poisons.

LECTURES Four lectures with films and demonstrations each of 2 hours' duration.

PRACTICAL WORK One 3-hour practical class comprising: One hour — cardio-pulmonary resuscitation; Two hours — other practical exercises e.g. dressings, slings, splints.

ASSESSMENT One 1-hour written examination and a practical examina-tion at the end of the course. A pass will not be required before students proceed to the second year. However students who do not pass will be required to sit for the examination again in second year and if necessary, third year. Unsatis-factory performance will be recorded and noted when similar work is undertaken in the fourth and fifth years of the course.

COMBINED SECOND/THIRD YEAR COURSE

Students permitted on the basis of previous studies to undertake a com-bined Second and Third Year course pursuant to Regulation 3.35.4(2) may be exempted from some or all of the requirements of the following subjects of the Second and Third Years and shall enrol in those subjects of the Second and Third Years as determined by the faculty.

SECOND YEAR See additional requirements for lateral entry admissions at the end of the Second Year details which follow.

516-021 ANATOMY

Four lectures per week in term 1, and 3 lectures per week in term 2. Two 1-hour tutorials and three 2-hour practical classes per week in terms 1 and 2,

SYLLABUS The structure, organization and development of the human body. The second year programme is a continuation of the first year Anatomy course. There are three components of the course: (1) Topo-graphic Anatomy, (2) Istology and (3) Embryology. Topographic Anatomy. Topographic, radiographic, surface and applied anatomy of thorax, abdomen, pelvis, head and neck. Emphasis is placed on the clinically important aspects of anatomy. Histology. Light and electron microscopic structure of the major organs and systems of the body. Emphasis is placed on the relationships between structure and function. Embryology. Development of the major organs and systems of the body.

60


LABORATORY WORK Topographic Anatomy. Two sessions per week in terms 1 and 2 in which the thorax, abdomen, pelvis, head and neck of the human body are dissected.

Histology. One session per week in terms 1 and 2 in which the micro-scopic structure of the • major organs and .systems of the body is examined.

Embryology. Practical class demonstrations (during Histology practical classes) on the development of the major organs and systems of the body.

REQUIREMENTS Students must provide themselves with a set of dissecting instruments and a half set of bones. Students are supplied with slides and a microscope by the department, or may provide their own microscope. Microscopes supplied by the department are for use within the department only. Students are required to wear white coats in the dissecting room.

All students should report to the Anatomy Department during the first week of February, prior to the commencement of term 1. They will be allotted to groups for dissection and for demonstrations. Students who do not report at least seven days prior to the commencement of term 1 will be allotted to groups regardless of personal choice. Students absent from Melbourne during this period should write to the Laboratory Manager of the Anatomy Department requesting partners.

ASSESSMENT A practical examination on term 1 work at the end of term 1. One 3-hour written paper and an oral examination on the whole course in Topographic Anatomy (including material from first year), and one 3-hour written paper and an oral examination on the whole course in Histology and Embryology (including material from first year) immediately following the end of term 2.

536-021 PHYSIOLOGY

The work in terms 1 and 2 is a continuation of that commenced in term 3 of First Year and comprises 2 lectures, up to 4 hours laboratory class work per week and one small group tutorial per fortnight. A programme on applied aspects of the preclinical sciences will be pre-sented weekly in hospital demonstrations and campus seminars in combination with clinical departments, and the Departments of Anatomy and Biochemistry.

SYLLABUS Lecture programme. Terms 1 and 2: Cardiovascular system: the heart as a pump, haemodynamics, regional circulation, integrated cardiovascular responses, autonomic nervous control. Digestion: absorp-tion, secretion, motility. Respiration: mechanics, gas transport, control of ventilation and perfusion. Renal Function: filtration, reabsorption and secretion, water excretion, renal failure. General Metabolism: metabolic rate, thermoregulation, energy balance. Term 3: Neurosciences; Held jointly with Anatomy — see separate entry.

LABORATORY COURSE The Laboratory classes and tutorial teaching will be co-ordinated with the lecture course. Students are divided Into two groups, one attends Physiology while the other attends Biochemistry. See Biochemistry 521-021.

61

Faculty of Medicine

ASSESSMENT One 3-hour written examination at the conclusion of term 2 on the material presented during terms 1 and 2. Assessment is also based on laboratory work and tutorial assignments. Details will be posted at the beginning of term 1.

521-021 BIOCHEMISTRY Two lectures a week for the first eight weeks of term 1 and throughout term 2. Three lectures a week for the remaining weeks of term 1 and throughout term 3. Approximately 8 tutorials during the year and up to 5 hours per week practical work throughout the year. Combined seminars with Physiology will be conducted throughout the year, as will demon-strations at various hospitals.

SYLLABUS The syllabus is concerned with structure-function relationships of the chemical constituents of living tissues — proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids and substances of smaller molecular weight. The relevance of this knowledge to modern medic'ne and nutrition will be indicated throughout the syllabus and, where appropriate, examples of acquired or inherited defects in metabolic pathways will be discussed.

The course will include the following:- Bioenergetics. The ways in which ATP is generated and used; the role of enzymes. Protein structure and function. The amino acids; the primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary structure of proteins; methods of protein separa-tion; examples of biologically important proteins (e.g. haemoglobin, the immunoglobulins); enzymes catalysis and k'netics. Carbohydrate structure, function and metabolism. The structures of simple dietary carbohydrates and of glucans of nutritional significance, their digestion in the intestinal tract and the absorption of the derived sugars; the principal pathways for the metabolism of the hexoses to other compounds of importance in the body and synthesis and break-down of glycogen. Lipid structure, function and metabolism. The classes of 1ip'ds in the diet, their digestion and the absorption of the component molecules; the pathways of degradation and synthesis of fatty acids, their impor-tance as an energy source; the production and utilization of ketone bodies; the synthesis of triacylglycerides and of complex lipids, including cholesterol, and the role of these complex lipids in the structure and function of membranes. Protein and amino acid metabolism. The digestion of proteins in the gut and the absorption of the constituent amino acids; factors affecting levels of amino acids in blood and tissues; protein turnover; metabolism of the amino acids with particular emphasis on the metabolic fates of the amino nitrogen and the carbon skeletons of amino acids; one carbon metabolism — the importance of methionine and of folate and vitamin В 12. Nucleotide metabolism. The structure and function of nucleic acids. Nucle'c acid and protein biosynthesis. Biochemistry of specialized organs and tissues. This will include: liver (including the liver-plasma system and plasma proteins), bran, kidney, muscle, connective tissue, adipose tissue, haemopoietic tissue and tumour tissue. Integration and regulation of metabolic pathways.

62


PRACTICAL WORK The practical work is designed (1) to allow some acquaintance with separative and analytical procedures involved in modern biochemistry; (2) to give some insight into experimental design and factors which influence the significance of results; (3) to reinforce and extend concepts introduced in the lecture course. In addition to experimental work, pract'ce classes are given to assist the students in handling biochem?cal data and in conducting literature searches.

LABORATORY CLASSES Students are divided into two groups. One group attends Biochemistry for two consecutive days while the other group attends Physiology. The groups alternate on a weekly basis throughout the year. Students who did First Year in 1980 will continue in the same groups as for Physiology 536-011. Other students will be assigned a group. All students must report to the Preparation Room Maxwell Laboratory, during either the Monday or Tuesday of the first week of term 1 to be allotted partners and to collect practical notes.

ASSESSMENT One 1 %-hours' examination at end of first term and an end-of-year examination of 3 hours; viva voce tests as notified by the department. Assessment of the practical course is continuous by marking of laboratory notebooks and reports.

500-202 NEUROSCIENCE

SYLLABUS The syllabus consists of two components: (a) Lectures, demonstrations and practical work on the gross and micro-scopic structure of the human nervous system and the special sense organs. The brain and spinal cord are dissected; students are also required to study prepared dissections and histological slides. (Lectures — 3 hours/week; laboratory classes — 2 hours/week.) (b) Lectures, demonstrations and laboratory work on the functioning human nervous system. The neural mechanisms of vision, hearing, somatic sensibility, the regulation of limb position and movement, hypothalamic function, asymmetry of cerebral function, speech mechanisms and those of learning and memory will be considered. (Lectures — 2 hours/week; laboratory classes — 12 hours in all.)

The two components of the course have been integrated to emphasize the relationship between structure and function of the nervous system. Students will also attend a series of neurology seminars designed to illustrate the relation of the neurosciences to clinical medicine. (Seminars — 2 hours/week.)

REQUIREMENTS As with Anatomy (516-021) and Physiology (536-021); a bound laboratory notebook will be required for neuroanatomy.

ASSESSMENT One 2-hour written examination at the end of the course. Assignments during the course. The neuroanatomy laboratory notebook will be examined at the end of the course. At the beginning of the course, students will be notified of the weighting given to these exercises in the final assessment. An oral examination may be required.


One lecture per week during terms 2 and 3 and seven 2-hour tutorial/ seminar sessions conducted every second week in terms 2 and 3.

63

Faculty of Medicine

SYLLABUS This is a course in abnormal psychology and pattę rns of maladaptive behaviour frequently encountered in clinical work. Included will be a consideration of psychiatric disorders from a psychological viewpoint. Special topics will include a review of the major psychiatric diagnostic categories, concepts of abnormality, addictive behaviours, sexual dysfunctions, developmental disorders and psychological methods of treatment.

ASSESSMENT Two essays of up to 3000 words, one in each term, each worth 25% of total marks. One 3-hour written examination following term 3, worth 50% of total marks.

ADVANCED STUDY UNITS

All students will be required to pass at least 2 advanced study units offered in second and third terms of Second Year and in Third Year. Students must have passed one unit by the end of term 1 in Third Year. These will have a workload equivalent to one half-day a week for one term and students will be permitted to take no more than one unit in any one term. They are intended to emphasize independent but guided study by students who will be handled in small groups (generally 20 or less). The units will involve study in depth of an area already intro-duced in the course. They will require collection of information from scientific literature, laboratory or community situations and either written reports or verbal presentation in seminars. It is intended that this programme should bring students into close contact with research and professional staff, and would be based on campus or in clinical depart-ments.

In Second Year, advanced study units (A.S.U.'s) may be undertaken within any one of the following fields: cell biology, developmental biology, applied anatomy, functional histology, introduction to ultra-structure, the physiology of particular organs or functional systems, physiological control mechanisms, advanced neuroscience, structure and interaction of chemical constituents of the body, enzymology, biosyn-thesis and metabolism, normal or abnormal psychology and medical sociology. In Third Year, units may be undertaken within any of the above fields and also in aspects of general pathology or the pathology of particular organs or body systems, the study of bacteria, viruses, immunology, epidemiology or chemotherapy, pharmacokinetics, mechan-isms of drug action, in the study of a drug or class of drugs or on topics related to drug usage, hormones, or hormone action or regulation, and topics relevant to social and preventive medicine involving observation and assessment of the work of agencies concerned with the health, social or psychological problems of the community.

An information booklet containing a detailed list of units is available from the faculty office. Students must nominate their preferences for each term by lodging the application form to the faculty office by the due date, normally one month prior to the commencement of the following term. Faculty will endeavour to match these preferences with the resources available. Allocation of individual students to particular A.S.U.'s will be the responsibility of Faculty. Lists of approvals will be posted on noticeboards normally at the end of each term. Students should contact the departments concerned for further details.

б 4


ASSESSMENT All students are required to pass at least 2 units by the end of their third year of the course. Students must pass one unit by the end of term 1 In Third Year. Assessment on an honours/pass/fail basis will be by written reports, assignments or essays and/or verbal presentations and participation in seminars. Details of the assessment in each unit will be made available at the commencement of the year.

LATERAL ADMISSIONS TO SECOND YEAR Lateral entry students may be required to follow an additional study programme as follows:

516-021 ANATOMY Anatomy. Anatomy of upper limb, back and lower limb. Total of 3 hours/week in term 1, consisting of One tutorial (1 hour) and 2 hours' practical class. Additional reading lists will be provided. Histology and Embryology. Material normally covered in First Year (Histology: cell biology, tissues of the body; Embryology; embryonic development, histogenesis of tissues). Total of 2 hours/week in term 1, consisting of; 1 tutorial (1 hour) and 1 hour practical class. Additional reading lists will be provided.

536-021 PHYSIOLOGY Material normally covered in First Year, term 1.3 (Introductory physi-ology; nerve, muscle and synapse; blood and tissue fluids). Special assistance will be available during first term of one tutorial per week and assignments.

554-201 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE 2 In preparation for Behavioural Science 2 in term 2, lateral entry students should become familiar with the following text book prior to or during term 1. Hilgard E. R., Atkinson R. C. and Atkinson R. L. Introduction to Psychology, 7th ed. Harcourt Brace & Jovanovich. One seminar will be held during term 1 at which students will be set an essay of up to 2000 words to be submitted during the first week of term 2. In preparation for Social and Preventive Medicine in Third Year, lateral entry students should become familiar with the following text during Second Year. Hetzel B. S. Health afd Australian Society, 3rd ed. Penguin.

521-021 BIOCHEMISTRY For students with an inadequate background in organic chemistry, additional reading lists will be provided.

THIRD YEAR 521-031 METABOLISM AND ENDOCRINOLOGY

Two lectures per week and a total of four tutorials in terms 1 and 2.

C 65

Faculty of Medicine

SYLLABUS Primarily concerned with aspects of the control of metabolism in mammals and will deal with control at various levels — primitive control at the cellular level, nutritional control imposed by the need for an adequate diet and, superimposed in higher organisms, control by the endocrine system. Subjects included will be:

Cellular control of metabolism. The metabolism of special tissues, the need for a fine control between glucose utilization and formation, cellular control of carbohydrate metabolism and the regulation of glycogen break-down and synthesis, of glycolysis and of gluconeogenesis. Endocrine regulation of metabolism. Structures of hormones including reference to prohormones and to similarities in structure between certain hormones, mechanisms of action of hormones at the cellular level including discussion of hormone receptors and their importance, prin-ciples of regulation of hormone secretion, inter-relationships and inter-actions of hormones. The roles of the hypothalamus and pituitary, adrenal, thyroid and parathyroid glands and endocrine pancreas in both health and disease. The physiology of reproduction. The biochemistry of the neonate. Nutrition. The requirements of the human for major and minor nutrients in relation to various physiological states. The nutritive value of various foods with some comment on changes during storage, manufacture and preparation.

Problems of nutrition in selected states such as those demanding parenteral nutrition, obesity and associated diseases, protein-energy deficiency, common vitamin and mineral deficiency states. Inborn errors of metabolism. Clinical aspects of selected examples will be discussed with particular reference to the genetic heterogeneity which some of these conditions display.

ASSESSMENT One 3-hour written examination at the conclusion of term 2.

585-301 SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE MEDICINE Three lectures or seminars per week throughout term 1.

SYLLABUS Epidemiology. Its nature and uses and contributions to clinical practice. Sources of data and methodology. An introduction to demography, source of health statistics, sampling and surveys, case control and prospective studies.

Common diseases and epidemiological methods. Examples of the uses of epidemiology. Prevention, evaluation апд effectiveness. Controlled clinical trials, methods used in anti-smoking and other preventive campaigns. Economics апд health care. The principles of economics as applied to health care. Socially disadvantaged groups. The nature of disadvantage, the implica-tions for medical care in certain groups of Australians.

ASSESSMENT Two-hour written examination on completion of the course at the end of term 1.

531-031 PATHOLOGY Three lectures and one 2-hour museum tutorial per week throughout the year. Histopathology practical class of 2 hours per week in terms 1 and 2.

66


SYLLABUS The subject will illustrate the basis of scientific study of physical diseases, their causes and the responses of tissues and organs in these diseases. Major topics will include:

Cell response to injury. Degeneration, necrosis, autolysis. Tissue response to injury. Acute and chronic inflammation, regeneration, repair and wound healing. Circulatory disturbances. Vascular disease, haemorrhage, haemostasis, thrombosis, embolism, Infarction, hypertension, shock, oedema. Abnormalities of growth. Atrophy, hypertrophy, hyperplasia, neoplasia. Disorders of metabolism, pigmentation, calcification, immunological responses.

The contribution of these processes to the morphological and functional aspects of common and important diseases of each of the main organ systems will be described.

PRACTICAL WORK Classes in histopathology; museum demonstrations of macroscopic specimens.

ASSESSMENT One written paper of up to 2 hours' duration at end of term 2. A written paper of up to 2 hours' duration plus a 3-hour practical examination at the end of tarm 3. A viva voce examination may be required.

CONTINUATION OF COURSE The programme in Pathology continues throughout the clinical years and will include clinical correlation seminars and autopsy demonstrations.

534-031 PHARMACOLOGY

Three lectures per week throughout terms 1, 2 and 3, and one 1-hour tutorial per week throughout the year. Five 3-hour practical sessions and five 3-hour seminar sessions during terms 1 and 2. Four 3-hour seminar sessions in term 3.

SYLLABUS The subject is concerned with the general principles of pharmacology, which include pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics, and with the mechanisms of action of drugs in common use in medicine. Topics will include:

Mechanisms of drug action. The concept of drug receptors and the dynamics of drug-receptor interactions. Principles of neurohumorai transmission. The biochemistry, physiology and pharmacology of peripheral and central junctional transmission. Noradrenergic, dopaminergic, cholinergic transmission and other trans-mitter substances. Cardiovascular pharmacology. Pharmacology of drugs used in hyperten-sion, shock, peripheral vascular disease, cardiac dysrhythmias and angina. Autacoids. Synthesis, storage, release and pharmacological actions of histamine, serotinon, vasoactive peptides and prostanoids. Anti-inflammatory drugs. Pharmacology of non-steroidal anti-inflamma-tory drugs. Endocrine pharmacology. Pharmacology of endocrine hormones, their analogues and antagonists. Analgesics and anaesthetics. Pharmacology of antipyretic and narcotic analgesics, and loca' and general anaesthetics. Psychotropic drugs. Classification and pharmacology of drugs used in psychiatric illness, The problem of drug abuse.

67

Faculty of Medicine

Drugs used in neurological disorders. Pharmacology of drugs used in migraine, Parkinsonism and the epilepsies. Pharmacokinetics. Absorption, distribution and elimination of drugs. Pharmacogenetics and clinical aspects of pharmacokinetics. Selective toxicity. The principles of selective toxicity and chemotherapy. The pharmacology and toxicity of drugs used in treating infections and in the drug treatment of neoplasms. Drug interactions and toxicity. The types of drug interactions and the pharmacological basis of resultant clinical problems.

PRACTICAL WORK AND SEMINARS Each student will attend a 3-hour session each fortnight throughout the year. Details will be posted on notice boards.

ASSESSMENT One 2-hour written paper at the end of term 2, and one 2-hour written paper at the end of term 3. Additional oral and/or written tests may be required in certain cases.

526-032 MICROBIOLOGY INCLUDING IMMUNOLOGY Three lectures per week during terms 1 and 2, and two lectures per week in term 3. One 3-hour practical class including a 1-hour tutorial or seminar per week from approximately mid term 1 to mid term 3. Programmed demonstrations of approximately 1 1z hours duration every week in museum (or occasionally hospitals).

SYLLABUS Characteristics of pathogenic microorganisms. Bacteria, viruses, rickett-siae, chlamydiae, fungi, protozoa, helminths. Pathogenesis of infection. Routes of infection. Mechanisms of disease production. Infection in altered or immunocompromised hosts. Laboratory diagnosis of microbial disease. Respiratory, alimentary, C.N.S., urinary, sexually-transmitted, systemic, transplacental and iatrogenic infections. The role of laboratory in diagnosis. Collection of specimens, laboratory investigations, interpretation of reports. Micro-scopy, culture, serology, biochemistry. Rapid diagnostic techniques. Epidemiology and control of infectious disease. Routes of transmission of infection. Hygiene, sanitation. Vector control. Vaccines, immunization policy and schedules. Sterilization and disinfection. Hospital cross-infection, post-operative infection and their prevention. Antimicrobial chemotherapy. Mode of action of antibiotics. Mechanisms of acquisition of resistance. Plasmids. Antibiotic sensitivity testing. Antibiotic policy. Immunology. Ontogeny and organization of the lymphoid system. Immuno-competence. T and B lymphocytes, macrophages, dendritic cells. K cells, NK cells. Interleukins. Cell collaboration. Clonal restriction. Suppression. lmmunoglobulins. Complement. Hypersensitivity. Antimicrobial immunity. lmmunopathology. Histocompatibility antigens and disease associations. Transplant rejection. Immune response to cancer. IR genes.

PRACTICAL WORK Based on case studies which present microbiological material in conjunction with clinical history for recognition, analysis afd discussion. Most of the practical sessions conclude with a tutorial or seminar for which students read prescribed articles and prepare answers to questions set for discussion. Additional museum demonstrations are supplemented by slide/tape programmes and self-instructional question-answer sheets.

68


ASSESSMENT A 2-hour written paper at the end of term 2. A 2-hour written paper and a 2-hour practical examination at the end of term 3. An additional oral examination may be required in certain cases.

CLINICAL MICROBIOLOGY The subject is continued in the clinical years at the teaching hospitals, with joint teaching sessions where appropriate.

500-302 CORRELATION SEMINARS Seminars will be held weekly throughout the year. These will present material which integrates subject matter drawn from the third year subjects and demonstrates its relevance to both second year studies and clinical problems. There will be no formal assessment in this subject.

FOURTH YEAR Fourth Year students enrol in the following subjects: 500-490 Fourth Year M.B. B.S. comprising

500-491 Medicine 500-492 Surgery

Fourth Year comprises only two separate subjects, medicine and surgery. However, topics which cross the subject boundaries (such as principles of clinical pharmacology, pathology, microbiology, and radiology) are also included in the fourth year teaching programme during the year and details of these disciplines are included in this chapter. Teaching in medicine and surgery will be conducted in the general Clinical Schools over not more than 40 weeks and will comprise intro-ductory courses in clinical method, bedside teaching and patient clerking, lecture, tutorial and seminar programmes, laboratory classes and demonstrations. Detailed programmes in each general Clinical School are set out under "Clinical Instructions at Recognised Teaching Hospitals" later in the chapter.

OBJECTIVES AND CONTENT

500-491 MEDICINE

The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training:

1. Acquire the ability to take a comprehensive history and to make a complete physical examination.

2. Understand the basis of symptoms and signs in terms of disturb-ances in anatomy, physiology and biochemistry, and the impact of illness upon the patient's mind and emotions.

3. Learn the broad principles of management in terms of: (a) appreciation of prognosis, (b) when to treat and what may be achieved by treatment, (c) treatment as a potential cause of illness, end (d) the effect of illness on social, occupational and recreational

activities of individual patients. 4. Gain a critical perspective of the uses and limitations of ancillary

investigations in diagnosis and management. 5. Develop facility in the use of clear, precise language, both with

patients and with professional colleagues.

69

Faculty of Medicine

The teaching programme will include: 1. A clinical introductory course with class demonstrations and instruc-

tion in clinical method in small groups, to include ophthalmology, otolaryngology and dermatology, particularly as they pertain to systemic illness.

2. Medical clerking will begin in the wards, and will remain the major form of education with students taking an active role in patient care and gaining experience in therapeutics; it should include the development of personal skills in technical procedures such as venesection, lumbar puncture, etc.

3. Bed-side teaching will be supplemented by the regular submission of case notes and commentaries for the purposes indicated in Objec-tive (5); this will enable the teachers to guide the student in personal patterns of study.

4. Lectures and other class instruction will be designed as commen-taries on the course.

5. The student will become familiar with the role of laboratory tests and other investigations in the course of clinical clerking; this will be supplemented with a short course of lectures or demonstrations. Complete familiarity with simple side-room tests will be required.

6. Integration will be sought with teaching of pathology, microbiology, radiology and other disciplines.

500-492 SURGERY The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training: 1. Become competent in communicating with patients, in taking com-

prehensive surgical histories and in eliciting physical signs. 2. Undertake a course of instruction in basic surgical principles and a

series of defined topics in general surgery. 3. Develop knowledge of the principles involved in some areas of

specialty surgery. 4. Acquire an understanding of the principles of management of surgical

patients.

The teaching programme will include: 1. Instruction and practice in history taking, clinical examination and

record keeping. 2. Basic surgical principles, including wound care; asepsis, antisepsis,

surgical infection and antibiotic usage; the general metabolic response to injury; fluid and electrolyte balance; blood transfusion; shock; resuscitation, and animal and insect bites.

3. Instruction and practice in general surgery, including gastrointestinal disease (with particular emphasis on the acute abdomen) and diseases of the breast, diseases of the endocrine system, diseases of skin and subcutaneous tissues, and surgery in the aged.

4. Principles of vascular, orthopaedic and urologic surgery, and the clinical examination of the eye, the nose, the throat and the ear.

5. The history of surgery and the principles of surgical research.

PRINCIPLES OF CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY FOURTH YEAR

The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training: 1. Bring previous knowledge of pharmacology into the context of

clinical disease so as to provide a rational basis for the use of drugs.

70

2. Understand the place of drug ment of patients.

3. Gain a knowledge of the and of therapeutics which in the use of drugs and years.


therapy in the diagnosis and manage-

clinical pharmacology of important drugs will provide a basis for further experience in patient management in fifth and sixth

The teaching programme will include:

1. How to take a drug history, the incidence of drug induced disease and its presentation and diagnosis, general principles of patient management including nutrition, when and when not to use drug therapy, which drugs are appropriate for common medical conditions and the principles of their use; these include the use of generic names in prescribing, instructions to be given to the patient and the expectations of doctors and patients from treatment.

2. The clinical importance of pharmacokinetics, plasma drug measure-ments, drug reactions and interactions, methods for appraisal of established and new drugs•and treatment regimens, sources of drug information, special requirements of drug treatment in the young and the elderly, drug misuse, abuse of drugs of addiction and drug overdosage. There will be an emphasis on clinical aspects such as the way in which hepatic, cardiac or renal failure may modify the response to drugs and the consequences of these effects for drug usage.

Teaching will take place in the wards, in lectures, in seminars or tutorials.

PATHOLOGY IN CLINICAL YEARS

The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training:

1. Understand and learn to recognize the disturbances of structure and function which are responsible for the symptoms, signs and clinical course of patients seen during medical and surgical teaching.

2. Know sufficient of the pathology of common medical and surgical conditions to appreciate what can reasonably be expected of special investigations, including clinical pathology, biochemistry and radiology.

The details of the course in pathology may vary in different clinical schools, but the teaching programme will include:

1. Sessions in conjunction with physicians, surgeons, radiologists and other specialist teachers, to demonstrate the correlation of pathology and clinical manifestations of disease.

2. Demonstrations of autopsy material: (a) Students are required to attend a minimum of 65 demonstra-

tions (fourth to sixth years). (b) Each student must personally assist at one autopsy and study

the case with the aid of the clinical notes and autopsy material in order to present descriptions and conclusions for assessment.

3. Appropriate teaching of obstetrical, gynaecological and neonatal pathology during the period spent in the Royal Women's Hospital or Mercy Maternity Hospital; instruction in paediatric pathology whilst at the Royal Children's Hospital.

71

Faculty of Medicine

MICROBIOLOGY IN CLINICAL YEARS

The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training; Students should learn to apply to the clinical practice of medicine, the general principles of microbiology, immunology and epidemiology encountered during the basic course in Third Year.

In particular the student should acquire a working knowledge of: 1. The role of laboratory investigations in the diagnosis and manage-

ment of all diseases in which infection plays a part, including infections of the young, the old, the pregnant, the newborn, and the injured; infections of the ear, nose and throat, the eye and the genital tract.

2. The causes, prevention and control of infections acquired or spread in hospitals, including post-operative Infection, cross-infection, medical and surgical conditions predisposing to infection, and iatrogenic infection following common ward procedures.

3. The principles and practice of antimicrobial chemotherapy, including laboratory surveillance, jointly with clinical pharmacology.

The teaching programme during the fourth year will include: 1. Spread of infection within the hospital environment with respect to

both patients and staff. 2. Specimen collection and laboratory methods in diagnosis of diseases

in which infection plays a part. 3. Antimicrobial chemotherapy.

Microbiological problems will be kept before the students in each of the clinical disciplines in the fifth and sixth years. Where appropriate joint teaching sessions will be arranged.

RADIOLOGY

The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training: 1. The uses, limïtations and relative costs of imaging methods in a

wide range of clinical situations. They should learn to use these methods prudently and be aware of possible complications, including radiation effects.

2. An understanding of what is involved for patients when undergoing the various imaging investigations.

3. An elementary level of interpretation of radiographs, particularly in the management of emergencies.

The teaching programme will include: 1. A course of case presentations, each devoted to a particular topic

and presented in association with clinicians and pathologists, as the main avenue for achieving the objectives.

2. Visits to diagnostic departments to observe a range of organ imaging investigations.

3. Attendance at autopsies and at clinico-radiological conferences, whilst clerking, to provide further opportunities for assessing the scope and limitations of imaging methods.

The major component of teaching will be in the fourth year but experi-ence in radiology will continue for all students in their fifth and sixth years.

72


ASSESSMENT Assessment in Fourth Year is conducted as a conjoint examination. Students must pass in both the Medicine and Surgery sections of the examination.

The examination comprises the following components: 1. A 3-hour conjoint written examination in medicine and surgery at

the end of the year, including questions related to clinical pharma-cology, pathology, microbiology and radiology (contributing 25% to final assessment in Fourth Year).

2. A clinical examination at the end of the year in both Medicine and Surgery (each contributing 25% to final assessment in Fourth Year). Students must pass the 'linical examinations to be passed in the Medicine and Surgery sections of the conjoint examination.

3. The continuing assessment of progress throughout the year (Con-tributing 25% to the final assessment in Fourth Year).

Assessment in the Fourth Year will contribute 20% weighting towards the final aggregate mark list for the course as a whole prepared at the end of Sixth Year. Further details of assessment will be made available at the beginning of the year. .

FIFTH YEAR Fifth Year students enrol in the following subjects:

500-591 Paediatrics 500-592 Psychiatry 500-593 Obstetrics and Gynaecology 500-594 Community Medicine and Clinical Practice

The Fifth Year will consist of two (2) semesters each comprising two (2) subjects. Students will alternate between the semesters and between the subjects within each semester. One semester will consist of paediatrics and of obstetrics and gynaecology; these subjects will be examined following the semester. The other semester will include psychiatry and community medicine and clinical practice; these subjects will be assessed within the block devoted to such teaching. Students failing one (1) of the four (4) subjects in the Fifth Year will be permitted to carry it into the Sixth Year, to be repeated during the options period. Students failing two (2) or more subjects will not be permitted to pass to the Final Year.

500-591 PAEDIATRICS

A subject of 10 weeks' duration.

OBJECTIVES AND CONTENT The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training: 1. An understanding of normal childhood development in all its aspects

— physical, emotional and intellectual. 2. Awareness of the importance of the interactions of the child and the

family, and the social interactions between the child and the community.

3. The ability to handle problems of growth, development and behaviour.

73

Faculty of Medicine

4. The necessary skills and knowledge required for the provision of acute primary care to the sick child.

5. An understanding of the important aspects of secondary care so that a wide variety of medical and surgical illnesses can be recognized, and use made of the appropriate hospital and community resources.

6. Familiarity with preventive paediatrics — nutrition, immunization, health screening and accident prevention.

The teaching programme will include: 1. Growth and development, and concepts of maturation; norms for

physical development; the development of normal behaviour patterns; the use of percentile charts; assessment of developmental achievement.

2. Common disorders requiring primary care; important and serious medical and surgical disorders of childhood.

3. Paediatric diagnosis; history taking; physical examination of children; ability to establish rapport with patients and parents.

4. The interaction of the child and the family; basis of development of personality; basis for understanding behaviour and emotional disorders; influence of emotional problems on disease.

5. The impact of the community on the family; the effect of social disadvantage on the family, e.g. poverty, single parent families, migrants, etc.

6. Chronic disease and handicap in childhood; community facilities for the handicapped child, e.g. the blind child, the deaf child, physically handicapped child, mentally retarded child, children in need of care. School failure. During the final year, revision will be undertaken in Paediatrics in the general clinical school. The topics to be covered will include particularly those with an emphasis on therapeutics.

ASSESSMENT A clinical examination and an oral examination will be held at the end of the 10-week period. One 3-hour written examination will be held twice yearly at the end of the 20-week semester. Submission of a satisfactory Child Development Study report during Fifth Year/Sixth Year is required. A candidate failing this study will be required to pass a special oral examination in Sixth Year. Neonatal Paediatrics will be examined as a component in Obstetrics and Gynaecology in Year 5. Assessment will also be made in the written papers in Sixth Year contributing 15% to the final class list in Paediatrics.

500-592 PSYCHIATRY A subject of 8 weeks' duration.

OBJECTIVES AND CONTENT The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training: 1. Establish a core knowledge of general psychiatry. 2. Learn skills in interviewing and in the evaluation of the patient's

mental state. 3. Become familiar with principles of supportive care and gain experi-

ence in counselling. 4. Develop an understanding of the problems that people with emotional

or psychiatric disturbances present and develop a positive attitude toward assisting them by the application of appropriate skills and knowledge.

74


The teaching programme will include: 1. The development process of an individual through the ages and

stages of life; natal factors, infancy, pre-school, school age, adoles-cence and adulthood, old age.

2. The interaction of the psychiatric patient and family. Parenthood, family structure and functioning; the social, cultural and psycho-pathological aspects of child and family psychiatry.

3. Psychiatric diagnosis; history taking, psychiatric examination and interviewing techniques; ability to establish rapport with patients and family.

4. Common disorders requiring psychiatric care. Important and serious psychiatric disorders; chronic psychiatric disorders.

5. The impact of the community on the psychiatric patient and the patient's family.

6. Hospital and community resources. Psychiatric hospitals and clinics, mental hospitals; day care facilities, training centres and rehabilita-tion units.

7. Clinical clerking. Students must become involved with patient care and the families of the patient. They will also gain experience in "liaison psychiatry" in which the problems of patients in the general hospital wards are studied, in addition to the care of patients in psychiatric units. During the final year of the course, revision will be undertaken in Psychiatry In the general clinical schools. The topics to be covered will include particularly those with an emphasis on therapeutics.

ASSESSMENT Continuous internal assessment during the 8-week period contributing 50% to result in Fifth Year (42.5% to Final class list In Psychiatry). One 2-hour written examination including a case commen-tary at the end of the 8-week period contributing 50% to the result in Fifth Year (42.5% to Final class list in Psychiatry). Assessment will also be made in the written papers in Sixth Year contributing 15% to the final class list in Psychiatry.

500-593 OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY

A subject of 10 weeks' duration.

OBJECTIVES AND CONTENT The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training: 1. Establish a sound knowledge of the structure and function of the

female reproductive tract, the fetus and neonate. 2. Interpret clinical experience in normal and abnormal aspects of

female development, pregnancy, labour and delivery and the puer-perium, and the menopause.

The teaching programme will include: Particular topics such as practical obstetrics afd the aspects of the specialty which will be met in general practice, especially problems of pregnancy, care of the newborn, contraception and simple gynaeco-logical disorders.

The most important aspects of the detailed syllabus are: 1. A full knowledge of normal obstetrics and care of the normal neonate. 2. Early recognition of obstetrical abnormality. 3. Management of obstetrical emergencies. 4. Family planning and infertility.

75

Faculty of Medicine

5. Marital and sexual problems. 6. Vaginal discharge, menstrual disorders and pelvic tumours. 7. Recognition and treatment of neonatal emergencies.

The course emphasizes participation in patient care especially delivery room procedures and practice in examination of the female genital tract. Attendance at special clinics (family planning, sexual counselling, infer-tility, oncology, venereal disease) is an important aspect of the course. During the final year of the course, revision of Obstetrics and Gynae-cology will be undertaken in the general clinical schools. The topics to be covered will include particularly those with an emphasis on therapeutics.

ASSESSMENT Continuous internal assessment during the period. A clinical and oral examination in obstetrics and in gynaecology and an oral examination in neonatal paediatrics at the end of the period. One 3-hour written examination at the end of the 20-week semester which will include Neonatal Medicine. Thus students in groups A and B will sit in the written paper mid-year, and groups C and D at the end of the year. Assessment will also be made in the written papers in Sixth Year contributing 15% to the final class list in Obstetrics and Gynaecology.

500-594 COMMUNITY MEDICINE AND CLINICAL PRACTICE

A subject of 10 weeks duration.

SYLLABUS Casualty, Trauma, Resuscitation and Anaesthetics: Four weeks including the equivalent of one week of practical instruction in anaesthetics under-taken within a general clinical school. Primary Medical Care: Two weeks in community health centres and general practices, together with seminar teaching. Infectious Diseases: Two weeks residential at Fairfield Hospital. Community and Forensic Medicine: Fourteen lectures at the beginning of the year and 2 weeks of lectures/seminars and fieldwork. Geriatrics: The equivalent of 4 days of lectures/discussions/clinical demonstrations at Mount Royal Hospital during the 4-week C.T.R.A. period or the 8-week Psychiatry period.

OBJECTIVES AND CONTENT The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training: 1. Become familiar with the principles and practice underlying the

management of acute illness and trauma, the processes of wound healing and the conduct of anaesthesia.

2. Learn the principles of community medicine, as demonstrated by primary medical care, geriatrics, occupational medicine and com-municable diseases.

3. Develop an understanding of forensic medicine and ethics.

The teaching programme will include: Casualty and Trauma: The management of soft tissue injuries, including the suturing of wounds in non-critical sites; skin grafting and wound dressing; the diagnosis and management of common fractures and joint Injuries, including the application of splints and plaster casts. Resuscitation: The initial assessment of injured or acutely ill patients; the initial resuscitation of the seriously injured patient; the technique and conduct of cardio-pulmonary resuscitation.

76

Degroes of M.B., B.S.

Anaesthetics: An understanding of the methods employed in the conduct of general and local anaesthesia; the pharmacology of anaesthetic agents, the hazards of anaesthesia; the functioning of anaesthetic equipment; the care of the unconscious patient; peri-operative care; the basic skills of anaesthetic procedures, including maintenance of an airway.

Primary Medical Care: An understanding of the spectrum of illness through the clinical conditions encountered in primary care; the common diagnostic and therapeutic problems In the early stages of illness; the natural history of disease; the interaction of the clinical, psychological and social aspects of disease; the role and present organization of community health services in the prevention and management of illness.

Geriatrics: Presentation of disease in old age; common diseases; health problems including immobility, mentality, continence; degenerative dis-orders of the central nervous, cardiovascular and locomotor systems; clinical pharmacology of old age; psychogeriatrics.

Infectious Diseases: The diagnosis and management and the integration of the clinical and laboratory aspects of communicable diseases.

Community and Forensic Medicine

Forensic Medicine: Fundamental concepts of law relevant to medicine; witnesses and expert testimony; forensic aspects of illegal drug usage; sudden unexpected death; physical trauma; asphyxia, post mortem toxi-cology including alcohol; post mortem examination; legal aspects of abnormal behaviour and crime; certification; suicide; homicide; the police and coroner's court.

Ethics: Medicine, science and moral philosophy; the concepts of life and death; consent and responsibility; the right of the patient to be informed; confidentiality; the social implications of ethical decisions; professional conduct and the obligations of medical practitioners including medical fallibility afd legal liability.

Community Medicine: Aspects of community geriatrics and rehabilitation including the organization of systems of care for frail and sick elderly people in the community; applied social gerontology; occupational medicine including prevention and health maintenance; clinical aspects of sexually transmitted diseases; medical care of special groups including alcohol and drug dependence, aboriginals, ethnic groups and the health care of the handicapped.

ASSESSMENT

Casualty, Trauma, Resuscitation and Anaesthetics: Continuous internal assessment contributing 30% to the final result in the subject. Assess-ment may also be made in the written papers in Sixth Year.

Primary Medical Care: Continuous internal assessment contributing 20% to the final result in the subject.

Geriatrics: Continuous internal assessment contributing 10% to the final result in the subject.

Infectious Diseases: No formal assessment in Fifth Year but an assess-ment may be made In the written papers in Sixth Year.

Community and Forensic Medicine: One 2-hour written paper at the end of the 2-week period and continuous internal assessment, together contributing 40% to the final result in the subject.

77

Faculty of Medicine

SIXTH YEAR Sixth year students enrol in the following subjects:-

500-691 Medicine 500-692 Surgery 500-693 Obstetrics & Gynaecology 500-694 Paediatrics 500-695 Psychiatry

In addition students undertake an options period of 10 weeks minimum duration at the beginning of the year for which formal enrolment is not required. Following the options term students will complete two clinical terms of twelve weeks, each ending in a clinical examination dealing predomin-antly with either medicine or surgery. Each term will offer a systematic, topic orientated teaching programme mounted in the general clinical schools and in addition to topics relevant to medicine and surgery, the programme will have an orientation to patient management and thera-peutics. A specific commitment will be given to therapeutics relevant to paediatrics, psychiatry, obstetrics and gynaecology. Detailed advice concerning the Sixth Year programmes in each clinical school is set out under "Clinical Instruction at Recognized Teaching Hospitals" later in this chapter.

OPTIONS

OBJECTIVES

Students are to widen their experience in one of the following ways: 1. By examining in greater depth some aspect of medicine, either through supervised work on a project, or by close contact in clinical activities with members of the teaching staff or other members of the profession. 2. By working in situations giving greater responsibility in the care of patients than ordinarily applies in the undergraduate course. 3. By sampling the broad demands of medical practice in the community. 4. By travel away from the parent hospital and experience of health care in the country, in interstate or overseas hospitals. 5. By study in an academic or professional field not taught within the course but which could be of value in later professional life. 6. Experience of possible fields of future specialization so as to facilitate career choice.

SELECTION OF OPTIONS

Students are required to make their own arrangements for options, which should be planned during the fifth year. The ten-week period may be subdivided into two periods of five weeks, but periods of attachment of less than five weeks are unlikely to be approved. Attachments may begin during the long vacation and the timing varied provided a minimum of ten weeks is devoted to an approved programme of study. In considering alternatives, students should seek advice from thś Associate-Dean (Clinical) of their teaching hospital, from the Chairman of the Department of Community Health with respect to general practice, or from the Chairmen of other academic departments. Proposals made must stipulate the duration of attachment, the nature of work to be

78


undertaken and Its location and the name of a proposed supervisor. Once a proposal is completed, it must be submitted through the Associate-Dean (Clinical) for approval by Faculty. A report will be obtained at the conclusion of the option period by the Associate-Dean (Clinical) or the Chairman of the Department of Community Health, as relevant from both student and supervisor. Remedial options will be undertaken by students who have failed one subject in the fifth year of the course and these will be followed by an examination in the subject concerned. With this exception, options will not be approved which consist of normal clinical teaching in the general teaching hospitals. Arrangements have been established to provide loans to students to assist in overseas travel and Information about such loans is available from the faculty office.

OBJECTIVES AND CONTENT

500-691 MEDICINE

The student should aim to meet the following objectives during the course of training: 1. Consolidation of knowledge of clinical method learnt in fourth year, and gaining of knowledge of Illness in greater depth. 2. Reinforcement of clinical experience with a more detailed knowledge of the major branches of therapeutics and ancillary Investigations.

The teaching programme will include: 1. Clinical attachments in wards and outpatient clinics in general medi-cine, and in special units according to the organization of the hospitals within each clinical school. 2. Clinical experience In general medicine, and in cardiology, diabetes and endocrinology, gastroenterology, haematology, nephrology, neurology and respiratory medicine during the medical clinical term and in rheuma-tology, dermatology and medical aspects of oncology during the term devoted primarily to surgery. 3. Therapeutics in a clinical setting, combined with tuition by seminars, tutorials or lectures in the topics cited above, and where appropriate in association with related subjects in the other major disciplines. 4. As much direct responsibility as possible In the active care of patients, with guidance and instruction to include: the performance of minor procedures; the keeping of case records, and interview and coun-selling of patients' relatives; communication with the patients' family doctors, and close liaison with other professional. colleagues.

500-692 SURGERY

The major objective of the final year surgical course is the provision of a broad base of general knowledge, skills and attitudes, which will provide sufficient detailed factual knowledge and practical skills to enable the student to recognize surgical problems, and to allow correct decisions to be made about management.

During the year the student is expected to:

1. Consolidate the bedside methods and skills learned in fourth and fifth years.

79

Faculty of Medicine

2. Acquire a greater depth of knowledge of surgically related disease, with emphasis on surgical investigation and management, through involvement in the activities of general surgical services. 3. Gain practical experience in a variety of surgical specialist services, which will provide a general understanding of the principles of exami-nation, diagnosis and management.

Particular emphasis will be given to the acquisition and strengthening of clinical skills by involvement in patient care.

The teaching programme will include: 1. More detailed teaching in the general aspects of surgery, with particular emphasis on surgical anatomy, surgical pathology, investiga-tion and management; solid tumour oncology, including surgery, radio-therapy and chemotherapy; the management of burns, and the processes of rehabilitation. 2. Practical experience and tuition in the principles involved In a series of specialty surgical areas, including cardiac and thoracic surgery; neurosurgery; spinal cord injury; orthopaedic surgery; plastic and recon-structive surgery; otorhinolaryngology; ophthalmology; and the surgical techniques of pain relief.

500-693 OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY

Refer to objectives and content outlined in Fifth Year details of subjects.

500-694 PAEDIATRICS

Refer to objectives and content outlined in Fifth Year details of subjects.

500-695 PSYCHIATRY

Refer to objectives and content outlined in Fifth Year details of subjects. During the final уе à г of the course, revision of Obstetrics and Gynae-cology, Paediatrics and Psychiatry will be undertaken in the general clinical schools. The topics to be covered will include particularly those with an emphasis on therapeutics.

ASSESSMENT Two 3-hour written examinations at the end of the year dealing with topics relating to Medicine, Surgery, Obstetrics and Gynae-cology, Paediatrics and Psychiatry.

A clinical examination will be held in medicine and surgery at the end of each twelve week term. This will be held within the candidate's own general clinical school and will emphasize patient management.

Medicine: The honours class list will be derived from assessment in Fourth Year (contributing 25%) and Sixth Year (75%). Surgery: The honours class list will be derived from assessment in Fourth Year (contributing 20%), Fifth Year (Paediatric Surgery 10%) and Sixth Year (70%). Obstetrics and Gynaecology: The honours class list will be derived from assessment in Fifth Year (contributing 85%) and Sixth Year (15%). Paediatrics: The honours class list will be derived from assessment in Fifth Year (contributing 85%) and Sixth Year (15%). Psychiatry: The honours class list will be derived from assessment in Fifth Year (contributing 85%) and Sixth Year (15%).

80


For 1983 assessment of Sixth Year work will contribute 37.5% towards the final aggregate class list for the course as a whole prepared at the end of Sixth Year (Fourth Year contributing 25% and Fifth Year 37.5%). Further information concerning assessment will be made available at the beginning of the year.

CLINICAL INSTRUCTION AT RECOGNIZED TEACHING HOSPITALS

Students must keep records of the patients allotted to them and must submit these records for Inspection as often required by the Associate-Dean (Clinical) of the Clinical School. The clinical work performed by each student in Fourth, Fifth and Sixth Years may be taken into account by the examiners in assessing the results of the final examination.

AUSTIN HOSPITAL AND REPATRIATION GENERAL HOSPITAL

FOURTH YEAR

1. After a brief orientation to the hospitals the students will spend the first twelve weeks full time in the wards of the hospital, including a 2-week introductory course. 2. An integrated programme of formal instruction consisting of lectures, group discussions, seminars and attendance at prepared demonstrations will be held in the latter part of the year. Teaching in each subject will cover the necessary aspects of Clinical Medicine and Surgery, Clinical Pharmacology, Psychiatry, Special Pathology, Microbiology, Anatomy, Physiology, Pharmacology and Biochemistry. The subjects will be taught in a systematic way according to topics Cardiology and vascular Dis-ease; Renal Disease; Pulmonary Disease; Gastroenterology; Endocrin-ology; Haematology; Neurology and Neurosurgery; Rheumatology and Clinical Immunology; Clinical Pharmacology; Trauma; Common Surgical Conditions; Dermatology; Oncology; Bone Disease and Infectious Diseases.

3. Clinico-pathological demonstrations will take place regularly each week.

4. All other times during each week will be spent in the wards and in the Outpatients Department, both at the Austin Hospital and at the Repatriation General Hospital, small groups being allocated to clinical units for teaching. Students will be required to clerk patients and to present their findings at regular teaching sessions. They will be expected to undertake ward procedures, attend their patients at the Radiology Department, operating theatres etc., and be available for clerking emergency admissions. Students will be expected to hand in histories of patients for assessment during each term. 5. Psychiatry: Students will be introduced to psychological aspects of medicine by a series of lectures, seminars and case presentations.

FIFTH YEAR

1. Obstetrics and Gynaecology: Students will spend ten weeks in resi-dence at the Mercy Maternity Hospital.

81

Faculty of Medicine

2. Psychiatry: There will be a period of eight weeks' instruction in Psychiatry. Four weeks of this period will be spent at the Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital, and four weeks at the Larundel Hospital. . З . Community Medicine and Clinical Practice: (a) A period of two weeks in a community health centre or general

practice together with seminar teaching arranged by the Department of Community Health.

(b) A 2-week period of residential instruction at the Fairfield Infectious Diseases Hospital.

(c) A course of lectures/demonstrations on Geriatrics at the Mount Royal Hospital.

(d) A course of fourteen lectures in Forensic Medicine at the beginning of the year followed during the year by a two-week course of seminars and practical experience in Community Medicine.

(e) A 4-week term of casualty, trauma, resuscitation and anaesthetics to be conducted at the Clinical School. Students will live in during this term. In groups of one or two they will have one week's instruction in Anaesthetics and Intensive Care Management. For three weeks they will be attached to the Casualty Department at the Austin Hospital and the Box Hill and District Hospital. During this time they will undergo instruction in the recognition and management of acutely ill patients and will be expected to follow the progress of ill patients for their first few days in hospital.

4. Paediatrics: The following programme is followed by students of each of the general clinical schools.

Students attend the Royal Children's Hospital, Melbourne, full-time daily for a period of ten weeks during their Fifth Year. The Paediatric pro-gramme commences with an Orientation period, during which students are introduced by means of lectures, films, demonstrations and clinical sessions, to the various aspects of growth and development in normal children.

This is followed by clinical instruction in the wards and outpatient department and a course of lectures in Paediatric Medicine and Surgery, given by members of the medical staff of the Royal Children's Hospital, and the Department of Paediatrics. Clinical tutors assist in the teaching programme in the wards. Students also attend sessions in the Depart-ment of Psychiatry and Behavioural Science and receive demonstrations in the Department of Radiology and clinical sessions in a number of other specialist departments, e.g. Cardiology, Neurology, Gastroenter-ology, Haematology, etc.

Students visit a number of institutions caring for children in the com-munity. These include the Lady Gowrie Children's Centre and the Children's Cottages at Kew. Students also visit a private school and conduct physical examinations under supervision.

Through a number of assignments, students are exposed to certain social problems relating to children. During the course of these assign-ments, they will visit various institutions concerned with the care of disadvantaged children.

While at the Royal Women's Hospital and Mercy Maternity Hospital, each student follows the development of an infant whom he has delivered for a period of nine to twelve months. At the end of this period of

82


study, the student writes a report on the progress and development of the infant. This project is marked as satisfactory or unsatisfactory. Any student receiving an unsatisfactory mark to his Growth Study Project will be required to attend an Oral in Developmental Paediatrics at the time of the Final Examinations in Year 6. Students are resident in the Royal Children's Hospital for one week during Fifth Year. In addition each student has approximately five duty periods when he acts as an apprentice to a Resident Medical Officer. During these duty periods students will be responsible for taking and recording clinical histories and physical examinations. These will subse-quently be checked and signed by the Resident Medical Officer on duty. Such a scheme will enable students to become more involved, particu-lаг lу in the care of acutely ill children.

SIXTH YEAR

During the first ten weeks all students will undertake options. Following the option there will be two twelve-week terms, one medically orientated and the other surgically orientated. 1. Students will spend time in the general wards of the Austin Hospital, Repatriation General Hospital and Box Hill and District Hospital clerking patients and being involved in patient care. 2. During their medically orientated term they will be attached to the specialist medical units, both In wards and in outpatients. During their surgically orientated term they will be attached to specialist surgical units and receive instruction in Oncology and Dermatology in the wards and in outpatients. They will receive instruction in diseases of the eyes, ears, nose and throat. 3. There will be a series of lectures/seminars covering a variety of topics with the emphasis on patient management. 4. Obstetrics, Gynaecology and Paediatrics will be covered by a series of lectures/seminars to be conducted majorly at the clinical school, with an emphasis on managément problems.

PRIZES

The Senior Medical Staff of the Austin Hospital will award a medal to the student who receives the highest marks in the final examinations, The Smith and Nephew Prize in Surgery, valued at $250.00 is awarded to the student from the Clinical School who obtains the highest marks in the oral and clinical surgery examinations. The Lorna King Medal will be awarded to the student from the Clinical School who obtains the highest aggregate mark in Fourth Year.

ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL

FOURTH YEAR

1. The year commences with an introductory week during which history taking and physical examination are demonstrated by case discussions and in the wards. 2. Students are then allocated to wards for further instruction in clinical method and for clinical clerking. There will be six periods of about six weeks each divided equally between Medicine and Surgery. 3. All students are attached to Professorial Units in both Medicine and Surgery for one period.

83

Faculty of Medicine

4. During the periods of medical clerking, students will receive a weekly tutorial in Psychiatry and will attend autopsies and organ demonstra-tions in the Department of Anatomical Pathology.

5. During the periods of surgical clerking, instruction will be given in Orthopaedics and Vascular Surgery and students will attend demonstra-tions in radiological pathology.

6. The principles of Clinical Pharmacology will be taught concurrently with clinical teaching.

7. A course of lectures in Medicine, Surgery, Pathology, Microbiology and Clinical Pharmacology will be offered during the year. 8. Students may be rostered to the Ballarat Base Hospital for one term, Accommodation will be provided at the hospital. 9. Periods of residence at the Royal Melbourne Hospital students' quarters can be arranged.

FIFTH YEAR

1. Obstetrics and Gynaecology: Students will spend 10 weeks in resi-dence at the Royal Women's Hospital. 2. Paediatrics: Students will attend for 10 weeks at the Royal Children's Hospital. Details of the programme are set out in the paediatrics section under the Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital Clinical School entry.

3. Psychiatry: Instruction will be given for a period of 8 weeks at the Royal Melbourne Hospital and Royal Park Hospital. 4. Community Medicine and Clinical Practice: (a) Casualty, anaesthetics, resuscitation, trauma: A period of 4 weeks

will be spent in residence at the hospital attending the Casualty Department. During this period students will be given the equiva-lent of one week's instruction in Anaesthetics.

(b) Infectious Diseases: Two weeks will be spent in residence at the Fairfield Infectious Diseases Hospital.

(c) Primary Medical Care: A period of two weeks in a community health centre or general practice together with seminar teaching, arranged by the Department of Community Health.

(d) Geriatrics: A course of lectures and clinical demonstrations at the Mount Royal Hospital.

(e) Community and Forensic Medicine: A course of fourteen lectures in Forensic Medicine at the beginning of the year followed during the year by a two-week course of seminars and practical experience in Community Medicine.

SIXTH YEAR

1. During the first 10 weeks, students will undertake options in pre or paraclinical disciplines, in primary medical care, in subspecialties of Medicine or Surgery, in peripheral or country hospitals or in medical schools interstate or overseas, No lectures will be arranged during this time.

2. Thereafter, students will spend 12 weeks on medical topics and 12 weeks on surgical and related topics. Half of each period will be spent in specialist units. Ward teaching will be supplemented by lectures, tutorials and correlation seminars, to achieve the objectives listed

84


earlier in the handbook. Students may be rostered to an affiliated hospital for part of this period. 3. Students will be expected to understand and participate in the practical management of the patients they see and clerk. 4. Students are expected to spend some time in residence to observe the early management of acute medical and surgical conditions.

PRIZES

The following scholarships and prizes are open for competition to stu-dents of the Royal Melbourne Hospital: 1. The T. F. Ryan Scholarship in Medicine ($200) is awarded on the result of an examination conducted by the Royal Australasian College of Physicians shortly after the final examination. 2. The J. P. Ryan Scholarship in Surgery ($200) is awarded on the result of an examination conducted by the Royal Australasian College of Surgeons at the end of the first year after graduation. 3. The Stirling Prize in Clinical Surgery is awarded to a final year student on the result of an oral test conducted by the surgical staff of the hospital, 4. The Alison Howarth Prize ($70) is awarded triennially to the student from the Royal Melbourne Hospital who submits the best essay on the Rheumatic Disorders or a related subject. 5. The Leonard Mitchell Prize in Ophthalmology is awarded annually to a student on the result of an examination arranged by the Ophthalmologist. 6. The Moody Prize for "Skill, kindness and human understanding" will be awarded annually to a fourth year student; the selection will be based on the reports of the Clinical Instructors.

ST. VINCENT'S HOSPITAL

FOURTH YEAR

1. The year begins with four weeks' instruction in clinical methods in Medicine and Surgery. 2. Medicine: There will be two blocks of instruction, totalling about sixteen weeks altogether. Students are rostered to a general medical unit, and also attend some specialist medical units; some of this teach-Ing is conducted at Preston and Northcote Community Hospital. 3. Surgery: There will be two blocks of instruction, totalling about sixteen weeks altogether. Students are rostered to a general surgical unit, and also attend some specialist surgical units; some of this teaching is conducted at Preston and Northcote Community Hospital. 4. Principles of Clinical Pharmacology: A teaching programme is under-taken concurrently with clinical teaching. 5. Psychiatry: When students are rostered to a medical unit there is one tutorial per week. 6. Autopsy demonstrations are given on Mondays and Tuesdays at midday. 7. Lectures in Medicine, Surgery, Applied Pathology and Applied Microbiology and tutorials in Radiology are given during the year.

85

Faculty of Medicine

8. Casualty Duty: During the year students are required to spend two weeks in residence in Casualty. Students are also encouraged to attend the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital and Preston and Northcote Community Hospital during weekends to gain further clinical experience.

FIFTH YEAR

1. Obstetrics and Gynaecology: Instruction is conducted during ten weeks' residency at the Royal Women's Hospital.

2. Paediatrics: There is a course of ten weeks' instruction at the Royal Children's Hospital. Details of the programme are set out in the paediat-rics section under the Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital Clinical School entry.

3. Psychiatry: A course of eight weeks' instruction is conducted in conjunction with the University Department of Psychiatry. This instruc-tion will be conducted at St. Vincent's Hospital, Parkville Psychiatric Hospital and Mont Park Hospital. 4. Community Medicine and Clinical Practice: A ten week programme comprising: (a) Casualty, trauma, resuscitation and anaesthetics: A four week term

including the equivalent of one week of practical instruction in anaesthetics, Casualty instruction will include some weekend experience at the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital if this has not been obtained in Fourth Year; part of the term will be spent in residence at St. Vincent's Hospital.

(b) Primary Medical Care: A period of two weeks in a community health centre or general practice together with seminar teaching, arranged by the Department of Community Health.

(c) Infectious Diseases: A two week residential term at Fairfield Hospital.

(d) Geriatric Medicine: There will be instruction in geriatric medicine at the Mount Royal Hospital during the term in psychiatry.

(e) Community and Forensic Medicine: A course of fourteen lectures in Forensic Medicine at the beginning of the year followed during the year by a two week course of seminars and practical experience in Community Medicine.

SIXTH YEAR

1. During the first ten weeks of the year the students will undertake approved options in clinical, pre-clinical and para-clinical disciplines, including general practice. Remedial options will be undertaken by students who have failed one subject in the Fifth Year of the course and these will be followed by an examination in the subject concerned. 2. Medical and Surgical Teaching: In preparation for the final examina-tion there are allocations to general medical and general surgical units. During this time there is a short period in residence for experience in the management of acute medical and surgical conditions to be gained.

З . Specialist Clinics: Completion of teaching in the specialties is under-taken. The medical specialties include cardiology, diabetes and endoc-rinology, gastroenterology, haematology, intensive care, nephrology, neurology and respiratory medicine. The surgical specialties include cardiac surgery, dermatology, medical aspects of oncology, neuro-surgery, ophthalmology, orthopaedic surgery, otolaryngology, plastic and reconstructive surgery, rheumatology, thoracic surgery, urology and the

86


surgical techniques of pain relief. Some of this teaching is conducted at Preston and Northcote Community Hospital. Students visit the Peter Mac С allum Clinic to gain experience of malignant disease. 4. Radiology tutorials, revision lectures in medicine and surgery and tutorials having reference to specialist areas of medicine and surgery are provided during the allocations to general medical and general surgical units, 5. Revision of obstetrics and gynaecology, paediatrics and psychiatry will be undertaken in the general clinical schools, with emphasis on patient management. 6. There will be direct responsibility in the care of patients, and the counselling of patients relatives. Clinical experience will be reinforced with a more detailed knowledge of the major branches of therapeutics and ancillary investigations and the clinical methods and skills learned in fourth and fifth years will be consolidated.

PRIZES

The following Scholarships and Prizes are open for competition to students at St. Vincent's Hospital: 1. The Andrew Brenan Prize ($100) is awarded at the end of Fourth Year to the student with the highest marks in General and Special Pathology. 2. St. Vincent's Hospital Graduates' Association Prize in Medicine ($100) and St. Vincent's Hospital Graduates' Association Prize in Surgery ($100) are awarded at the end of Fourth Year. 3. The Michael and Margaret Ryan Scholarships in Medicine and Sur-gery, valued at $200 each, are awarded as a result of special examina-tions at the end of the Sixth Year in Medicine, and to the student with the highest marks in the clinical section of the final examinations in Surgery. 4. The R. M. Biggins Prize ($100) is awarded annually to the Final Year student who has performed best in Medicine (Judged on personal qualities as well as academic achievement). 5. The Dean's Prize ($100) is awarded annually in Final Year to the outstanding student (judged on personal qualities as well as academic achievement).

MERCY MATERNITY HOSPITAL

FIFTH YEAR

During the year each student at the Austin Hospital Clinical School is required to attend the Mercy Maternity Hospital for ten weeks residence at times arranged. During this time a course of lectures, tutorials and clinical instruction is conducted. After witnessing ten normal deliveries students conduct their own deliveries under supervision. Each student is allotted to an Obstetrical and Gynaecological Unit for the whole period of ten weeks. Antenatal and Outpatient Clinics are attended at least once a week. Every patient in the Obstetrical and Gynaecological Wards is allotted to a student and detailed records are kept by the student. Obstetrical patients are delivered, wherever possible, by the students to whom they are allotted. Students assist with operative procedures on their own gynaecological patients.

87

Faculty of Medicine

Each day the Receiving Obstetrical and Gynaecological consultants conduct a round of their patients with the students concerned. Each student performs a curettage and a forceps delivery under the direction of a member of the medical staff. Each student will be rostered to attend each of the special clinics in the Hospital on at least one occasion during the ten weeks residence.

ROYAL WOMEN'S HOSPITAL FIFTH YEAR

During the year each student at the Royal Melbourne and St. Vincent's Hospital Clinical Schools is required to attend the Royal Women's Hospital for ten weeks' residence at times arranged. Of this time a preliminary one week period is occupied in tutorial and lecture demon-stration groups of seven or eight, conducted in wards, Out-patients" Department and Labour Ward, by the Professorial Unit. A preliminary course of formal lectures is also given. Students view five normal deliveries and then conduct their own deliveries under the direction of a registered medical practitioner. In the remaining nine weeks, clinical instruction is conducted by mem-bers of the Clinical School. Each student is allotted to an Obstetrical and Gynaecological Unit for the whole period. Antenatal and Outpatient Clinics are atended at least once a week. Every patient in the Obstetrical and Gynaecological Wards is allotted to a student, and detailed records are kept by the student, Obstetrical patients are delivered, wherever possible. by the students to whom they are allotted. Students assist with operative procedures on their own gynaecological patients. Each day the Receiving Obstetrical and Gynaecological Senior Associates conduct a round of their own patients with the students concerned. A further course of tutorials and lecture demonstrations is conducted by the Professorial Unit. In addition, students attend the special clinics conducted in the hospital; in particular, sterility, endocrine, radio-surgical and family planning.

DEPARTMENT OF MEDICAL BIOLOGY (THE WALTER AND ELIZA HALL INSTITUTE OF MEDICAL RESEARCH)

The Department is organized into five Units and two Independent Laboratories, Units: Cellular Immunology, Cancer Research, Clinical Research, Experi-mental Pathology and Biophysics and Biochemistry. Laboratories: Immunoparasitology and Molecular Biology. Candidates will be required to undertake research in one of the fields currently under study in the Unit or Laboratory, the subject to be approved by the Professor of Medical Biology and the work to be carried out under the detailed supervision of the Unit or Laboratory Head and the general supervision of the Professor. Candidates will also be expected to attend a Postgraduate Lecture Course given by members of the Institute staff and to attend the weekly seminar series. The results of research will normally be published and a thesis will be required in addition. This thesis will include a brief literature review in a prescribed portion of the relevant field.

88

CHAPTER 9

DETAILS FOR HIGHER DEGREES

DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF MEDICINE (Regulation 3.36)

Note (1) Candidates are advised to make enquiries in the first instance from the Assistant Registrar (Medicine) before making a formal approach to a chairman of department of the faculty relevant to the field of investigation.

(2) Before submitting a thesis for examination candidates are required to present evidence that they hold a degree of bachelor of medicine and bachelor of surgery, or equivalent degree, of at least two years' standing. (3) Candidates accepted on the basis of qualifications obtained at other universities are required to present evidence of two years' approved association with this University. (4) Candidates seeking enrolment as full-time or part-time students are required to consult with the chairman of department of the faculty relevant to the discipline and to submit to the faculty, through the department concerned, a proposal for approval by the Standing Com-mittee on Higher Degrees. The proposal should set out a topic, arrange-ments for supervision and a statement relating to facilities and resources. Subject to approval of the candidature, of the topic and its relevance to the theory or practice of medicine, of enrolment (including annual re-enrolment) and satisfactory execution of the programme of research, as certified by the chairman of department, the candidate will be admitted to examination on presentation of a thesis. Before submission and within six months of presentation of the thesis, candidates should submit an outline for consideration by the chairman of the department. (5) Candidates seeking enrolment as "non-attending" students, i.e. Uni-versity of Melbourne medical graduates who, over a period of time have completed or are completing research and who wish to prepare a thesis or publish work to be used as a basis of being awarded the degree, are advised to consult with the chairman of a department of the faculty relevant to the discipline. The chairman will nominate an adviser to assist in the preparation of the thesis itself and in the presentation of a thesis outline which may be submitted to the chairman at any time but within six months of the anticipated date of thesis submission. Following submission, and subject to approval of the candidature, of the topic and its relevance to the theory or practice of medicine, the candi-date will then be admitted to examination and enrolment formalities completed. (6) The thesis for the degree of Doctor of Medicine will ordinarily represent the equivalent of not less than two years' full time research and must be considered to represent a substantial contribution to knowledge and be the outcome of original research by the candidate. (7) The thesis should contain a preface stating the extent to which the candidate is reporting work to which others have contributed. A candidate may not present in the thesis work for which a degree has been conferred in this or another university.

89

Faculty of Medicine

(8) The thesis must be typed, or reproduced in some equivalent manner, on international standard size paper A4 in double spacing and must include a title page showing the title of the thesis, degree for which it is submitted and the full name of the author. The thesis shall contain a table of contents and a bibliography including full title of each communication cited with standard international abbreviations for titles of journals. Such theses should not ordinarily exceed two hundred pages in length, excluding tables, illustrations and bibliography and pages should be consecutively numbered. There should be a binding margin of at least 35 mm uniform on all sheets. Three copies of the thesis, securely bound so as to stand on a shelf as a book, with its title and author lettered on the spine, should be submitted to the Registrar by delivery to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine).

(9) In judging whether the thesis shall make a substantial contribution to knowledge, the examiners, at their discretion, may require the candi-date to present for an oral or other examination on the subject of the thesis.

(10) A candidate enrolled for the degree of Doctor of Medicine may with the candidate's consent be considered for admission to the degree of Master of Medicine (refer Regulation 3.94) or the degree of Master of Surgery (cf. Regulation 3.37) if the thesis is judged by a board of examiners to be of a sufficiently high standard to warrant admission to that degree, although not appropriate for admission to the degree of Doctor of Medicine.

FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY THESIS

Any candidates proceeding to the degree by thesis shall submit three copies in the prescribed manner to the Assistant Registrar, Faculty of Medicine. The faculty will determine whether the subject matter is appropriate for the degree and, if so, will then appoint examiners.

At the discretion of the examiners, candidates may be required to undergo a written and/or viva voce examination.

The Faculty of Medicine has resolved that a thesis—

(i) should not be any ordinary compilation from books, (ii) nor be a mere compendium of cases,

(iii) nor merely observational, (iv) but should be a substantial contribution to knowledge and its rela-

tionship to existing knowledge should be critically reviewed. This review need not be governed by section (v) hereof, and

(v) should be in a fit form for publication or be already published in approved form.

A candidate who submits work which has been done in collaboration with other workers is required to submit a statement setting out the extent to which he/she was responsible for the initiation and prosecution of the work. The examiners shall take such steps as they think fit to assess the value of the candidate's share of the joint work and shall be satisfied that the individual candidate has been responsible for making a substan-tial contribution to the theory or practice of medicine.

90

Higher Degrees

DEGREE OF MASTER OF SURGERY

(Regulation 3.37)

(1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the Assistant Registrar (Medicine). Coursework for Part I under the revised prescriptions for the degree commencing 1982 will not be offered for the present,

(2) Before enrolling for the course leading to Part 1, candidates are required to present evidence that they hold a degree of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery, or a degree or degrees recognized by the Faculty as appropriate for the purpose of this regulation, of at least two years standing, and to gain approval of Faculty with respect to evidence of not less than two years experience as a medical officer in a hospital affiliated to the University of Melbourne or some other appropriate University for the purpose of teaching.

(3) Candidates seeking credit for Part I of the degree under Section 5 of the Regulation should submit evidence as to relevant qualifications and experience for consideration by Faculty at the time they apply for enrolment as a candidate for Part 1l of the degree.

(4) Candidates seeking admission to Part II of the degree are required to submit a proposed research programme setting out the topic, arrange-ments for supervision and a statement relating to facilities and resources, through the Chairman of the relevant department to the Higher Degrees Committee of the Faculty.

(5) Standing Committee on Higher Degrees of the Faculty shall approve, where appropriate, on behalf of Faculty, evidence submitted relating to the requirement of three years' experience relevant to the discipline of surgery. It will inform the candidate and the Faculty of the time at which the candidate will be eligible for admission to the degree of Master of Surgery.

(6) Candidates may apply for exemption from Part I of the examination for the degree if they have passed a comparable examination offered by one of the following bodies: Part I Fellowship of:

—Royal Australasian College of Surgeons —Royal College of Surgeons of England —Royal College of Surgeons of Edinburgh —Royal College of Surgeons in Ireland

Part I Examination in Surgery of: —Royal College of Physicians and Surgeons of Glasgow —College of Medicine of South Africa

Other examinations may be approved for this purpose from time to time, and further details may be obtained from the Assistant Registrar (Medicine). Other candidates in approved cases may be exempted from undertaking the course of study for the Part I examination and may be permitted to present for examination for the purpose of qualifying for admission to Part Il.

(7) Subject to the approval of the candidature, of the topic, enrolment and satisfactory execution of the programme of research as certified by

91

Faculty of Medicine

the Chairman of the department the candidate will be admitted to examination for the degree on presentation of a thesis.

(8) The thesis: (a) Is to be submitted by a full-time candidate not later than 15 months

after the date stated in the form of authority to enrol issued to the candidate, and by a part-time candidate not more than 2 years 3 months after that date. These restrictions may be varied by the Higher Degrees Committee of the Faculty under exceptional circumstances.

Shall be on a specific aspect of surgery, must embody original observations made by the candidate, and must include a critical review of the literature in the relevant field.

(c) Should contain a preface, stating the extent to which the candidate is reporting work to which others have contributed. A candidate may not present in the thesis work for which a degree has been con-ferred in this or another university.

The thesis must be typed, or reproduced in some equivalent manner, on international standard size paper A4 in double spacing, and must include a title page showing the title of the thesis, the degree for which it is submitted and the full name of the author. The thesis shall contain a table of contents and a bibliography including full title of each communication cited with standard international abbreviations for titles of journals. Such theses should not ordinarily exceed 200 pages in length, excluding tables, illus-trations and bibliography and pages should be consecutively numbered. There should be a binding margin of at least 35 mm uniform on all sheets. Three copies of the thesis, securely bound so as to stand on a shelf as a book, with its title and author lettered on the spine, should be submitted to the Registrar by delivery to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine).

(9) Nothwithstanding the above, a candidate who fulfils all the other requirements of Regulation 3.37 and has completed a period of not less than twelve months of appropriately supervised research undertaken full-time (or a period which is deemed by the Faculty to be its equivalent if undertaken part-time) may seek approval of such research experience and may submit for examination a thesis for the degree of Master of Surgery. The candidate may be a M.B. B.S. graduate of the University of Melbourne or a graduate with an equivalent degree from another approved institution with an association with this University approved by Faculty of not less than one year.

DEGREE OF MASTER OF GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS

(Regulation 3.38)

Note. (1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the Assistant Registrar, faculty of Medicine.

(2) Before entering for the examination ln Part I candidates are required to present a certificate of practice of two years spent in a resident ap. pointment.

( Ь )

(d)

92

Higher Degrees

(3) Before entering for the examination in Part II candidates are re-quired to present certificates of experience as specified below. Candidates admitted on the basis of qualifications obtained at other universities are required, in addition, to present certificates of two years' approved association with this University. (4) Before entering for examination by thesis candidates must comply with experience requirements specified for Parts I and I1 by examination.

(1) FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY EXAMINATION

PART 1

579-731 ANATOMY

The examination may Include questions relative to the anatomy of the female pelvis, mammary gland, abdomen, regions adjacent thereto and the new-born child.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; oral examination.

579-732 EMBRYOLOGY AND HISTOLOGY

The examination may include questions relative to the normal and ab-normal development (structure and function) of the embryo, foetus and new-born child, their component parts, the placenta and the extra-embryonic membranes. The histology of the female genito-urinary system, the mammary glands, the liver and the endocrine glands.


579-735 PHYSIOLOGY, BIOCHEMISTRY AND PHARMACOLOGY

Candidates will be required to know reasonably well the physiology of the alimentary, circulatory, muscular, nervous, respiratory and urinary systems, and to have a detailed knowledge of the physiology of genital and endocrine systems and of the foetus. Questions may include aspects which require a knowledge of both general and special pharmacology of the preceding matters. The examination may cover dietetics, digestion, general and intermediary metabolism and its regulation; the chemistry and metabolic effects of endocrine products. A detailed knowledge of these aspects in relation to the genital system and the foetus is expected. Candidates are expected to be familiar with the more important of the recent developments in Physiology, Biochemistry and Pharmacology and with their application to medicine.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour written papers; oral examination.

PART II

The experience required of a candidate before presenting for Part II shall be-

t. Practice of at least five years since graduation.

2. The special training required in Obstetrics shall consist of not less than one year's experience as Resident Medical Officer in the Ob-

93

Faculty of Medicine

stetrics Department of The Royal Women's Hospital, Melbourne, or its equivalent. In assessing equivalence, all hospitals or departments recognized as Obstetric Clinical Schools by Australian Universities shall have equivalent standing; in the case of public hospitals or departments not so recognized, the faculty of Medicine will re-quire from a candidate particular details of his experience, the acceptance of which will enable the candidate to proceed with the Degree.

3. The special training required in Gynaecology shall consist of not less than one year's experience as Resident Medical Officer in the Gynae-cology Department of one or other of the Clinical Schools of the University of Melbourne or its equivalent. In assessing equivalence, similar standing to that detailed in paragraph 2 (above) will be re-quired, mutatis mutandis.

579-733 PATHOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY

(In relation to Obstetrics and Gynaecology)

PATHOLOGY

The examination will include General Pathology and a special knowledge of the pathology of diseases peculiar to women. The practical examina-tion will test the candidates' ability to recognize and interpret specimens illustrating relevant morbid anatomy and histology. In addition to the standard textbooks, the pathology sections of stand-ard works should be studied. A knowledge of appropriate matter in cur-rent periodicals in the English language will be expected.

MICROBIOLOGY

The examination will require candidates to have a knowledge of:

(a) the general biological characters of bacteria and viruses; (b) a detailed knowledge of those organisms responsible for infections of

the genito-urinary system; (c) problems of infection including epidemiology and cross-infection in

hospitals: (d) ontogeny, organization and function of the immune system and its

role in disease; (e) principles of chemotherapy, sterilization and disinfection.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour practical test (Pathology only); viva voce examination.

579-734 OBSTETRICS, INCLUDING NEO-NATAL PAEDIATRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY

Candidates will be expected to have a thorough knowledge of both subjects, including a knowledge of recent advances in current literature in the English language.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper in Obstetrics; one 3-hour written paper in Gynaecology; clinical and viva voce examination in Ob-stetrics and in Gynaecology.

94

Higher Degrees

(2) FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY THESIS

NATURE OF THESIS

Any candidates proceeding to the degree by thesis shall give notice of the fact in writing and shall name the subject and title of the thesis and provide a short synopsis of the scope and character of the work under-taken. The faculty of Medicine will then determine whether or not the candidate may proceed by thesis. If the thesis is acceptable. the faculty of Medicine will then appoint examiners to consider the thesis and such examiners will be instructed to report upon the merit of the work sub-mitted and to give an indication as to what portions of Part I and/or Part Il of the examination shall be required of the candidate in addition to the thesis. It is appropriate for the examiners to recommend, if the thesis be of outstanding merit, that the candidate be exempt from the entire ex-amination.

The faculty of Medicine has resolved that a thesis—

(i) should not be any ordinary compilation from books, (ii) nor be a mere compendium of cases,

(iii) nor merely observational, (iv) but should be a substantial contribution to knowledge, (v) should be in fit form for publication or be already published in ap•

proved form and (vi) should show work at least equal to that involved in preparation for

the examination in Obstetrics and Gynaecology for the Degree of M.G.O. by written questions.

A candidate who submits work which has been done in collaboration with other workers is required to submit a statement setting out the extent to which he was responsible for the initiation and prosecution of the work. The examiners shall take such steps as they think fit to assess the value of the candidate's share of the joint work, and shall be satisfied that the individual candidate has been responsible for making a substantial contribution to the theory or practice or both of Gynaecology and Ob-stetrics or Gynaecology or Obstetrics.

The examination in Clinical Obstetrics and Gynaecology for candidates proceeding by thesis may involve the examination of the candidate in any matter concerned with the practice of Clinical Obstetrics and Gynaeco-lо gУ .

DEGREE OF MASTER OF MEDICINE

(Regulation 3.94)

Note (1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the Assistant Registrar (Medicine).

(2) Before enrolling for any course leading to Part I, candidates are required to present evidence that they hold a degree of bachelor of medicine and bachelor of surgery, or equivalent degree, of at least two years standing and to gain approval of Faculty with respect to evidence of not less than two years' experience as a medical officer in a hospital affiliated to an appropriate university for the purposes of teaching.

95

Faculty of Medicine

Subjects in which courses for Part I will be offered in 1983 are:

General Medicine Haematology Radiology Including Other Medical Imaging Modalities

(3) Candidates seeking credit for Part I of the degree under Section 5 of the Regulation should submit evidence as to relevant qualifications and experience for consideration by faculty at the time they apply for enrolment as a candidate for Part II of the degree.

(4) Candidates seeking admission to Part II of the degree either by coursework or research are required to consult with the chairman of a department relevant to the discipline and to submit to the faculty, through the department concerned, a proposal for approval by the Standing Committee on Higher Degrees of the faculty. Subjects in which courses for Part II will be offered are:

General Medicine

Medical Oncology Audiology and Otoneurology

Nephrology

Cardiology

Ophthalmology Clinical Genetics

Paediatrics Clinical Pharmacology

Primary Medical Care

Endocrinology

Radiology Including Other Epidemiology

Medical Imaging Gastroenterology

Modalities Geriatric Medicine

Rheumatology Haematology

(5) The Standing Committee on Higher Degrees of the faculty shall approve, where appropriate, on behalf of faculty, evidence submitted relating to the requ'rement of three years' experience relevant to the discipline to which the Part II of the examination of the candidate pertains. It will inform the candidate and the faculty of the time at which the candidate will be eligible for admission to the degree of Master of Medicine.

(6) Candidates may apply for exemption from Part I of the examination for the degree if they have passed a comparable examination offered in a relevant discipline by one of the following bodies:

Royal Australasian College of Physicians (Part I, FRACP) A Royal College of Physicians of the United Kingdom (MRCP) University of Singapore (Master of Medicine) Royal Australasian College of Surgeons (Part I, FRACS) Royal Australian College of General Practitioners (FRACGP) —

for Part II Primary Medical Care . Royal Australasian College of Radiologists (Part I, FRACP — for

Part II Radiology Royal Australasian College of Surgeons (Faculty of Anaesthetics)

(Part I, FFARCAS) — for Part Il Anaesthetics by research Royal College of Pathologists of Australia (Part I, FRCPA) — for

Part II Haematology Royal College of Pathologists (UK) (MRC Path) — for Part 11

Haematology Royal Australian College of Ophthalmologists (Part I, FRACO) —

for Part Il Ophthalmology Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists (Section

A, MRANZCP) — for Part II Psychiatry by research

96

Higher Degrees

(7) Courses for Part it or admission to candidature by research are open to those candidates who qualify for exemptions from the Part I examinations as in (6) above. Other examinations may be approved for this purpose from time to time, and further details may be obtained from the Assistant Registrar (Medicine).

(8) Courses for Part II may be taken either part-time or full-time. Part-time candidature may extend over two or three years concurrently with appointments in hospitals affiliated with the University of Melbourne for the purposes of teaching and research. Instruction will involve a minimum of three contact hours per week of lectures, seminars or tutorials in which candidates will present their work, this will be accompanied by supervised clinical training in relevant discipline.

(9) Examination will consist of assessment of the report on the minor research project, together with a written examination of three hours and a clinical or oral examination. Apportionment of marks to these segments of the examination will be set by faculty at the time candi-dature is approved and will depend on the discipline and the nature of the course proposed. It will be required that candidates undertaking the course part-time over two or three years be offered not less than two tutorials or seminars per week throughout the academic year and to submit a report on their project not later than 21 years after the date on the Authority to Enrol.

PART I BY COURSE WORK

The following course work programmes have been approved for 1983:

PART I GENERAL MEDICINE Courses will be offered for part-time candidates over two or three years and for full-time candidates over one academic year. These will include tutorials and seminars and supervised clinical practice covering the full range of internal medicine.

SYLLABUS includes a review of physiology, pathology, pharmacology, microbiology and immunology relevant to each of the organ systems studied. Candidates will be required to gain a broad knowledge of clinical manifestations of disease together with experience of clinical pharmacology and therapeutics applicable to internal medicine.

ASSESSMENT One written paper of three hours and a clinical examina-tion. Candidates with at least two years experience within one specialty of internal medicine may elect to have a major component of this assessment directed to that specialty.

PART I HAEMATOLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical and laboratory practice relevant to the discipline of Haematology. Course work will include presentation and discussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from laboratory experience.

SYLLABUS Candidates will be required to be familiar with laboratory diagnostic methods in Haematology including bone marrow aspiration, special staining procedures and their interpretation, standard serological

97 o

Faculty of Medicine

methods, relevant haematological assay methods such as 812 and folate in blood together with their associated carrier proteins, laboratory tests for haemolysis, the assessment of coagulation disorders and platelet function. Candidates will be expected to develop skills in morphological diagnosis covering the full range of disorders affecting the formed elements of the blood.

ASSESSMENT One written examination of two hours and by a practical laboratory examination of two hours.

PART I RADIOLOGY, INCLUDING OTHER MEDICAL IMAGING MODALITIES

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars in Anatomy and Physics and to participate in clinical practice under designated supervisors. SYLLABUS Anatomy will include all aspects of gross Anatomy but with particular reference to those structures demonstrable by medical imaging techniques. A knowledge of the physiological principles will be required for organ systems whose function may be studied by medical imaging methods. Particular emphasis will be placed on correlating gross Anatomy and function, with radiographs and images obtained using ultrasound, isotopes and computerised tomography. Sectional Anatomy will be a major component of these studies. Surface Anatomy and the anatomical basis for patient positioning in medical imaging will be studied. A knowledge of organ development will be required as a basis for the understanding of anatomical variants. Physics will include the study of principles relevant to medical imaging using x-rays, ultrasound, isotopes, and nuclear magnetic resonance. Knowledge will be required concerning the nature of the various radia-tions and their biological and genetic effects, together with the principles governing their production, absorption in the body and the manner in which the medical images are produced. A knowledge of the principles only will be required of instrumentation for the production of the various forms of radiation and the recording of images.

ASSESSMENT Two 3-hour written papers and an oral examination.

PART Il BY RESEARCH

(1) A proposal setting out a topic, arrangements for supervision and a statement relating to facilities and resources should be submitted through the chairman of the relevant department to the Higher Degree Committee of faculty. Subject to approval of the candidature for Part II, of the topic, enrolment and satisfactory execution of the programme of research, as certified by the chairman of department, the candidate will be admitted to examination for Part Il of the degree on presentation of a thesis. The thesis shall be on a specific aspect of medicine which must embody observations made by the candidate and which must include a critical review of the literature in the relevant field.

(2) A thesis is to be submitted by a full-time candidate normally not later than fifteen months after the date stated on the form of Authority to Enrol issued to the candidatе , and by a part-time candidate normally not more than two years and three months from that date. These restrictions may be varied by the Higher Degrees Committee of the faculty under exceptional circumstances.

98

Higher Degrees

(3) The thesis should contain a preface stating the extent to which the candidate is reporting work to which others have contributed. A candidate may not present in the thesis work for which a degree has been conferred in this or another university.

(4) The thesis must be typed, or reproduced in some equivalent manner, on international standard size paper A4 in double spacing and must include a title page showing the title of the thesis, degree for which it is submitted and the full name of the author. The thesis shall contain a table of contents and a bibliography including full title of

each communication cited with standard international abbreviations for titles of journals. Such theses should not ordinarily exceed two hundred pages in length, excluding tables, illustrations and bibliography, and pages should be consecutively numbered. There should be a binding margin of at least 35mm. uniform on all sheets. Three copies of the thesis, securely bound so as to stand on a shelf as a book, with its title and author lettered on the spine, should be submitted to the Registrar by delivery to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine).

PART Il BY COURSE WORK

The following course work programmes have been approved for 1983:

PART II GENERAL MEDICINE

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a designated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and dis-cussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical observation. The content of the course will include broad revision of the physiology and pathology of all the systems of the body. Candidates will be required to gain familiarity, through both the tutorial and seminar programmes and in supervised clinical experience, with current know-ledge and practice in the field of internal medicine with particular reference to the cardiovascular system, respiratory system, gastro-intestinal system, genito-urinary system, endocrine system including diabetes and of the common disorders affecting the nervous system, haemopoietic system, immune and locomotive systems. Candidates will be required to elect one area for study in greater depth, subject to approval by the faculty. The area of special study will represent more than half of the course to be undertaken by the candidate and will be undertaken with a designated supervisor who may differ from the supervisor for the general clinical studies. They will also be required to undertake a minor research project within this field. The report on this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of content and presentation. Assessment for the Part Il examination in this subject will take account of the field of special study noted above.

PART I1 AUDIOLOGY AND OTONEUROLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a desig-

99

Faculty of Medicine

fated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and discussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical and laboratory observations.

Candidates will be required to attend lectures and laboratory classes in acoustics, biophysics, special anatomy, physiology and pathology. Course and clinical work will include training in general audiology, educational audiology and rehabilitation, geriatric audiology, paediatric audiology, hearing aids, speech and language, general otolaryngology, otology, special neurology.

Candidates may elect one of these areas for study in greater depth, subject to approval by the Faculty.

Candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project. The report on this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of content and presentation.

PART II CARDIOLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a designated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and dis-cussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical and laboratory observation.

The course will cover cardiovascular physiology, pathophysiology, pathology, biochemistry and electrophysiology relevant to the function of the heart and peripheral vasculature.

Candidates will be required to become familiar with diagnostic tech-niques of relevance to cardiology both from supervised clinical training and through the tutorial and seminar programme. This will include electrocardiographý, cardiac catheterization and angiography, cardiac radiology and radioactive isotopic methods of cardiac imaging (including radiation safety), phonocardiography, echocardiography and other non-invasive methods.

Aspects of clinical cardiology which will be required to be covered will include congenital and acquired heart disease, both acute and chronic, the role of management of a coronary care unit, the management of arrhythmias and the use of pacemakers and the role of cardiac surgery including pre- and post-operative management and the problems associated with cardiac bypass procedures.

With approval from the faculty, candidates will be permitted to study in greater depth in selected areas within the above syllabus, providing they have a sufficient familiarity with the broad range of the discipline as set out.

The candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project in one of the above areas during the course of their candidature. Report of this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of the content and presentation.

PART II CLINICAL GENETICS

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials, seminars and lectures and to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a

100

Higher Degrees

designated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and dis-cussion of material derived from designated reading and will include lectures and seminars in the Department of Paediatrics or related depart-ments or Institutes. The course will cover fundamental knowledge of cytogenetics, the biochemistry of gene function, population genetics and statistics, and the clinical application of this knowledge. Candidates will be required to become familiar with diagnostic techniques, both clinical and laboratory based, and with skills required for genetic counselling. They may elect to study one aspect of clinical genetics in greater depth. Candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project within the field, under guidance of an appropriate supervisor, who may be other

than the supervisor designated for the overall training. The report on this project should lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard of content and presentation.

PART II CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars aid to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a desig-nated supervisor. Course work will Include presentation and discussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical and laboratory observations. Candidates will be required to become familiar with drug assay tech-niques, design of clinical trials, pharmacokinetics, evaluation of new and established therapeutic regimes both from supervised clinical training and through the tutorial and seminar programme. Course and laboratory work will include training in gas-liqu'd chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, drug immunoassay and other drug assay methodology, pharmacokinetics, adverse reactions and interactions, sources of information in clinical pharmacology and therapeutics and specific drug groups as they apply to medical and other clinical speciali-ties including cardiology, nephrology, geriatrics, paediatrics, obstetrics, rheumatology, gastroenterology, psychiatry, endocrinology. Candidates may elect one of these areas for study in greater depth, subject to approval by the faculty. Candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project. The report on this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of content and presentation.

PART ii ENDOCRINOLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical and laboratory practice relevant to the discipline under a designated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and discussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical and laboratory observation. Candidates will be required to gain a broad knowledge of the structure and function of the endocrine system and the physiology and bio-chemistry of both peptide afd steroid hormones including their action and interaction on target organs. Both in the tutorial and seminar programme and in supervised clinical experience, the candidates will be required to gain familiarity with both

101

Faculty of Medicine

clinical and laboratory methods of assessment of endocrine status and the diagnosis of endocrine disorders. Studies of the management of endocrine disorders will primarily take place in the context of supervised clinical training and should cover the broad range of endocrine disorders including diabetes. With approval from the faculty, candidates will be permitted to study in greater depth in selected areas within the above syllabus, providing they have a sufficient familiarity with the broad range of the discipline as set out. The candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project in one of the above areas during the course of their candidature. Report of this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of the content and presentation.

PART II EPIDEMIOLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in practical work relevant to the discipline under a desig-nated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and discussion of material derived from designated reading and crit'cal analysis of selected texts and research papers. The candidate will be required to become conversant with principles of epidemiological inference, aspects of statistics and computation relevant to the subject, standard epidemiological designs and practical considera-tions relating to them. Candidates will be required to complete a basic Fortran course such as that of the University Computer Centre. They will be required to undertake supervised training in the use of the University of Melbourne computers and of the SPSS and GLIM packages. With the approval of faculty, candidates will be permitted to study in greater depth in selected areas within the above syllabus, providing they have sufficient familiarity with the broad range of the discipline as set out. Candidates will be required to undertake a research project in an aspect of epidemiology during the course of their candidature. The report of this project should lead either to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of the content and presentation.

PART 11 GASTROENTEROLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a desig-nated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and discussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical and laboratory observation. The syllabus will include study of the normal function and structure of the gastrointestinal tract. In this respect, candidates may concentrate primarily on one particular aspect but will be required to have a general knowledge pertaining to the whole field of gastroenterology. Function of the gastro-intestinal tract will be interpreted broadly including metabolic interrelationships with other organ systems. Experience in diagnostic methods will be provided through supervised clinical training and this will also be the subject of tutorial and seminar

102

Higher Degrees

teaching. Familiarity will be required with techniques of endoscopy, radiology, biopsy and their interpretation in disease.

Study of mechanisms of disease will include related disciplines such as immunology, virology and metabolism and will be dealt with primarily in the approved reading programme and tutorials and seminars. Experience in the management of gastrointestinal disease will be gained in supervised clinical e х pег 'ence and will also be the subject of seminars. The candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project in one of the above areas during the course of their candidature. Report of this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of the content and presentation. The written and clinical examination in this subject will take note of an area of major interest being either in diseases of the liver or in the general field of gastroenterology.

PART I1 GERIATRIC MEDICINE

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a designated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and dis-cussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical observations.

The syllabus will include a study of the biology of ageing together with physiological, psychological and social manifestations of the ageing process. It will also include the study of epidemiological methods and demographic patterns relevant to the problems of ageing in the community. In tutorial and seminar programmes, candidates will be required to gain familiarity with the sociological aspects of care of the elderly, including the assessment and management of social stress in relationship to disease, family dynamics, work and retirement, grief reactions, effects of isolation and the social support systems relevant to the care of the elderly. They will also be required to study the problems of health service organization, funding and development as these relate to the problems of health care in the elderly.

In supervised clinical practice and through the seminar programme, candidates will be required to become experienced with the problems of multiple illness, multi-factorial causation of disability in the elderly. general clinical diagnostic procedures, pharmacology and therapeutics as related to the elderly, the management of social and psychological problems in the elderly and in the development of strategies of preventive geriatric care.

Candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project. The report on the project should lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of content and presentation.

PART 11 HAEMATOLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical and laboratory practice relevant to the discipline under a designated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and discussion of material derived both from designated reading lists afd from clinical and laboratory observation.

103

Faculty of Medicine

The candidate will be required to become fully conversant with the functional anatomy, microscopic and ultrastructural appearances of haemopoietic and reticuloendothelial tissues, with the physiology of haemopoiesis, normal haemopoietic cell turnover, life-span and destruc-tion and of the methods available for the analysis of haemopoiesis, the physiology and biochemistry of the formed elements of the blood and methods of study of the immune system of the body. The candidate will be required to undertake supervised training in haematological morphologic diagnosis including bone marrow and peripheral blood and will be required to be familiar with laboratory methods employed in haematological diagnosis including problems of quality control. These methods would include assessment of haemo-lytic anaemia, laboratory methods relevant to blood transfusion and immune-haematology, coagulation disorders and other haemorrhagic diatheses, dyshaemopoietic anaemias, leukaemias and related diseases. With approval from the faculty, candidates will be permitted to study in greater depth in selected areas within the above syllabus, providing they have a, sufficient familiarity with the broad range of the discipline as set out. The candidates will be required to undertake a research project in one of the above areas during the course of their candidature. The report of this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of the content and presentation.

PART II MEDICAL ONCOLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a designated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and dis-cussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical and laboratory observation. The content of the course will cover the biology of neoplastic disease. This will include the cell biology and general pathology of cancer together with pathology, natural history and epidemiology of the common human cancers. The study of methods of diagnosis will be incorporated both in the tutorial and seminar programmes and in supervised clinical experience and will include study of cytological, immunolog'cal and radiological and other organ imaging methods employed in the diagnosis of cancer. The management of cancer will, likewise, be the subject both of tutorial and seminar teaching and supervised clinical training and will include the pharmacology, pharmacokinetics, use and side-effects of anti-neoplastic drugs, radiation biology and the use of radiation therapy, management of psychological and social aspects, terminal care of patients with cancer and familiarity with the role of surgery in the management of patients with neoplastic disease. The course will also require familiarity with methods of evaluation of cancer therapy including the planning, use and evaluation of protocols for the treatment of cancer. The candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project in one of the above areas during the course of their candidature. The report of this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of the content and presentation.

104

Higher Degrees

PART II NEPHROLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a designated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and discussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical and laboratory observation. The syllabus includes a study of the normal structure and function of the kidney. Candidates will be required to be familiar with both gross and microscopic anatomy including the ultrastructure of the kidney. Topics in renal physiology will include body fluids, solute transport, renal circulation, glomerular filtration, handling of sodium and potassium, calcium, phosphate, magnesium, urate, acid-base balance, concentration and dilution. Disorders of function will be analysed including oedema formation, disturbances of water metabolism, disturbed acid base balance, the action of diuretics and other general metabolic abnormalities consequent on renal disorders. The study of renal disease will Include its pathogenesis, pathophysiology and management. Specific areas of study include the following; acute renal failure, glomerular disease, renal infections, tubular and interstitial disease, vascular disease, genetic and metabolic diseases, diabetic glomerulosclerosis, obstruction, renal calculi, drugs and the kidney, chronic renal failure, hypertension and the kidney, haematological conse-quences of renal failure, renal osteodystrophies, dialysis and trans-plantation. With approval from the Faculty, candidates will be permitted to study in greater depth in selected areas within the above syllabus, providing they have a sufficient familiarity with the broad range of the discipline as set out. Candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project in one of the above areas during the course of their candidature. The report of this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of the content and presentation.

PART 1i OPHTHALMOLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend and participate in seminars, clinical presentations and clinical pathology presentations, and will also be required to participate in clinical practice under a designated supervisor in an affiliated institution approved for the purpose by the Faculty. The content of the course will include detailed Instruction and practical experience of visual assessment procedures, including ultrasound, fluorescein angiography, retinometry, electrodiagnostic tests, colour vision screening, dark adaptation and eye movement recording. In addition, with the approval of faculty, the candidate will be permitted to study in greater depth in special areas of ophthalmology which may include ocular pathology, epidemiology. ocular pharmacology and thera-peutics, ocular tumours and oncology, vascular disorders of the eye other than diabetic vascular disease, diabetes and the eye, uveitis and appropriate immunological and microbiological methods of investigation, neuro-ophthalmology, paediatric ophthalmology, glaucoma, strabismus, cataract.

105

Faculty of Medicine

Candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project in one of the above areas. The report of this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard of content and presentation.

PART Il PAEDIATRICS

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a designated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and discussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical observation.

The content of the course will include the physiology and pathology of the developing and growing human being with emphasis upon physical. Intellectual and emotional development. Candidates will be expected to gain familiarity, through tutorials, seminars and clinical experience, with current knowledge and practice in the field of paediatrics including the special problems encountered in diseases of the various body systems and those related to birth defects, genetics disorders, behavioural and emotional disturbances and chronic handicapping conditions.

Candidates may elect one area for study in greater depth, with the approval of Faculty, under supervision of a designated supervisor who may differ from the supervisor for the general clinical studies. They will be required to undertake a minor research project within this field. The report on this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard of content and presentation.

PART II PRIMARY MEDICAL CARE

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical practice relevant to the discipline under a desig-nated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and discussion of material derived from both specific reading lists and clinical observation.

The content of the course will include a planned programme of clinical practice directed to the further development of relevant knowledge and clinical skills. Candidates will be required through the tutorial or seminar programmes to extend their knowledge of the principles of medical practice as they apply in primary medical care and to gain knowledge and experience in the techniques for epidemiological and clinical research and in analysis of the distribution of health resources and the effectiveness of health care delivery. The course will also pro-vide education in teaching methods, with particular reference to one to one and small group teaching as they relate to both medical and health education.

With the approval of Faculty candidates will be permitted to study In depth in selected areas, provided they have sufficient familiarity with the broad range of topics set out.

Candidates will be required to undertake a research project based on clinical practice during the course of their candidature. The report of this project should lead either to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of content and preparation.

106

Higher Degrees

PART 11 RADIOLOGY, INCLUDING OTHER MEDICAL IMAGING MODALITIES

Candidates will be required to participate in clinical practice under a designated supervisor in the field of medical imaging employing x-rays, ultrasound and isotopes. In addition, candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars devoted to medical imaging and pathology.

SYLLABUS Radiodiagnosis and Medical Imaging includes the study of the principles underlying the use of the various modalities to demonstrate various parts of the body according to particular clinical circumstances. A knowledge of various contrast media, their pharmacology, and side effects will be required. A knowledge of the clinical indications for performing specialised procedures will be required together with an understanding of the possible hazards which might result and the prin-ciples underlying the management of such complications. Candidates will be expected to have a thorough knowledge of the principles govern-ing protection of patients and personnel.

Pathology will include a study of general and regional morbid anatomy and histology with special reference to structural and functional varia-tions which may be demonstrated by imaging methods.

Candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project in one of the above areas during the course of their candidature. The report of this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach a comparable standard in terms of content and presentation.

PART I1 RHEUMATOLOGY

Candidates will be required to attend tutorials and seminars and to participate in clinical and laboratory practice relevant to the discipline under a designated supervisor. Course work will include presentation and discussion of material derived both from designated reading lists and from clinical and laboratory observation.

Candidates will be required to gain a broad knowledge of the structure and function of the musculoskeletal system and the pathophysiology, biochemistry and immunology of connective tissue and other structures relevant to rheumatic and connective tissue diseases.

Both in the tutorial and seminar programme and in supervised clinical experience the candidates will be required to gain familiarity with clinical, laboratory and radiological methods of assessment of rheumatic and connective tissue diseases.

Studies of the management of rheumatic diseases will primarily take place in the context of supervised clinical training and should cover the broad range of rheumatic and connective tissue diseases including disabilities related to the spine. Competence in specific diagnostic and therapeutic procedures appropriate to rheumatology, would include the interpretation of skeletal and soft tissue radiographs; techniques of joint aspiration and synovial fluid examination; familiarity with patho-logical interpretation of synovial tissue changes; physical methods used in the treatment of patients with musculoskeletal disorders; awareness of operative and post-operative techniques in surgery of the rheumatic diseases; clinical pharmacology in relation to therapy in the rheumatic diseases.

107

Faculty of Medicine

With approval from the faculty, candidates will be permitted to study in greater depth in selected areas within the above syllabus, providing they have a sufficient familiarity with the broad range of the discipline as set out.

The candidates will be required to undertake a minor research project in one of the above areas during the course of their candidature. Report of this project should either lead to a publication in a refereed journal or reach comparable standard in terms of the content and presentation.

108

CHAPTER 10

POSTGRADUATE MEDICAL DIPLOMAS

SUBJECT NUMBERS

DIPLOMA IN OPHTHALMOLOGY-

516-801 Part 1—Anatomy 536-801 Physiology and Pharmacology 576-801 Part 2—Ophthalmology 531-801 Pathology (including Microbiology)

DIPLOMA IN LARYNGOLOGY AND OTOLOGY-

516-811 Part 1—Anatomy 536-811 Physiology 577-811 Part 2—Otolaryngology

Pathology (including Microbiology)

DIPLOMA IN DIAGNOSTIC RADIOLOGY-

516-821 Year 1—Anatomy 555-820 Radiodiagnosis 555-821 Physics 555-822 Year 2—Radiodiagnosis 531-821 Pathology 555-823 Year 3—Radiodiagnosis

DIPLOMA IN PSYCHOLOGICAL MEDICINE-

554-844 DPM Part 1, Course Year 1 516-841 Neuroanatomy 534-841 Pharmacology 536-841 Neurophysiology 554-841 Medical Psychology

554-845 DPM Part 2, Course Year 2 554-842 Psychiatry (DPM 2) Comprising: 554-004 General Psychiatry 554-009 Developmental Psychiatry

554-846 DPM Part 2, Course Year 3 554-843 Psychiatry (DPM 3) Comprising: 554-005 Advanced Psychotherapy 554-006 General Medicine 554-007 Neurology and Neuropathology 554-008 Child Psychiatry 554-013 Years 4/5 Dissertation

109

Faculty of Medicine

DIPLOMA IN AUDIOLOGY-

577-861 Acoustics 577-865 Anatomy and Physiology 431-861 Biophysics 577-866 Psychology 577-862 Audiology 577-864 Otolaryngology

UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS IN DIPLOMA COURSES

In accordance with Regulation 2.5, a committee may be appointed to give consideration to the further progress of candidates who fail or are absent from examinations. Those who fail (or are absent) in the first attempt at the examination will normally be granted permission to repeat on ONE occasion. In the absence of persuasive extenuating circumstances, those who fail at the second attempt will be recommended for suspension from the course.

DIPLOMA IN PUBLIC HEALTH (Regulation 3.39)

The course and examination for this Diploma are suspended.

DIPLOMA IN OPHTHALMOLOGY (Regulation 3.40)

Note. (1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the Assistant Registrar, faculty of Medicine. The future of this course is under review. Interested persons should consult the Assistant Registrar.

(2) Before presenting for the Part I examination, candidates shall present evidence that they have spent a two-year period of training in a general hospital or its equivalent, after the first post-graduate intern year. The nature of this training must be certified, and approved by the chairman of the department of Ophthalmology. (3) Before entering for the examination in Part Il candidates are required to present certificates of experience as specified below. Candidates ad-mitted on the basis of qualifications obtained at other universities are required, in addition, to present certificates of three months' approved experience in the Clinical Schools of this University.

PART I

516-801 ANATOMY

The examination may include questions relating to the anatomy of the orbit and its contents, the anatomy of those regions adjacent to the orbit, those parts of the central nervous system concerned with visual functions afd the relevant histology and embryology.


110

Diplomas

536-801 PHYSIOLOGY AND PHARMACOLOGY (i) Cellular and systemic physiology, with special emphasis on sys-tems of importance to the ophthalmologist, e.g. cardiovascular, nervous and endocrine systems.

(ii) Physiology of the visual system and of the associated orbital struc-tures. This is to Include: basic ideas concerning visual perception, visual sensitivity, brightness discrimination, adaptation, colour vision, the per-ception of space, form and movement, stereopsis; retinal function, Includ-ing elementary photochemistry and neural organization; central mecha-nisms of vision, including the structure and function of the lateral geni-culate body and visual cortex, neural coding of light intensity, colour, movement and depth in field of vision; visual functions of prestriate, inferotemporal and frontal cortex; subcortical neural mechanisms of vision—the retinotectal system. The generation and maintenance of the optical image on the retina; accommodation, and pupillary control. Extra-ocular muscle function in relation to Image formation, conjugate eye movements and binocular vision. The physiology of intraocular fluids, of the cornea and lens. Lacrimal secretion.

(iii) Physical optics. Geometrical optics, including thick lenses, spectacle lenses, prisms, optics of contact lenses and of devices for the correction of subnormal visual acuity. Optical principles of instruments used in ophthalmology. Illumination.

Physiological optics, including the following: Optical system of the eye-Anomalies of the optical system of the eye including ametropia, accom-modative anomalies and anisometropia. Binocular vision and its anoma-lies, both motor and sensory.

Principles of clinical refraction. Measurement of visual acuity. Investi-gation and treatment of the optical and motor anomalies of the eyes, together with the anomalies of binocular perception.

(iv) Pharmacology. The mechanisms of action of drugs used for the in-vestigation and treatment of ocular disease, particularly mydriatrics and cycloplegics, miotics, local anaesthetics, antiglaucoma agents, drugs for treating infections and diagnostic agents. The general principles of drug absorption and the special preparations of drugs for ophthalmic use. The ocular and general side-effects of drugs.

COURSES Information on courses which will be conducted during the year can be obtained from the Department of Ophthalmology.

EXAMINATIONS Two three-hour written examinations. Half of the first paper will deal with physiology and the remainder with pharmacology. Half of the second paper will also deal with physiology, and the remainder with optics. Some candidates may also have an oral examination.

PART II

Before presenting for the Part Il examination, candidates shall satisfy the Faculty of Medicine that,

(a) they have been in practice for at least six years (b) subsequent to graduation they have had special training in a hos-

pital or hospitals (including the appropriate special clinics of a

111

Faculty of Medicine

general hospital) concerned with the appropriate special?'; as follows:

1. A period of three years general hospital experience of inpatient Medicine and Surgery.

2. Not less than three years' experience as Resident Medical Officer in the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital, Melbourne, or its equivalent. In assessing equivalence, all hospitals or departments recognized as Ophthalmic Clinical Schools by Australasian Universities shall have equivalent standing. I^ the case of public hospitals or departments not so recognized the Faculty of Medicine will require from a candidate particular details of his experience, the acceptance of which will enable the candidate to proceed with the Diploma. The candidate must also present evidence of having had experience of ophthal-mology in relation to internal medicine.

3. Evidence of having performed under the supervision of one or more consultants in ophthalmology all the common procedures in the specialty. These procedures shall include the diagnostic and treatment techniques, including the conduct of pre-opera-tive, operative, and post-operative procedures.

576-801 OPHTHALMOLOGY

The examination may include questions relevant to any aspects of the medicine and surgery of abnormal conditions affecting the visual ap-paratus and adnexae.

BOOKS The conjoint library of the Australian College of Ophthalmologists ( А .М .А .) and the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital contains an extensive literature relating to ophthalmology.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, one in each of Ophthalmic Medicine and Ophthalmic Surgery. These papers will include questions designed to test the candidate's knowledge of the general medical and general surgical aspects of the conditions related to the specialty. Clinical ex-amination, including estimation of errors of refraction and of visual field defects, one or other being compulsory.

531-801 PATHOLOGY (INCLUDING MICROBIOLOGY)

PATHOLOGY

The examination in Pathology will test the candidate's knowledge of the general pathological processes and of the special pathology of conditions affecting the apparatus of vision, adnexae and adjacent structures. It will include the recognition and interpretation of specimens illustrating rele-vant morbid anatomy and histology. It is recommended that, in addition to standard textbooks of Pathology. the pathological sections of standard works on the specialty be studied. A knowledge of relevant pathological topics appearing in current medical periodicals in the English language will be expected.

MICROBIOLOGY


(a) the general biological characters of micro-organisms;

112

Diplomas

(b) a detailed knowledge of those organisms responsible for infections of the eye;

(c) epidemiology, including cross-infection in hospitals;

(d) the principles of chemotherapy, sterilization and disinfection;

(e) organization and function of the immune system and its role in disease.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour practical test; oral examination.

DIPLOMA IN LARYNGOLOGY AND OTOLOGY (Regulation 3.40)


(2) Before presenting for the Part 1 examination, candidates shall present evidence that they have spent a two-year period of training in a general hospital or its equivalent, after the first post-graduate intern year. The nature of this training must be certified and approved by the chairman of the department of Otolaryngology.

(3) Before entering for the examination in Part Il candidates are required to present certificates of experience as specified below. These require-ments are presently under review and enquiries should be made to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine). Candidates admitted on the basis of qualifications obtained at other universities are required, in addition, to present certificates of three months' approved experience in the Clinical Schools of this University.

PART 1

516-811 ANATOMY

The examination may include questions relating to the anatomy of the head, neck and thorax, with special reference to the ear, nose, throat. pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchi and bronchial tree, and oesophagus, to-gether with the histology and development of these parts. Candidates will also be expected to be familiar with those parts of the central nervous system associated with the functions of the parts outlined above,


536-811 PHYSIOLOGY

Systemic physiology: Cardiovascular respiratory, gastrointestinal and endocrine systems. Detailed study of the nervous system. Physiological functions of particular importance in the field of otolaryngology will be emphasized.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written examination. Candidates may also be called for an oral examination.

113

Faculty of Medicine

PART f1

Before presenting for the Part If examination, candidates shall satisfy the faculty of Medicine that,

they have been in practice for at least seven years

subsequent to graduation candidate has had special training in a hospital or hospitals (including the appropriate special clinics of a general hospital) concerned with the appropriate specialty as follows:

1. a period of two years' general hospital experience of inpatient Medicine and Surgery, and one year in Surgery, the nature of which must be approved by the chairman of the department of Otolaryngology.

2. the special training required in Otolaryngology shall consist of not less than four years' experience as Resident Medical Offi-cer in the ENT Department of the Royal Victorian Eye & Ear Hospital, Melbourne or its equivalent. In assessing equivalence, all hospitals or departments recognized as ENT Clinical Schools by Australasian Universities shall have equivalent standing. In the case of public hospitals or departments not so recognized, the Faculty of Medicine will require from a candidato particular details of his/her experience, the acceptance of which will enable the candidate to proceed with the Diploma.

3. documentary evidence of having performed under the super-vision of one or more consultants in Otolaryngology all the common procedures of the specialty, and obtained a satisfactory level of competence. These procedures shall include the diag-nostic and treatment techniques, including the conduct of pre-operative, operative, and post-operative procedures.

577-811 OTOLARYNGOLOGY

This subject consists of two sections, (a) Otolaryngology and (b) Pathology including Microbiology.

OTOLARYNGOLOGY

A detailed knowledge is required of otology, rhinology and laryngology. This will include:

Otology

A thorough understanding of the applied anatomy and physiology of the temporal bone, the aetiology, pathology, diagnosis, treatment and preven-tion of diseases of the ear, the x-ray diagnosis of diseases of the tem-poral bone, the techniques of routine and advanced otological surgery, the diagnosis and management of deafness (including children), and vestibulometry:

A sound knowledge is required of the underlying principles and clinical practice of audiology. This will include: pure tone a'r and bone audi-ometry, speech audiometry, tests of central nervous dysfunction, the free field testing of children, electrocochleography and evoked response audiometry.

(a)

(b)

114

Diplomas

Rhinology

A thorough understanding of the applied anatomy and physiology of the nose and paranasal sinus, the aetiology, pathology, diagnosis, treatment and prevention of diseases of the nose and paranasal sinuses, the x-ray diagnosis of diseases of the nose and paranasal sinuses, the techniques of routine and advanced rhinological surgery (including rhinoplasty and hypophysectomy) and allergy.

Laryngology

A thorough understanding of the applied anatomy and physiology of the larynx, pharynx, oral cavity and neck, the x-ray diagnosis of diseases of the larynx, pharynx, head and neck, the techniques of routine and advanced laryngological head and neck surgery, and speech pathology; A sound knowledge is required of the general principles of medicine and surgery. This will include: surgery of the head and neck, neuro-surgery, thoracic surgery, plastic surgery, radiotherapy, chemotherapy, neurology, haematology, cardiology, thoracic medicine and pharma-cology,

EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers. Clinical examination, viva vacs examination.

PATHOLOGY INCLUDING MICROBIOLOGY

Patholoav

The examination will include General Pathology, and will require a special. knowledge of pathological conditions affecting the ear and adjacent structures, nose, throat, pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchi, lungs and oeso-phagus. The practical examination will test the candidates' ability to recognize and interpret specimens illustrating relevant morbid anatomy and histology.

It is recommended that, in addition to standard textbooks of Pathology. the pathological sections of standard works on the specialty be studied. A knowledge of relevant pathological topics appearing in current medical periodicals in the English language will be expected.

Microbiology


(a) the general biological characters of bacteria and viruses;

(b) a detailed knowledge of those organisms responsible for infections of the ear, nose and throat; .

(C) epidemiology, including cross-infection in hospitals;

(d) organization and function of the immune system and its role In disease.

(e) principles of chemotherapy, sterilization and disinfection.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour practical test; oral examination.

115

Faculty of Medicine

DIPLOMA IN DIAGNOSTIC RADIOLOGY (Regulation 3.40В )

(1) The course and examination for this diploma are being discontinued and no candidates for the diploma will be admitted after December 31, 1982. Only Year 2 and Year 3 programmes will be mounted in 1983.

(2) Candidates previously admitted to the course are advised to register in the first instance with the Assistant Registrar (Faculty of Medicine).

Candidates are required to present the following documents— (a) certificates of medical practice, at least two years or its equivalent,

In a resident medical appointment in a general hospital approved by the University, including four months of experience in each of general Medicine and surgery, or the equivalent.

(b) evidence that the candidate has been appointed to a full-time position in a department of Diagnostic Radiology of a general hospital approved by the University.

(3) Before entering for the examination candidates are required to present the following documents—

(a) certificates of attendance at the various lecture courses and tutorials as specified below.

(b) certificates, signed by the Directors of Diagnostic Radiology of the various departments in which the candidate has trained, to indicate that the three-year training programme, as specified below, of practical training in Radiodiagnosis has been completed satisfactorily.

(c) evidence that he has passed the examinations in Anatomy and Physics approved for the purpose by Faculty.

EXAMINATION The examination will be held in April and October. Candidates will be examined orally and there will be a written film reporting test. Candidates may be examined on all aspects of the Course, but the emphasis will be on knowledge expected of a consultant general radiologist.

YEAR 2

531-821 PATHOLOGY The examination will test the candidates' knowledge of Pathology and of general and regional morbid anatomy and histology with special reference to structural and functional variations which may be demon-strated by radiodiagnostic methods. The examination will test the candidates' ability to recognize and interpret specimens illustrating relevant morbid anatomy and histology. In addition to the standard textbooks, the pathological sections of standard works should be studied. A knowledge of appropriate matter in current periodicals in the English language will be expected.

555-822 RADIODIAGNOSIS 2 A series of lecture demonstrations will cover the Radiology of the various systems of the body. Film reading tutorials will be conducted,

116

Diplomas

and students are encouraged to make use of the Audiovisual teaching library.

YEAR 3

555-823 RADIODIAGNOSIS 3

A series of lectures will deal with more advanced aspects of radio-logical diagnosis. Weekly film reading tutorials will be conducted, and a series of radiography tutorials.

DIPLOMA IN THERAPEUTIC RADIOLOGY .

(Regulation 3.40)

Note, (1 ) Candidates are advised to register In the first instance with the Assistant Registrar, faculty of Medicine.

(2) Before entering for the examination in Part I candidates are required to present certificates of practice (at least two years, including one year spent in a resident appointment in a general hospital).

(3) Before entering for the examination in Part II candidates are required to present certificates of experience for approval. Candidates admitted on the basis of qualifications obtained at other universities are required, in addition, to present certificates of three months' approved experience in the Clinical Schools of this University.

(4) The future of this course is under review. Details of the course may be found in earlier Handbooks and further information can be obtained from the Assistant Registrar (Medicine).

DIPLOMA IN PSYCHOLOGICAL MEDICINE

(Regulation 3.40А )

Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the Assistant Registrar, faculty of Medicine. Before entering for the examination in Part 1 candidates are required to present evidence that they have spent at least one year In a resident medical appointment in a general hospital during which time they have had the equivalent of four months' experience in each of in-patient Medicine and Surgery. Candidates are advised to discuss their psychiatric training with the department of Psychiatry before embarking upon their course of training for DPM. Before entering for the examination in Part Il candidates are required to present certificates of experience as specified below. Candidates admitted on the basis of qualifications obtained at other universities are required, in addition, to present certificates of at least three months' approved experience in any hospital of the Health Commission or the Department of Veteran Affairs, which has substantial association with the University department of Psychiatry and is from time to time approved by the Chairman of the Board of Examiners in Psychiatry.

117

Faculty of Medicine

PART I

EXAMINATIONS

At the conclusion of the courses in these subjects candidates may sit for Part I of the examination which comprises: 516-841 Neuroanatomy one 3-hour written paper (oral examination); 536-841 Neurophysiology one 2-hour written paper; 534-841 Pharmacology one 1-hour written paper; 554-841 Medical Psychology two 3-hour written papers. (Oral examinations may be held in the other three subjects.)

554-841 MEDICAL PSYCHOLOGY

A course of 50 hours of lectures and seminars to introduce psychiatrists-in-training to the general field of psychology with special emphasis on areas relevant to clinical practice. The chief sections of the course will be: Introduction and methodology; Developmental psychology throughout the lifespan; Social Psychology; Cognitive Psichology; Motivation and emotion; Personality.

516-841 NEUROANATOMY

A course of 52 lecture/demonstrations. The subject includes the gross and microscopic structure of the nervous system including its embryo-logical development. The examination may include questions relative to the development and histogenesis of the nervous system, the neuron and neuroglia, cranial nerves, peripheral nerves, autonomic nervous sys-tem, spinal cord, medulla, pons. midbrain, dlencephalon and basal ganglia, rhinencephalon, olfactory pathways, limbic system, cerebral cortex, meninges and cerebrospinal fluid, blood supply of the central nervous system, and the skull.

536-841 NEUROPHYSIOLOGY

The course will comprise 20 lecture/seminars which will deal with important parts of the syllabus.

(a) The neurone: Determinants of transmembrane potential, axon con-duction, synaptic transmission.

(b) Sensory processes: (i) The measurement of sensory function; de-tection discrimination and scaling of stimuli. (ii) Transmission and processing of stimulus information within mammalian sensory systems; representation of physical space within sensory systems. (iii) Somatic sensation, neural mechanisms of touch, kinesthesis, thermal sensibility and pain. (iv) The visual system—visual perception; photochemistry and neural organization of retina; central neural mechanisms of vision. (v) Physiology of hearing—sensory correlates of sound stimuli; peripheral neural mechanisms of hearing, including processing of information in the auditory nerve; central neural mechanisms of hearing. (vi) Forebrain mecharisms of perception—functional localization in central cortex; the divided brain.

(c) Motor Function: (i) Organization of the motor systems; feedback control of movement and posture. (ii) Peripheral mechanisms in the

'118

Diplomas

control of skeletal muscle. (iii) Functional organization of the spinal cord-spinal reflexes and the control of movement. (iv) The cerebellum and motor function. Motor function of the forebrain—cerebral cortex and basal ganglion. (v) The autonomic nervous system—peripheral organi-zation and central regulatory mechanisms. (v1) The hypothalamus—neuro-endocrine and other functions. (vii) Synaptic transmitter substances in the central nervous system.

(d) Higher functions of the brain: (i) The conscious state; sleep and wakefulness; the electro-encephalogram. (ii) Neural mechanisms in memory learning, motivated and emotional behaviour. (iii) Neural cor-relates of speech.

(e) Physiology of cerebrospinal fluid and cerebral circulation

EXAMINATION A two-hour written examination, and an essay to be handed in at the time of the examination. Details of the assessing pro-cedure and the subject of the essay will be issued at the beginning of the course.

534-841 PHARMACOLOGY

The course will consist of 20 lectures covering the following topics: Neurochemical transmitter mechanisms in the peripheral and central nervous systems, with special reference to the relationship of central transmitter mechanisms to normal and abnormal processes and be-haviour. General principles of pharmacology; absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion of drugs, with special reference to psycho-tropic drugs. Pharmacological actions and uses of the autacoids and their antagonists. Drugs acting on the central nervous system: anti-depressants, antipsychotics, anti-anxiety drugs, anti-parkinsonien drugs, anti-convulsants, stimulants, psychotomimetics, sedatives, hypnotics, an-algesics, pharmacological actions and mechanisms involved in their therapeutic, unwanted and toxic actions. Drug interactions. Drug evalu-ation. Drug abuse.

EXAMINATION

A 1-hour written examination consisting of multiple choice and/or short-answer type questions will be held at the end of the course.

NEUROPSYCHIATRY

A 10-weeks' course run in parallel for candidates during their training In neuroanatomy and neurophysiology which seeks to Introduce students to neuroanatomical, neurophysiological and neurological presentations in psychiatric illness. These seminars are run conjointly with the neuro-anatomists, neurophysiologists and neurologists and clinical material is presented to demonstrate different psychiatric and neurological syndromes.

This course is presently conducted on Wednesdays between 4 and 5 p.m. from May to July and is not examinable.

119

Faculty of Medicine

INTRODUCTORY COURSE IN PSYCHIATRY AND PSYCHOPATHOLOGY

This course runs between September and December after candidates have completed their Part I examination. It is intended to be an intro-duction to clinical psychiatry for candidates who are now becoming more involved in clinical practice. The course is held on Mondays and Wednesdays from 2 - 5 p.m. It is a series of seminar tutorials with clinical presentations and some literature presentations by candidates on specific topics. This course is not examinabI e.

554-004 GENERAL PSYCHIATRY

This course is on a Wednesday from 2 - 4 p.m. from February to December and presently candidates attend in Second Year. The course consists of three terms and seminars include classification in psychiatry; functional psychoses; neuroses; personality disorders; psychosomatic medicine; forensic psychiatry; organic brain syndromes; sexual devia-tions; epidemiology; mental retardation; research; social psychiatry; the theory and practice of behaviour therapy and treatment of psychiatric illness. Journal Club and Case Presentation: This is presently held each Wednes-day between 4 - 5 p.m. Candidates are given a series of current journal articles which they are required to research for presentation to a senior psychiatrist and their colleagues. On alternate Wednesdays each student is allocated a patient on which he has to complete a history and present to a senior psychiatrist and his colleagues.

554-009 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHIATRY

This course is held on Monday afternoon between 2-5 p.m. from February to December and includes developmental, child and family psychiatry, and related areas. The developmental process of an individual is con-sidered in a sequential way through the ages and stages of life beginning with natal factors, infancy, pre-school, school age, adolescence, adulthood, senium. Parenthood, family structure and functioning, social, cultural and psychopathological aspects of child and family psychiatry will be covered during this course.

HOSPITAL TUTORIALS

It should be emphasised that in each year of the course students should have a minimum of 4 hours per week of teaching supervision at their approved psychiatric unit. Education in interviewing techniques and elementary psychotherapy should be an essential component of this tutoring. Three hours of this supervision may be in small groups but each student must have at least one hour of individual supervision from a psychiatrist at his hospital each week.

554-005 ADVANCED PSYCHOTHERAPY A course of 40 tutorials/seminars, together with individual case super-vision. The course will include psychological management of patients and practical aspects of psychopathology. This is conducted in year three of the training programme.

120

Diplomas

554-006 GENERAL MEDICINE

This is presently conducted in Third Year of the training course and candidates attend a course of 12 bedside seminar/tutorials at St. Vincent's Hospital. There are two courses conducted in each year. The following topics are covered: Alcoholism: Physical complications; Social implications; Detoxification; rehabilitation.

Cardiovascular: Cardiac failure — causes and management Hypertension: causes, investigation and management Coronary artery disease

Respiratory: Chronic obstructive airway disease — Asthma, respiratory causes of disturbed behaviour and of consciousness. Acute respiratory insufficiency.

Renal: Urinal tract infections; chronic renal failure; acute renal

Gastro-intestinal: Ulcerative colitis, irritable colon and diverticular dis-ease. Hepatic insufficiency and portocaval encephalopathy: Alcoholic liver disease. Endocrine: Pituitary, thyroid and adrenal disease; hyperactive or hypo-active disease.

Metabolic Disturbances of Consciousness Management of Terminal Malignancy Psychosocial problems of leukaemia and chronic haematological disorders in children.

554-007 NEUROLOGY AND NEUROPATHOLOGY

Neurology: This course has to include a compulsory attendance at 15 half-day sessions at a neurological clinic and is presently conducted twice a year at St. Vincent's Hospital. Training includes the evaluation of the neurological history; clinical examination of the nervous system. Discussion of various neurological syndromes. The electro-encephalo-gram, carotid angiography, air studies and brain scanning in clinical diagnosis. Therapy in neurological disorders.

Neuropathology is an 8-weeks' course. There are slide sessions and demonstrations of routine 'brain cutting'. Topics covered include normal and abnormal glia (changes in disease). C.S.F. production, circulation and absorption, hydrocephalus, brain herniations; tumours of central nervous system; vascular abnormalities (a) ischaemia; vascular abnor-malities (b) haemorrhage; Demyelinating disorders: Infections (a) virus; infections (b) bacterial, protozoal etc. Parkinson's disease. Dementia: The nervous system in alcoholism. Trauma: Disorders of Muscle: Disorders of peripheral nerve. This course is not examinable.

554-008 CHILD PSYCHIATRY

A course of 30 sessions in clinical case work is required.

Clinical Case Work: 1. Demonstration interviews, of children at different developmental stages; with parents; and also demonstration of joint therapist and family interviews.

failure.

121

Faculty of Medicine

2. The candidate, with supervision will undertake diagnostic work with children, parents and families, and therapy with particular children, parents and families.

PART 11

EXAMINATION

The examination comprises two sections, Section A which is examined by coursework and Section B by dissertation.

At the conclusion of the above courses and provided candidates have passed the Part I examinations and are able to produce certificates of experience as set out in the regulations, they may sit for the Section A examination which comprises:

Paper 1: General Medicine, Neurology and Neuropathology (3 hours);

Paper 2: General Psychiatry • (3 hours); Paper 3: General Psychiatry (3 hours).

There are two clinical examinations; one in Neurology, Neuropathology and General Medicine and one in Psychiatry. The following are the certificates of experience required: The candidate has been in practice in psychiatry in approved units for at least 3 years, which has included: (a) tutorials in hospitals as set out in the details of subjects; (b) not less than 20% of the time in family, developmental and related

aspects of psychiatry (this includes child psychiatry but must not be exclusively in child psychiatry units);

(c) a period of six months experience in liaison psychiatry whilst in full time attendance at the psychiatry department of a general hospital;

(d) a period of six months full time attendance at a psychiatric hospital specialising in the treatment and rehabilitation of acute and chronic patients;

(e) at least 15 half day sessions at a neurological clinic in a recognized hospital.

554-013 DISSERTATION The fourth and fifth Year components of the course will be full clinical years during which a dissertation (comprising Section B of the examina-tion) will be prepared. The dissertation will be a review and discussion of a topic in psychiatry in which the candidate is particularly interested. The topic should first be approved by the Chairman of the department of Psychiatry and must be examined and passed prior to obtaining the Diploma.

READING

Books are recommended for each subject in the course and a list is available in the Department.

DIPLOMA IN ANAESTHETICS (Regulation 3.40)


122

Diplomas

Consideration is being given to the discontinuation of this course. Interested persons should consult the Assistant Registrar. (2) Before entering for the examination in Part I candidates are required to present certificates of practice (at least two years, including one year spent in a resident appointment in a general hospital). (3) Before entering for the examination in Part 11 candidates are required to present certificates of experience for approval. Candidates admitted on the basis of qualifications obtained at other universities are required, in addition, to present certificates of three months' approved experience in the Clinical Schools of this University. (4) Details of the course can be found in earlier Handbooks.

DIPLOMA IN AUDIOLOGY (Regulation 3.80)

Audiology is the clinical science concerned with the diagnosis, preven-tion, and treatment of loss of hearing and the associated disorders of communication, As a result it plays a significant role in the medical educational and social services available to children and adults with hearing disabilities. This discipline should be of interest to those with a scientific background who are interested in working with people. The Diploma in Audiology is a one-year full-time course, commencing in the first week of February and finishing in the last week in November. There are 30 weeks of course work, 12 in first term, 10 in second term and 8 in third term. Acoustics, Anatomy and Physiology and part of Psychology are examined at the end of the first term. Otology, Speech and Language and the remainder of Psychology are examined at the end of second term. Biophysics and the remaining units in Audiology are examined in November. Audiology is the main subject and accounts for 60% of the student's time whilst each of the remaining subjects approxi-mately 8% of the time.

BASIC SCIENCES

577-861. ACOUSTICS

The course consists of approximately 20 hours of lectures with some demonstrations and practical work. The examination may include ques-tions relating to wave motions and vibrations In gases, liquids and solids, sound absorption and reflection acoustical impedance, room acoustic, sound fields and noise, the measurement of sound and psychoacoustics.

EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper and assessment during the course.

577-865. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY

Approximately 20 hours of lectures and some demonstrations. The examination may include questions relating to the anatomy of the ear, the histology and ultrastructure of the inner ear, middle ear function, cochlear physiology, psychoacoustics, vestibular neuroanatomy, auditory and vestibular neurophysiology.


123

Faculty of Medicine

431-861. BIOPHYSICS

Approximately 24 hours of lectures and practical work with some additional demonstrations. The examination may include questions relating to instrumentation, electroacoustical transducers, basic electronics, electrical safety, data acquisition and processing in biology.


577-866. PSYCHOLOGY

Approximately 30 hours of lectures. The course will provide an over-view of, and concentrate on, the broad areas of cognitive development, personality, neuropsychology, psychophysics, rehabilitative counselling of the sensorily-deprived and aspects of quantitative methods.

EXAMINATION Two 2-hour papers and assessment during the course.

CLINICAL SCIENCES

577-862. AUDIOLOGY

This subject has seven units. The course consists of lectures, practical work, clinical work, demonstrations and tutorials. Students also may be required to undertake a small research project or dissertation for General Audiology and a case study for Paediatric Audiology. The clinical work involves each student in about four half-day clinical sessions per week, although this will vary from week to week depending on the individual student's time-table. Clinics are held at the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital, the Royal Children's Hospital, the State Health Department, the National Acoustics Laboratories as well as further sessions at other teaching hospitals. The clinical work is assessed in the units General Audiology and Paediatric Audiology. There will also be some assessment in aural rehabilitation in Aural Rehabilitation. The approximate weighting for each unit in this subject is as follows: General Audiology 45%, Paediatric Audiology 25%, Aural Rehabilitation 8%, Hearing Aids 7%, Speech and Language 5%, Industrial Audiology 5%, Educational Audiology 5%. Full details will be posted at the start of the year.

EDUCATIONAL AUDIOLOGY

Approximately 20 hours of lectures and includes visits to schools for the deaf and pre-school parent guidance centres. The examination may include questions relating to psychology of deaf-ness, role of the family, the deaf child at home and at school, parent guidance, auditory training, educational guidance and school place-ment, vocational guidance for the deaf, hearing aids for home and school, language assessment in the classroom, educational management of the hearing-impaired chld, the multiple-handicapped deaf child and sensory approaches to speech and language development.


124

Diplomas

GENERAL AUDIOLOGY

Consists of approximately 30 hours of lectures, 35 hours of laboratory work requiring two written reports and clinical work throughout the year. The examination may include questions related to pure tone audiometry, masking, speech audiometry, differential diagnosis of deafness, impe-dance audiometry, non-organic hearing loss, evoked response audiometry, brain stem audiometry, central auditory problems, history taking and clinical examination, interpretation of results, ethics, psychoacoustics and instrumentation and calibration.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, a clinical examination, a viva voce examination and assessment during the course.

AURAL REHABILITATION

Approximately 30 hours of lectures and practical/clinical work in aural rehabilitation. The examination may include questions relating to the assessment of auditory handicap, the establishment and management of aural rehabili-tation programmes, speechreading, hearing tactics, speech conservation, auditory, visual and vibrotactile training methods, hearing aid/device orientation and aural rehabilitative counselling; the ageing process, presbyacusis, the clinical assessment of the elderly, and hearing aid fitting and evaluation in the elderly.


HEARING AIDS

Approximately 20 hours of lectures with clinical work and demonstrations relating to hearing aid selection and counselling. The examination may Include questions relating to the design and operation of hearing aids, hearing aid characteristics, selection and evaluation of hearing aids, binaural listening, hearing aids for home and school, counselling and aural rehabilitation and the rationale for hearing aid fitting.


INDUSTRIAL AUDIOLOGY

Approximately 20 hours of lectures with some practical work. The examination may include questions relating to instrumentation. noise abatement, hearing conservation programmes, acoustic trauma, hearing handicap, noise and communication and medico-legal aspects.


PAEDIATRIC AUDIOLOGY

Thirty hours of lectures, clinical work through the year and a case study for which a 2,000-word report is required. The examination may include questions relating to the development of the Infant and young child, emotional and social development of children with impaired hearing, causes of deafness, hearing assessment in infants

126

Faculty of Medicine

and children, at risk registers, genetics, communication disorders and auditory information processing, mental retardation, cerebral palsy, autism and psychoses, central language disorders, psychogenic deafness, deprivation and the multiply handicapped deaf child.


SPEECH AND LANGUAGE

Twenty hours of lectures. The examination may include questions relat-ing to anatomy, physiology, pathology of the vocal tract, acoustic phonetics, linguistics, psycholinguistics, normal speech and language development, language of the deaf child, speech pathology and rehabilitation.


577-864. OTOLARYNGOLOGY

Twenty hours of lectures with some demonstrations, and clinical work throughout the year.

The examination may include questions relating to pathology of the ear, methods of clinical examination, diseases of the external ear, diseases of the middle ear, diseases of the inner ear, congenital deafness. otos-clerosis, presbyacusis, acoustic neuroma, Menieres Disease, vestibular disorder, otoneurology.


128

CHAPTER 11

TEACHING AND RESEARCH STAFF Staff are listed alphabetically within categories, not according to seniority.

• Indicates part-time staff t Indicates associated staff

Anatomy

Chairman of Department and Professor

GRAEME BRUCE RYAN, MD BS PhD FRCPA FRACP

Professor

VACANT

Senior Lecturers

BOYCE DARRYL BOWDEN, BDSc Q'Id MDSc FDS DOrth RCS GORDON RONALD CAMPBELL, BSc PhD GEOFFREY CHARLES TREADGOLD KENNY, MB BS Q'id MSc PETER MAXWELL ROBINSON, BSc PhD BERNICE FRANCES STRATFORD, MB BS PhD

Lecturers CHRISTOPHER ALEXANDER BRIGGS, MS PhD Oregon

DipPhysEd Exe. NORMAN EIZENBERG, MB BS

•JOSEPHINE SYBIL KAVANAGH, BMedSc MB BS DDR MRACR

MARY BLYTHE WHEELER, BSc MB BS

Senior Demonstrators

•EVELYN LIVINGSTON BILLINGS, MB BS DCH Lind. MICHAEL PETER FALKENBERG, MB BS GILLIAN LOUISE FARRELL, MB BS TREVOR JOHN HODSON, MB BS

•CORALIE FORTH KENNY, DipPhysio O'1d MAPA ROSLYN ANNE PERRY, MSc DipEd

•EFFIE MAXWELL ROSS, MB BS JONATHAN WILLIAM SERPELL, MB BS ANDREW MAXWELL SIZELAND, MB 8S

Associated Staff

•Professor Emeritus KEITH CAMPBELL BRADLEY, VRD BCE MB BS FRACS FRACO FRACR

Research Fellow

DAINE ALCORN, MSc PhD

Research Assistant

'JILL JOHNSTON, BSc Syd. CASSANDRA MARCINELLE THUMWOOD, BSc Monash

127

Faculty of Medicine

Biochemistry

Chairman of Department

VACANT

Professor FRANCIS JOHN RAYMOND HIRD, PhD Camb. MAg г Sc DSc

Professor SIMON JOSHUA LEACH, В ScTech Manc. PhD DSc Leeds

Professor of Biochemistry (Medical)

GERHARD HANS SCHREIBER, Dried DozBiochim Freiburg i. Br.

Readers

LLOYD ROSS FINCH, BSc W.Aust. PhD CHARLES ALBERT MICHAEL MAURITZEN, Assoc H.W-C. PhD

Edin. ARIL

Senior Lecturers

ROBERT CORNELIS AUGUSTEYN, BSc PhD Q'id DipEd BARRIE ERNEST DAVIDSON, BAgrSc BSc PhD KENWYN RONALD GAYLER, BAgrSc Adel. PhD 1'1d BRUCE RAYMOND GRANT, В Aq т Sс Q'Id MSc PhD Purdue BRUCE GRAYSON LIVETT, BSc PhD Monash MAXWELL ARTHUR MARGINSON, BSc WILLIAM HUGH SAWYER, MSc Minn. PhD A.N.U. BAgrSc

Lecturers

GEOFFREY JOHN HOWLETT, BSc PhD PAMELA ELLEN EMINA TODD, BSc PhD

Senior Tutor

ALANA MITCHELL, BSc PhD

Tutors

DONNA SUTTON DOROW, BSc 0. Dominion ELIZABETH DYER JOHNSON BAgrSc STEVEN PETER JONES, BSc

Research Fellows

tEDWARD BLATT, BSc

tALAN JAMES HILLIER, BSc PhD

Senior Associates

tDAVID GORDON CAMPBELL, MB ChB N.Z. BSc Weil, FRACP FRCPA

t BRIAN LESLIE HILLCOAT, BSc MD Q'Id. PhD A.N.U. tJOHN WILLIAMSON LEGGE, MSc t ТН OMAS EDWARD BALDWIN KEEN, MD BS MSc Adel,

FRACP FRCPA

Associates

t NEIL WILLIAM ISAACS, BSc PhD Q'id. tJAMES SAVILLE WILEY, MD Syd. BSc Oxf. FRALP FRCPA

128

Teaching Staff

Community Health

Chairman of the Department and Professor

ROSS WHARTON WEBSTER, MB BS FRACP FRACGP

Deputy Chairman and Reader

DAVID GORDON STUART CHRISTIE, MB BS Q'id. MD Land. FRALP MFCM

Senior Lecturers

DAVID ROBERT DUNT, MB BS PhD Monash MFCM 'VERNON DOUGLAS PLUECKHAHN, OBE ED MD BS Adel.

FRACP FRCPA FRCPath FAACB MIAC 'KELMAN SEHNENS, MB BS DTM&H Lind. 'DEN'S URMSTON SHEPHERD, MB BS FRACGP FRSH

Lecturer

"ELIZABETH ANN WARD, MB BS 0'id FRACGP

Senior Research Fellow IAN RICHARD HILDRETH ROCKETT, DipEd BA W.Aust.

MA W.Ont. PhD Brown

Research Fellow КАУ E LOIS ROBINSON, BA

Research Social Worker

DOROTHY TERESA WEIGALL, BArch BSW LaT.

Graduate Research Assistants

MARY FRANCIS BOURKE, BA ANNIE CANTWELL, BA

Senior Associates

tJOHN AINLEY B1SBY, MB BS LRCP Lind, MSc Lind. DIH Lind. MFOM

tFREDERIC NICOLET BOUVIER, SBStJ MB BS FRACGP tKEITH EDGAR BROWN, MB BS tDOUGLAS ANTHONY GAMMON, MB BS tEDWARD CHARLES GAWTHORN, MB ChB Brist. FRACGP tGUY JOSEPH LAVOIPIERRE, MD France DTM&H France

MPH&TM Louisiana DrPH Louisiana tPETER WARREN JOSEPH LEIGHTON, MB BS FRACGP fJOHN DAVID LIVINGSTON, MB BS tDOUGLAS WILLIAM RANKIN, MB BS DPI Land. MFCM

Associates

tRICHARD BYRON COLLINS, BMedSc Monash MB BS Monash FRCPA

tRODNEY NEIL GUY, MB BS fPHILIP JOSEPH HAMMOND, MB BS FRACGP f HELEN EDITH HERRMAN, BMedSc MB BS Monash tBRUCE HOCKING, MB BS DPI Syd. FRACGP tJOHN HILLIER STANTON, MB BS FRACGP

129 Е

Faculty of Medicine

Clinical Instructors

'CHRIS APOSTOLOPOULOS, MB BS Monash 'FRANCIS LEO ARCHER, BMedSc Monash MB BS Monash

DipEd Monash 'GEORGE JOHN ARISTIDOU, MB BS Monash 'JACK MACMICHAEL ARMOUR, MB BS 'PETER MAURICE ARNDT, MB BS 'JOHN AINLEY BISBY, MB BS LRCP Lind. MSc Lind. DIH

Lind. MFOM 'FRANK IVOR BISHOP, MB BS FRCS FRANZCP 'SKENDER BORYA, MD Istanbul 'KENNETH CYRIL BOWES, MB BS DipObst RCOG FRACGP 'DAVID LLOYD BRADFORD, MB BS Syd. FRCS Ed. FRCS

Lind. DV Lind. 'PETER PERCIVAL BROUGHTON, MB BS DipObst RCOG 'ALAN DOUGLAS BRYAN, MB BS Q'Id. 'JOHN PETER BUSH, KStJ MRCS LRCP MB BS Lind. DipObst

RCOG FRACGP 'GRAHAM HADLEY LAPP, MB BS 'ALLAN NOEL CARTER, MB BS 'PHILIPPA HELEN CARTER, BSc MB BS PhD 'HENRY ROY CLEGG, MB BS 'RICHARD BYRON COLLINS, BMedSc Monash MB BS Monash

FRCPA 'WILLIAM FRANCIS COOPER, MB BS 'DONALD PRUEN CORDNER, MB BS FRACGP 'EDWARD PRUEN CORDNER, MD FRACP FRACGP 'JOHN MAURICE COURT, MB BS FRACP 'JOHN NICHOLAS CROFTS, MB BS 'ANN-MAREE CUSHAN, MA 'JOSEPH ERIC D'ARCY, DPhil Oxi. PhD Greg. MA 'EGBERT CORNELIUS de VOOGD, MB BS 'MALCOLM DOUGLAS HAMILTON DOBBIN, MB BS PhD

Mo ń ash 'DIMITRIOS DRAKOPOULOS, MB BS Monash 'RONALD JOSEPH EAGGER, MB BS 'ALAN STUART FEDDERSEN, MB BS FRACGP 'ROBERT JOHN FLEMING, MB BS 'ANTHONY FRANCIS FLOYD, MB BS DipObst RCOG 'ELMA MARY FLYNN, MB BS FRACGP 'PETER DONALD GRAEME FOX, MB BS 'LEON PETER FRANCIS, MB BS Diplbst RCOG 'FRANCIS LOUIS GALLICHIO, MB BS 'DOUGLAS ANTHONY GAMMON, MB BS 'EDWARD CHARLES GAWTHORN, MB ChB Brist. FRACGP 'DAVID GAVIN GOME, MB BS 'SARAH JO GOME, MB BS 'JOHN MCLEOD GORDON GRIGOR, MB ChB N.Z. DipCrim

FRANZCP FRCPsych 'RICHARD CLINTON GUTCH, MB BS 'RODNEY NEIL GUY, MB BS 'MOSSY HAIN, MB BS 'PHILIP JOSEPH HAMMOND, MB BS FRACGP

130

Teaching Staff

'KENNETH JOHN HARVEY, MB BS FRCPA 'DAVID HILL, MA MAPsS 'DAVID GEORGE WILLIAM HOLLANDS, MB ChB Birm. DCH

Lind. 'MARGARET HOLLANDS, MB ChB Birm. DCH Lind. *ANNA HOWE, MA DipEd 'JOHN JAGODA, MB BS FRACGP 'BERNARD DAVID KAGAN, MB BS Dipibst RCOG FRACGP 'DIMITRIOS KTENAS, MD Sal. 'COSTAS KYRIACOU, MB BS LMCC Dipibst RCOG FRACGP 'GUY JOSEPH LAVOIPIERRE, MD France DrPH Louisiana

DTM&H France MPH&TM Louisiana 'JAMES LAWLESS, MB ChB St.And. 'PETER WARREN JOSEPH LEIGHTON, MB BS FRACGP 'JOHN DAVID LIVINGSTON, MB BS 'ROBERT VICTOR LONG, MB BS Dipibst RCOG FRACGP 'KEVIN WILLIAM LONGTON, MB BS 'FRANCIS XAVIER LYONS, MB BS 'JOHN FAROUHAR MACDONALD, MB BS 'KEVIN JOHN MACDONALD, ВМ edSc MB В S Monash 'JEREMY MADDOX, MA 'IAN LUMSDEN MCVEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS 'ANTHONY JOHN MEATHREL, MB BS 'JAMES EDWIN HUGH MILNE, MB BS DPM MSc Lind. DIH

Lind. 'SPIRO MORAITIS, OBE MB BS 'GEOFFREY JOHN MULKEARNS, MB BS 'GORDON REGINALD MYALL, MB BS DipObst RCOG 'EDGAR JOHN HAMILTON NORTH, MB BS FRACGP 'LARRY WALL OSBORNE, MB В S Monash 'WAYNE THOMAS PENNINGTON, MB BS 'DEREK MELVILLE PRINSLEY, MD BS Durh. FRALP 'CHAMPAKLAL RANA, MB BS New Delhi 'DOUGLAS WILLIAM RANKIN, MB BS DPH MFCM 'DINAR SUSAN REDDIHOUGH, MB ChB Otago 'JOHN MARK ROBINSON, MB BS Diplbst RCOG 'THOMAS PAUL ROWAN, MB BS 'RALPH HAROLD BERNARD SACKS, MB BS FRSH 'JOSEPH NATALINO SANTAMARIA, MB BS FRALP 'JOSEPH GERARD SANTAMARIA, BCL BLitt Oxf. BA LLB 'MITCHELL ARTHUR LEONARD SMITH, MB BS 'NEIL STUART SMITH, MB BS 'JOHN HILLIER STANTON, MB BS FRACGP 'IAN ALEXANDER SWAIN, MB BS FRACGP 'ENG SEONG TAN, MB BS Malaysia DPM FRCP FRANZCP ' ERIC THURIN, MB BS 'DENNIS JOHN TRAVERS, BA DipSocStud 'ANTHONY GEORGE MORTIMER TYMMS, MB BS 'THOMAS VAIOPOULOS, MB BS Monash 'PETER LOUIS WALLER, LRB BCL Oxf. FASSA •ARTHUR EUAN WALKER, MB BS Lind. LRCP FRCS Dipibst

RCOG 'ROBERT MELVILLE WITHERS, MB BS

131

Faculty of Medicine

Gerontology and Geriatric Medicine, Mt. Royal Hospital

Director of the Mt. Royal National Research Institute of Gerontology and Geriatric Medicine

Professor DEREK MELVILLE PRINSLEY, MD BS Durh. FRCP Edil. FRACP FRSH


WILLIAM MERVYN BARRETT, MB BS FRACP FORM SHI К ANDINI JOSEPH, MB BS Ceyi. FRACP ALAN FRANCIS LEO NEAL, MB BS MRACR BOYNE MARIE RUSSELL, MB BS MRCP Edin. STUART JOHN HUNT SHEPHERD, MB BS DIPHA FRACMA

LIA DGM ROGER WILLIAM WARNE, MB BS MRCS MRCP FRACP

Medical Biology

Director of The Walter and Eliza Hall Institute of Medical Research

Sir GUSTAV JOSEPH VICTOR NOSSAL, CBE BSc( М ed) MB BS Syd. PhD Hon MD Mainz FRACP FRCPA FACIA FAA FRS

Professorial Associate

tOONALD METCALF, AO MD BSC( Ме d) Syd. FRCPA FRACP FAA

Senior Associates

tJERRY McKEE ADAMS, BSc Emory PhD Harv. tIAN REAP MACKAY, Al MD FRCP FRACP FRCPA t ТН O М AS ELI MANDEL, MB BS tJACOUES FRANCIS ALBERT PIERRE MILLER, AO BBc(Med)

MB BS Syd. PhD DSc Lend. FAA FRS t GRAHAM FRANK MITCHELL, RDA BVSc Syd. PhD t KENNETH DOUGLAS SHORTMAN, BSc Syd. PhD

Medical History Unit

Curator

'HAROLD DALLAS ATTWOOD, MD ChB St.And. MD FRCPA FRCPath FRACP

Honorary Professor

'KENNETH FITZPATRICK RUSSELL, MB MS DLitt FRACS FRACP

Senior Associates

tFRANK MENZIES CAMERON FÖRSTER, MB BS FRCOG FAustCOG

tJEAN FOGO RUSSELL

Associates

t PETER FRANCIS BURKE, MB BS FRACS DHMSA tKEVIN JAMES FRASER, MB BS MRCP FRACP

tJOHN NATTRASS, MB BS DGO FRCOG FAustCOG

132

Teaching Staff

Medicine: Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital


AUSTIN ERIC DOYLE, MD BS Lind. FRCP FRACP

Professor (Repatriation General Hospital)

Professor THOMAS JOHN MARTIN DSc MD BS FRACP

Merck Sharpe & Dohme Professor of Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics

WILLIAM JOHN LOUIS, MD BS FRALP

First Assistant (Austin Hospital)

FREDERICK ARTHUR OSCAR MENDELSOHN, MD BS PhD FRACP

First Assistant (Repatriation General Hospital)

RICHARD GRAEME LARKINS, MD BS PhD FRALP

Senior Lecturers

DAVID GEORGE LEGGE, MD BS FRALP NEVILLE DAVID YEOMANS, MD Monash MB BS FRACP

Senior Lecturer in Psychological Medicine (Repatriation General Hospital)

PAUL EDWARD DEBENHAM, MPhil Lind. MA MB BChir Comb. MRCP MRCPsych.

Senior Lecturers in Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics

BEVYN JARROTT, BPharm Old. PhD Camb.

'SADANAND NEGASHRAO ANAVEKAR, MB BS Korn. PhD FRACP

Lecturer (Repatriation General Hospital)

ROGER ALLEN, MB BS Q'!d FRALP

Lecturer (Austin Hospital)

ROLAND WILLIAM EBRINGER, MB BS Monash MRCP

Senior Lecturer in Psychiatry

EDWIN HARARI, MB BS DPM MRANZCP

Professional Officer

BARBARA RAYSON, BSc PhD

National Health and Medical Research Council Principal Research Fellow

WINIFRED GWEN NAPLER, DSc

National Health and Medical Research Council Senior Research Fellows PHILIP MARK BEART, BSc Adel. PhD A.N.U. JOHN ALLAN EISMAN, MB BS PhD FRALP ROGER JAMES SUMMERS, PhD BPharm Lind.

National Health and Medical Research Council Australian Postdoctoral Research Fellow

RICHARD BLAMIRE SEWELL, MD FRALP

133

Faculty of Medicine

National Heart Foundation of Australia Senior Research Fellow

GREGORY JAMES DUSTING, BSc PhD

National Heart Foundation of Australia Research Fellow

JOHN JAMES McNEIL, MB BS MSc FRACP

National Health and Medical Research Council Senior Research Officers OLAF HEINO OSKAR DRUMMER, BAppSci R.M.I.T. PhD ANDREW LAWRENCE GUNDLACH, BSc PhD STEPHEN JOHN LEWIS, BSc GEORGE WILLIAM MIHALY, BPharm MSc PhD JANE MARIE MOSELEY, BSc PhD OWEN LLEWELLYN WOODMAN, BSc

National Health and Medical Research Council Postgraduate Medical Research Scholars

RUSSELL ROSS CAMERON BUCHANAN, MB BS FRACP LAWRENCE GUY HOWES, MB BS FRACP CAROLYN ANNE RE, MB BS BMedSc JEFFREY DAVID ZAJAC, MB BS

Fellow in Renal Medicine

SUTACHARD BIJAPHALA, MD Thailand

MacFarlane Burnet Biomedical Research Scholar

STEPHEN ANTHONY LIVESEY, MB BS BMedSc

Postgraduate Research Scholars

ADRIENNE ADAMS, BSc Well. ADRIANNE ILA ELISABETH ANDERSON, Nìì BS FRACP JOANNA LIA BORGHESI, BSc JANINE ATHALIE DANKS, BSc DAVID JOHN de VRIES BSc Old. PAUL ALLAN DICKENS, BSc JAGMOHANBIR SINGH DILLON, BSc CATHERINE ANNE DILLON, BSc ROBERT DiNICOLANTONIO, BSc MARJORIE ELIZABETH DUNLOP, MSc DAVID MALCOLM FINDLAY, MSc ROBERT WYKE FOWLER, BEd VC. College BEd Monash THOMAS PATRICK HEANEY, BSc JOHN STEPHEN HILL, BSc MARGARET CLARE JOHNSON, BSc A.N.U. CHRISTOPHER JOHN LLOYD, BSc RICHARD JOSEPH McCOY, BSc CARLO MACCARRONE, BPharm VALDO PETER MICHELANGELI, FRMIT MMedSci Sheff. HELENA TEOFILA NEUMANN, BSc ROGER NOLAN, BSc JEFFREY PAUL NORTHROP, BSc JENNY PAPANICOLAOU, BSc MARYANNE PURCHASE, BSc SUSAN PATRICIA ROGERS, MSC HELENA WANDA RZEZNICZAK, BSc ELIZABETH SIER, BSc

134

Teaching Staff

WAYNE JOHN STURROCK, BSc JONATHAN LESLIE TAFT, MB BS BEE HO TOWE, BSc Deakin LORRAINE WEBSTER, BSc Queen's LAURINNE FAYE WHITE, BSc PETER JOHN WORLAND, BSc W.Aust. JOHN RAYMOND ZALCBERG, MB BS FRACP

Professorial Associates

t PETER FRANCIS BLADIN, BSc MD BS FRALP tJOHN К INGSLEY DAWBORN, PhD Lind. MB BS FRALP tTREFOR OWEN MORGAN, BSc( Ме d) MD FRALP tRICHARD ALAN SMALLWOOD, MD 8S FRALP

Senior Associate in Medical Physics

MOHAMMAD ANWAR CHAUDHRI, MSc Punjab Drrernat Heidelberg

Senior Associates (Austin Hospital)

'PETER RAEY BULL, MD BS FRALP FCCP FACIA 'RICHARD ASKIN CHENOWETH, MB BS FRALP 'JOHN PAUL COGHLAN, PhD DSc 'BRIAN ROGER ENTWISLE, MB BS DOM Syd. 'ANDREW NOEL FRASER, MB 8S FRACGP 'KEVIN JAMES FRASER, MB BS MRCP FRALP 'ALAN JAMES GOBLE, MD BS FRCP FRALP 'DAVID LESLIE HARDING, MB BS DCH Lind. MRCP FRALP 'WALTER FRANCIS REALE, MB BS FRALP 'ROBERT NEIL HOPE, MB BS FRALP 'RONALD ATKINSON HURLEY, BCE MB BS FRALP FRCRA

FFR 'GEORGE JERUMS, MD BS FRALP 'ELIZABETH ROMA LENAGHAN, MB BS DCH Lind. MRCP 'WILLIAM JOHN McKAY, MB BS FRALP 'WALTER JOSEPH MOON, MB BS FRALP 'ROBIN MACINTOSH LATHROP MURRAY, MB BS FRALP 'ANDREW COLGATE NEWELL, MD BS FRALP ' JOHNATHAN ARTHUR STREETON, MB BS FRALP 'BERNARD TREISTER, MB ChB N.Z. MRCP Edin. tPETER WILLIAM TREMBATH, MD BPharm FRALP ' FRANK JOHN EMERY VAJDA, MD BS FRCP FRALP

Senior Associates (Repatriation General Hospital)

WILLIAM ROBERT ADAM, PhD MD BS FRACP 'LIONEL BARRY ARKLES, MRCS Eng. LRCP Lind. FRACP 'COLIN EDWIN BARTER, MB BS FRACP 'ALAISTAIR RERIDT CAMPBELL, MD BS FRACP f FRANCIS CATARINICH, MB BS FRACP tDENIS CLARKE, MB BS DDM Syd, FALD 'LEWIS WILLIAM FAULKS, MB BS FRACP FACIA 'JOHN DESMOND PARKIN, MB BS FRACP 'PETER JAMES PARSONS, BSc MD FRCP FRACP 'NEWMAN FINGUS, MB BS FRACP

135

Faculty of Medicine

Senior Associates (Box Hill & District Hospital)

'PETER ALFRED BERGER, MB BS Edin. MACD 'EDWARD FRANCIS O'SULLIVAN, MB BS FRALP 'GRAHAM THEODORE SCHMIDT, MB BS Edin. MRCP FRALP 'MICHAEL PHILIP KENDAL SCHOOBRIDGE, MB BS DCP

Lind. FRACP tCHARLES WILLIAM EDGAR WILSON, MB В S MRCP

Associates (Austin Hospital)

'JOHN BERNARD BRENNAN, MB BS FRALP 'ANTHONY DORTIMER, MB BS FRALP •JOHN COURTNEY DUGGAN. MB BS FRALP •DAVID HILL, MB BS FRALP tROBERT WILLIAM HILL, MB BS 'PETER JOHN MIACH. PhD MB BS FRALP 'LAWRENCE MORAN, MB BS MRCP FRALP •LESLIE EDWARD OLIVER, MB BS FRALP FACC •GANASEN RAJAH RAM RAJENDRA, MB BS sing. FRALP 'PETER McINTOSH ROBERTSON, MB BS FRALP 'PETER ANTHONY SINCLAIR, MB BS FALO •JEFFREY MAX SLONIM, MB BS FRALP •MARY ROSE STEWART, MB BS FRALP tGRAEME ROBERT SYMINGTON, MD FRALP •GWYNNE WILTON THOMAS, MB ChB MRCP DPhil FRALP 'BRUCE JOHN TINGE, MB BS DPM Lind. MRCPsych

MRANZCP FANZCP •GERALD UNGER, MB ChB Liv. DipPhysMed tDIANE MARIE WILSON. MB BS FRALP tMAXIM WILSON, MD FRALP ROGER KENYON WOODRUFF, MB BS FRALP

Associates (Repatriation General Hospital)

tROGER WILKE BROWN, MB BS FRALP tJOHN COURTNEY DUGGAN, MB BS FRALP •DOUGLAS ROBERT GAULD, MB BS FRALP 'GARY DAVID GILL, MB BS FRALP •HUGH WARWICK GREVILLE, MB BS BMedSc tANTHONY VICTOR INCANI, MB BS FRALP •JOHN HENRY ISER, MB BS FRACR tCOLIN•LINDSAY HATHEWs, MB BS FRALP tJOHN ROBERT MERORM, MB BS FRALP tROBERT GORDON NEWHAM, MB BS FRALP 'JOHN MICHAEL 0'CONNELL, MB BS FRALP •ROBERT PIERCE, MB BS FRALP tPETER ANTHONY STANLEY, MB BS FRALP •NEVILLE WILLIAM QUINN, BDSc MB BS FRCS Lind. & Edin.

FDSRCS FRACDS •GWYNNE WILTON THOMAS, MD ChB MRCP DPhil FRALP

Associates (Box Hill & District Hospital)

tJOHN TURNER COUNSELL, MB BS FRALP tJAMES GEOFFREY HINDHAUGH, MB BS FRALP tGEOFFREY DONALD KERR, MB BS FRALP tPETER McINTOSH ROBERTSON, MB BS FRALP tCHARLES WILLIAM EDGAR WILSON, MB BS MRCP FRALP

136

Teaching Staff

Medicine: Department of James Stewart Professor, The Royal Melbourne Hospital


RICHARD ROBERT HAYNES LOVELL, AO MD BS Lind. MSc FRCP MRCS FRALP HonFACP

Professor PRISCILLA SHEATH KINCAID-SMITH, CBE DSc MB BCh Witw. MD Lind. DCP FRCP FRALP FRCPA$

First Assistant, Reader and Assistant Director

JOSEPH ROBERT EMMOTT FRASER, MD BS FRCP FRALP

First Assistants and Readers

ROGER AZIZ MELICK, MD BS Syd. FRCP FRALP KENNETH DAVID MUIRDEN, MD BS FRALP

First Assistant in Clinical Epidemiology

'DAVID GORDON STUART CHRISTIE, MB BS l'id. MD Lind. FRACP MFCM

First Assistant in Clinical Pharmacology

ROBERT . FRANCIS WESTLAND MOULDS, BMedSc MB BS PhD FRACP

Senior Lecturer GRAEME PAUL YOUNG, MB BS FRALP

Lecturer

DAVID HILTON LLOYD HART, MB BS Q'/d. FRACP

National Health and Medical Research Council Principal Research Fellow

JOHN DUNCAN MATHEWS, MD BS BSc PhD FRALP

National Health and Medical Research Council Senior Research Fellow in Rheumatology

BARRY JAMES CLARRIS, BAgrSc PhD DipEd

National Health and Medical Research Council Senior Research Fellow

JOHN ALLAN HAMILTON, BSc PhD

National Health and Medical Research Council Fellow in Applied Health Sciences

GEORGE ANDREW VARIGOS, MB BS FALD

National Health and Medical Research Council Postgraduate Research Scholar

TIMOTHY JOHN CUNNINGHAM, MB BS

Professorial Associates in Medicine tKENNETH FAIRBURN FAIRLEY, MD BS FRCP FRALP t ТН OMAS HENRY HURLEY, OBE MD BS FRALP tIAN REAP MACKAY, MD BS FRCP FRCCA FRALP

f Personel Chair in the Department of Medicine (R.M.H.)

137

Faculty of Medicine

tFRANK IAN RUSSELL MARTIN, MD BS FRACP tMICHAEL COWPER FRANKLYN PAIN, MD BS Syd. FRALP FCCP FRCF

Senior Associates in Medicine

tJOHN THOMAS ANDREWS, MB BS Lind. MD LRCP MRCS DObst RCOG FRALP FRACR

tANTHONY JOHN FREDERICK D'APICE, MB BS Syd. MD FRALP FRCPA

tANNE FRANCIS D'ARCY, MB BS fiJOHN FRANCIS CADE, MD BS PhD FRALP CRCP(C) FCCP tDAVID GORDON CAMPBELL, BSc N.Z. MB ChB Otago

FRCPA FRALP tRUSSELL GEOFFREY COLE, VRD MB BS DA FFARCS

FFARACS tJOHN CHARLES PROCTOR CONE, MD BS FRANZCP

MRCPsych tDAVID CROSBY COWLING, MD BS ED FRCPA FRALP

FRCPath tGEOFFREY HAMILTON DREHER, MB BS MAdmin Monash

AHA tPETER EBELING, BSc MD BS FRCP FRALP tDAVID JOHN FONE, MD BS FRALP tPETER BERT GREENBERG, MD BS PhD FRALP tLEONARD CHARLES HARRISON, MB BS N.S.W. MD FRALP tROBERT JOHN HJORTH, MD BS FRALP tVERE DAVID UROUHART HUNT, MD BS FRALP FACC tJOHN OWEN KING, MD BS FRALP tMICHAEL RANDLE LUXTON, MD BS FRALP tWALTER JOSEPH MOON, MB BS FRALP tDAVID SCOTT NURSE, MD BS MRCP (din. FALD FRALP tEUGENE ROBIN PAVILLARD, MB BS Lind. FRCPA tWILLIAM McINTOSH ROSE, MD BS FRCP FRALP tDONALD JAMES BOURNE ST. JOHN, MB BS FRALP FRCP tMALCOLM ELLISTON SCOTT, MB BS FRALP tSTUART JOHN HUNT SHEPHERD, MB BS DipHospAdmin

LHA tJOHN RICHARD SULLIVAN, MB BS MRCP FRALP tPETER WILLIAM SUTHERLAND. MD BS FRALP tHAROLD STANLEY SYMONS, MB BS MRCP FRALP FACCP tPETER WILLIAM TREMBATH, BPharm MB BS FRACP tPETER ALEXANDER VALENTINE, MB BS MRCP FRALP tALFRED JOHN WALL, MD BS MRCP FRALP tJUDITH ANN WHITWORTH, MD BS PhD FRALP tSAUL WIENER, MD BS Zurich PhD FRALP MRCPath MCPA

Sheppard M. Lowe Scholar

STELLA CLARK, MSc R.M.I.T.

Lecturer in Medicine to Dental Students

GREGORY JAMES TAGGART, MB BS FRALP

Senior Research Associate

'KINGSLEY WALLIS MILLS, MB BS FRACS FRCS

138

Teachinq Staff

Medicine: St. Vincent's Hospital


DAVID GEOFFREY PENINGTON, MA DM BCh lxf. FRCP FRACP FRCPA

Deputy Chairman of Department and First Assistant

GREGORY WHELAN, MB BS Syd. MD MSc mcm. FRACP

Reader

COLIN NICHOLSON CHESTERMAN, MB BS Syd. DPhil lxt. FRACP

Reader in Clinical Pharmacology

'MAURICE LAURENCE MASHFORD, MB BS Syd. MSc FRACP

Senior Lecturers

`PAUL VINCENT DESMOND, MB BS FRACP FRANK CALEB FIRKIN, BSc( Ме d) MB BS Syd. PhD Monash

FRACP

Lecturer

WILMA BESWICK, MB BS FRACP

Professional Officer

KEVIN GERARD CHAMBERLAIN, BSc BA DipEd


GLORIA MARIA CARUSO, BSc Monash RHONDA GWEN HUTCHINSON, BSc LaTrobe RICHARD MILLS, BSc PATRICIA MARY NOLAN, BSc 'SUE HELEN MARY RUSSELL, BSc TRICIA ANNE WALKER, BSc Monash LIZA WELLSTED,BSc Monash 'JENNIFER WONG, BSc PhD Manchester LUCIA BARBARA ZOLNIERKIEWZCZ, BSc


IAN GREGORY McDONALD, MD BS FRACP FRANCIS JOHN MORGAN, BA MD BS

Senior Associates

JOHN HALSEY ANDREW, BMedSc(Micro) MB ChB Otago MRCPath Loud. FRCPA

FRANK PETER ALFORD, MD BS FRACP KERRY JOHN BREEN, MD BS FRACP WILLIAM IVON BURNS, MB BS FRACP RUDOLPH LEOPOLD CHMIEL, MB BS DTR FRACP BERNARD GEORGE CLARKE, MB BS MRCP FRACP RONALD KEITH D01G, MD BS FRACP RENE HENRI DUPUCHE, MB BS MRCP FRACP BRIAN JAMES FEERY, MD BS MRACGP OLGA MARGARET GARSON, MB BS FRCPA FRACP GEORGE STEWART HALE, MD BS FRACP

139

Faculty of Medicine

MILTON THOMAS HEARN, BSc PhD Adel. MA Oxf. WILLIAM CARRICK HEATH, MB BS FRALP BRIAN LESLIE HILLCOAT, BSc Q'ld PhD A.N.U. MD BS VLADIMIR MICHAEL JELINEK, MD BS FRALP THOMAS EDWARD KEEN, MD BS MSc FRALP FRCPA RICHARD LOUIS KIRSNER, BE MSc PhD LUKE MURPHY, MD BS FRCP FRALP JOHN FRANCIS MALL, MD BS MRCP FRALP EDWARD FRANCIS O'SULLIVAN, MB BS FRALP BRYAN McKAY RUSH, MB BS Syd, FRALP FRCPA JOSEPH NATALINO SANTAMARIA, MB BS FRALP JOHN DAMIEN TANGE, MB BS Q'ld MRCP FRALP MARGARET BEVERLEY WOOD, MSc AID N.S.W.

Associates

MICHAEL JOHN BRIGNELL, MB BS FRALP DAVID CHARLES CADE, MB BS FRALP PATRICIA FOX, MB BS FRALP JOHN COWAN HEGGIE, BSc MSc Auckland PhD British

Columbia NEWTON YET YEE LEE, MB BS FRALP FRCPA GEORGE PATRICK LEITL, MB BS FRALP ELIZABETH ROMA LENAGHAN, MB BS DCH Lind. MRCP KEUN HOE LIEW, MB BS MRACP MRACR KENNETH JAMES MUTTON, MB BS Syd. JUSTIN O'DAY, MB BS FRALP FRAOS FRCS FRACO DO JOHN EDMOND O'DONOVAN, MB BS FRALP DOROTHY PANELLI, MB BS FRALP MARGARET ANN PICKLES, MB BS BSc DP MANZCP WILLIAM FRANCIS RYAN, MB BS MRCP FRALP NERINA SALANITRI, MB BS MICHAEL SALZBERG, MB BS FAITH THOMPSON, BA W.A. PhD Monash EDWARD BRUCE TOMLINSON, MB BS FRALP

Microbiology


ALFRED JAMES PITTARD, PhD Yale DSc DipPharm FAA

Professor DAVID OGILVIE WHITE, MD BS Syd. PhD A.N.U. MSc FRCPA

Readers WILLIAM ROYLE, BSc PhD Glas. IAN HAMILTON HOLMES, PhD A.N.U. BSc NANCY MILL'S, MBE PhD Brist. MAgrSc FTS ROY MICHAEL ROBINS-BROWNS, MB BCh PhD DTMH Witw.

FFPath S.Afr. MRCPath

Senior Lecturers

CHRISTINA CHEERS, BSc PhD JOAN FORREST GARDNER, DPhil Oxf. ‚Sc DORIS MARY GRAHAM, MSc A.N.U. PhD Lind. BSc BRIAN HODGSON, BSc PhD Leeds RUSSELL GEORGE WILKINSON, 'Sc W.Aust. PhD Lind.

140

Teaching Staff

Senior Tutors

ENE READE, BSc Adel. 'LYNETTE HOWDEN, BSc 'DOROTHY SLATER, MSc

Research Fellows

ELIZABETH MARGOT ANDERS, BSc PhD HELEN CAMAKARIS, BSc PhD ROBERT BRENT DAVEY, BSc PhD DAVID JACKSON, BSc Lind. PhD A.N.U. SUZANNE RODGER, BSc PhD HEATHER SCHNAGL, BSc PhD PAUL RICHARD WOOD, BSc W.Aust. PhD A.N.U. PETER JOHN WOOKEY, BSc PhD A.N.U.

Senior Associates

tJOCELYN ROBERT LANE FORSYTH, MD ChB Cape T. DipBact Lind. FRCPA (Director, Microbiological Diag-nostic Unit)

tPETER CAVANAGH, MD BCh MA Dubl. DipBact FiBiol Lind. FRCPA

tIAN DAVID GUST, MD BS BSc(M е d) DipBact Lind. FRCPA tJOHN HALSEP ANDREW, BMedSci Otago MB ChB Otago

MRCPath FRCPA tGWENDOLYN LESLEY GILBERT, MB BS FRALP FRCPA tEUGENE ROBIN PAVILLARD, MB BS Lind. FRCPA tFREDERICK ANGELO TOSOLINI, MB BS Adel. PhD A.N.0

FRCPA

Associate

¡KENNETH JOHN HARVEY, MB BS FRCPA

Obstetrics and Gynaecology: Royal Women's Hospital

Chairman of Department and Dunbar Hooper Professor

ROGER JAMES PEPPERELL, MD Monash MB BS MGO FRACP FRCOG FRACOG

Professor JAMES BOYER BROWN, 'Sc N.Z. & Melb. PhD DSc Edin. Hon.FRAC/Gt

First Assistant (Neonatal Paediatrics)

WILLIAM HENRY KITCHEN, MD BS FRACP

First Assistant (Obstetrics and Gynaecology)

JOIN RICHARD HENRY FLIEGNER, MD BS MGO FRCS Edin. FRACS MRCOG FRACOG

Senior Lecturers

RAPHAEL JOIN PAUL KUHN, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG ALEXANDER LOPATA, MB BS PhD MICHAEL ANTHONY QUINN, MB ChB MGO MRCP U.K.

MRCOG FRAGIG MARGERY ADA SMITH, BSc PhD

141

Faculty of Medicine

Lecturer

LEX WILLIAM DOYLE, MB BS FRALP

Clinical Assistant

JAMES HENRY EVANS, MD BS MRCP Edin. FRCOG FRALOG FRALP

Felix Meyer Scholar

LESLIE LEWIS RETI, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG

Thalia Roche Demonstrator in Obstetrics

IAN CHARLES ROSS, MB BS MGO FRCOG FRALOG

Research Staff LESLIE ANN BAKER, BSc JANE ELIZABETH BASLIME, BSc 'GEOFFREY WILLIAM FORD, MB BS FRALP 'SUSAN ANN GIBES, MSc ROSS VINCENT HYNE, BSc W.Aust. MSc PhD N'aie 'JEAN VALERIE LISSENDEN, SRN sun NNEB MARION JOAN MARTIN, MSc PhD Lind. 'ANNE RICKARDS, MS MAPsS 'MARGARET MARY RYAN, BA DipSocStud MSW

Senior Associates

tFREDERICK DOUGLAS ADEY, MB BS FRCOG FRALOG tJOHN STANLEY BARNES, MB BS FRCS Edin. MRCOG

FRACOG tJEAN UNITA BARRIE, BSc PhD tFRANK REX BETHERAS, MB BS FRCOG FRALOG tGYTHA WADE BETHERAS, MB BS FRCOG FRALOG tLOUIS JOHN HARRISON BUTTERFIELD, MB ChB N.Z.

DObst MRCOG FRACOG tGARRY DONALD BYRNE, MB BS MRCOG FRCS Edin.

FRACOG tMAURICE CAUCHI, MSc MD PhD DPH FRCPA tWILLIAM GRANEN, MB BS DGO FRCS Edin. FRAOS FRCOG

FRACOG tMAXWELL ERIC COLE, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG tRUTH DAVOREN, MB BS FRCPA MIAC tDENYS WOODESON FORTUNE, MB ChB Brist. MRCP Edin.

FRCPath FIAC FRCPA tPETER PEREZ GLENNING, MB BS MGO FRCS Edin. FRAOS

FRCOG FRACOG t PETER HEATH, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG UVAN HORACEK, MB BS FRCPA AAIM tWALTER IAN HAREWOOD JOHNSTON, MB BS MGO FRCOG

FRACOG tMICHAEL KLOSS, MB BS FRCOG FRAGIG tBARRY LEE GRIFFITHS KNEALE, MB BS MG/ FRACS

FRCOG FRACOG tLESLIE MARKMAN, MB BS MRACP tKENNETH RAYMOND MOUNTAIN, MB BS DCH FRALP MPS

t Personal Chair in the Department of Obstetrics and Gynaecology.

142

Teaching Staff

tJOHN RICHARD LEE NEIL, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG tANDREW GEORGE OSTER, MB BS FRCPA tJOHN DAVID PAULL, MB BS DipEd FFARACS tGRAEME JOHN RATTEN, MB BS MRCOG FRAGIG tDONALD JOHN RAWLING, MB BS MRCOG FRCS Edin.

FRACOG tHUGH PETER ROBINSON, MD Glas. ChB Glas. IRCOG

FRALOG DDU tROBERT MALCOLM ROME, MB BS MRCOG FRCS Edin.

FRACOG tIAN CHARLES ROSS, MB BS MGO FRCOG FRALOG tROBERT NEIL ROY, MB BS FRALP

Associates

tHUGH WILLIAM GORDON BAKER, MD BS PhD FRALP tGEOFFREY ALAN CLARKE, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG tTHOMAS RONALD EGGERS, MB BS MACOG FRALOG tGWENDOLINE LESLEY GILBERT, MB BS FRALP FRCPA tSTANLEY BRUCE JOHNSON, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG tNEIL ROBERT JOHNSTONE, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG tcNRISYOPHER NORMAN MAXWELL, MB BS MRCOG

DipVen Lend. FRALOG tJOHN CLARK McBAIN, MB ChB MRCOG FRALOG tGEOFFREY DENNIS MIGLIORINI, MB BS MACOG FRALOG tGRAHAM DAMIEN MILLER, MB BS MACOG FRALOG tLAWRENCE JAMIESON MURTON, MB BS FRALP tLESLIE LEWIS RETI, MB BS MACOG FRALOG tANDREW LENNOX SPEIRS, MB BS MACOG FRALOG tREUBEN WEIN, MB BS MACOG FRALOG

Obstetrics and Gynaecology: Mercy and Austin Hospitals


NORMAN ALBERT BEISCHER, MD BS MGO FRCS Edin. FRACS FRCOG FRACOG

First Assistants (Obstetrics and Gynaecology)

'JAMES ERNEST BREHENY, MB BS FRALP JEREMY NICOLLE OATS, MB BS Adel. MRCOG FRALOG

First Assistant (Neonatal Paediatrics)

JOHN HEDLEM DREW, MD BS FRALP

Senior Lecturers

'DAVID ALAN ABELL, MB BS MGO FLOG S.A. MACOG FRACOG

'PETER CAPELL DOBSON, MBBS FRCS Edin. MRCOG FRACOG

Lecturers

tJAMES BOYER BROWN, MSc N.Z. & Mo/b. DSc Edin. FRACOG

tRUTH DAVOREN, MB BS FRCPA MIAC

143

Faculty of Medicine

tDENYS WOODESON FORTUNE, MB ChB Bristol MRCP Edin. FRCPA FIAC FRCPath

•ROBERT SHOLTO PLANNER, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG

Research Fellow

tGRAEME JOHN RATTEN, MB BS FRCOG FRALOG

Research Staff

MICHELLE MARY WILLIS

Senior Associates

tCHRISTINE MARY ACTON, MB BS MRACR DDU tPETER WINTER ASHTON, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG tCHARLES ANTONIO BARBARO, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRACS

FRCOG FRALOG tKEVIN ALBERT BARHAM, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FRCOG

FRACOG tDONALD PUI-CHEE CHAN, MB BS Ing. Kig. FRCS Edin.

FRCS Glas. MMSA Land. FRCOG FRACOG tROBERT WILLIAM COWIE, MB BS FFARACS tMICHAEL SHINE FORREST, MB BS FRCOG tJOHN BOWES HOBES, BSc(Med) MBBS Syd. PhD A.N.U.

FRCPA tPETER ANTHONY LONG, MB BS Syd. MRCOG FRALOG tIAN ALEXANDER MACISAAC, MB BS FRCS FRACS FRCOG

FRACOG tGERALD ARTHUR MANLY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FRCOG

FRACOG tWILLIAM MICHAEL SOMERVILLE, MB BS FRCS Edin.

FRCOG FRALOG tLEON ISRAEL TAFT, BSc MB BS FRCPA FRCPath

Associates

tDAVID ERNEST FRANCIS, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG tLAWRENCE IVAN HATHERLEY, LRCP MRCS FRACGP t ROBERT JOHN HORSFALL, MB BS FRAOS MRCOG FRALOG tPETER JOHN MARER, MBBS Mon. MRCOG FRALOG tEDWARD FRANCIS O'SULLIVAN, MB BS FRALP tCHRISTOPHER STEPHEN TARGETT, MB BS MRCOG FRCS

Edin. FRALOG tADRIAN KINGSLEY THOMAS, MB BS W.A. MRCOG FRALOG tJOHN DAVID THORBURN, MB BS Syd. FRALP tHOWARD MACDONALD WALKER, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG

Ophthalmology

Chairman of Department and Ringland Anderson Professor

GERARD WILLIAM CROCK, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FRALP FRACO

First Assistant

HECTOR MacLEAN, MB ChB DO Lind. FRCS Edin.

144

Teaching Staff

Senior Lecturers

'KENNETH PAUL GULLIFER, MB BS FRACS FRACO 'FAYE ANNETTE WALKER, MB BS FRACS FRACO

Senior Research Fellow

'MAGDA HORVAT, MD Budapest

Research Fellow

ANTHONY THEODORE DE KEIZER, BE(EIec) MEngSci(Elec)

Senior Associates

tJAMES DAVID CAIRNS, MB BS l'id DO FRCS Lind. & Edin. FRACS FRACO

tJOHN LLEWELLYN COLVIN, MB BS l'id DO R.C.P. & S. Lind. FRCS(Ophth) Edin. FRACS(0phth) FRACO

tJULIAN BERNARD HEINZE, MB BS DO FRCS FRACS FRACO f PETER NEIL HENDERSON, MB BS DO FRACS FRACO ?KENNETH GEORGE HOWSAM, MB BS DO FRACS FACIA

FRACO ?ALAN ISAACS, MB BS DO Lind. LOSc FRACO ?BERNARD McCARTHY O'BRIEN, BSc MB BS FRCS FRACS

FRACO tIAN FLETI ROBERTSON, MB BS DO R.C.P. & S. FRACS

FRACO tJOSEPH WING SANG YEUNG, MB BS DipAmBOphth FRACO

FRACS

Research Associate fRAMOLA RASALAM, MB BS Vellore DO Lind.

Otolaryngology

Chairman of Department and William Gibson Professor

GRAEME MILBOURNE CLARK, MB MS PhD Syd. FRCS Lind. & Edin. FRACS

First Assistant

QUENTIN RICHARD BAILEY, MA MB Lamb, DLO FRACS

Lecturer FIELD WINSTON RICKARDS, MEd(Audiol) lans. BSc

Fellow BURKHARD FRANZ, MB Mar. BS Iamb.

Senior Associates

'JOHN EDWARD DELAHUNTY, MB BS Syd. DLO FRCS FRA CSI

'RICHARD PETER FREEMAN, MD DLO FRCS FRACS 'HUGH MILLAR, MB BS DLO FRCS FRACS CONSTANCE BEATRICE NAPIER, DLO R.C.P. & S. MRCS

LRCP 'CLIVE PYMAN, MB BS DLO FRAOS 'COLIN RICHARDS, DLO FRACS 'JOHN ROBERT THOMSON, MB BS O'Id DLO FRFPS Glas. 'RORY WILLIS, MB BS DLO FRCS FRAOS

145

Faculty of Medicine

Associates 'PETER ADRIAN GREY, MB BS DLO FRACS FRCS 'PARTHA SARATHY KATTULA, BA MB BS And. DLO And. &

Melb.

Research Fellows

RAYMOND COLIN BLACK, MSc PhD PETER JOHN BLAMEY, BSc PhD Monash RICHARD CHARLES DOWELL, BSc DipAud 'BRIAN CLIVE PYMAN, MB BS DLO FRACS ROBERT KEITH SHEPHERD, BSc leak. DipEd scovi ROBERT KEITH SHEPHERD, BSc Deak. DipEd Scovh 'ROBERT LANGLEY WEBB, MB BS DLO FRACS VIT CHOW TONG, BE PhD

Engineers

GRANT ASHLEY DACOSTA, BE JAMES MARK HARRISON, BE PETER MISHA SELIGMAN, BE PhD lonash

Programmer

JONATHAN EDWIN RIDLER, BSc A.N.U.

Research Assistants

ALAN ERIC BARKER, BSc DAVID MORRIS BLOOM, BAppSc ALISON MARION BROWN, BSc DipAud PETER ANDREW BUSBY, BA Monash MA A.N.U. DipAud BRIAN JOHN LITHGOW, BSc BE PHILLIP MAXWELL LUKTES, BSc SUSAN MARY LUSCOMBE, BSc DipAud LOIS FRANCIS MARTIN, BSc DipAud JANE SUSILAWATA NG, BA Macq.

Senior Tutor in Audiology

ANGELA MARSHALL, MA DipAud

Tutor in Otolaryngology

'MARK STEPHEN KLEID, MB BS

Tutors in Audiology

'DEBORAH GRACE, BA DipAud 'SHEINA NICHOLLS, MA(Audiol) N.M. West

Paediatrics

Chairman of Department and Stevenson Professor

VACANT (from 1/1/83)

Royal Children's Hospital Research Foundation Professor

DAVID MILES DANKS, MD BS FRACP

1. Also an Honorary Research Fellow.

148

Teaching Staff

First Assistants

WILLIAM GEOFFREY COLE, MSc McG. MB BS FRAOS 'JOHN MAURICE COURT, MB BS FRALP IAN JAMES HOPKINS, MD BS FRALP DAVID ALEXANDER McCREDIE, BSc MD BS FRALP MAXWELL JAMES ROBINSON, MD BS FRALP 'HOWARD ERNEST WILLIAMS, MD FRALP

First Assistants -(Neonatal Paediatrics)

JOHN HEDLEM DREW, MD BS MRACP WILLIAM HENRY KITCHEN, MD BS FRALP

Senior Lecturer

•DAVID BUXTON PITT, MD BS FRALP

Lecturers

GARRY KENNETH BROWN, BSc MB BS PhD ALLAN CARMICHAEL, MB BS FRALP 'ALAN ARTHUR WOODWARD, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Professorial Associate •NATHANIEL ALBERT ALFRED MYERS, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Senior Associates (Research)

RUTH FRANCIS BISHOP, BSc PhD DSc RICHARD GRAHAM HAY COTTON, В AgrSc PhD

Associates (Research)

XENIA DENNETT, BSc PhD WINIFRED MARY ELLIS, BSc Phb IAN JACK, MSc JULIAN FRANCIS BERTRAND MERCER, BSc PhD GRAHAM CHARLES WEBB, BSc PhD JOHN FRANCIS BATEMAN, BSc PhD

Senior Associates

ALEXANDER WILLIAM AULDIST, MB BS FRAOS GRAEME LAURENCE BARNES, MD BS Otago FRALP JOHN SADLER BARNETT, MB BS FRACS FRANK IVOR BISHOP, MB BS FRCS FRANZCP DAVID WILLIAM BOLDT, MB ChB Otago DRACR MRACR FREDERICK NICOLET BOUVIER, MB BS FRACGP NOEL MORRIS LASS, MB BS FFARCS FFARACS NEIL THOMAS CAMPBELL, MB BS FRALP PETER ELLIS CAMPBELL, MB BS FRCPA JOHN FRANCIS CONNELLY, MD BS MAACB HENRY EKERT, MD BS FRALP FRCPA ROBERT FOWLER, MD BS FRAOS GEOFFREY LEON GILLAM, MB BS FRALP ROGER KINGSLEY HALL, MDSc FRAODS CLIFFORD SHELLEY HOSKING, MD BS FRALP FRCPA JOHN GORDON HUNTER, MB BS FRALP DPM JAMES ASHTON KEIPERT, MB BS FRCPE DCH CYRIL GREGORY KEITH, MB BS Enol, FRCS FRACS MACO

147

Faculty of Medicine

JOHN ROBERT KELLY, MD BS FRCP FRALP JUSTIN HENRY KELLY, MB BS FRAOS MAXWELL KENT, MB BS FRAOS GEOFFREY LEWIS KLUG, MB BS FRAOS JUSTIN EUSTACE KEOGH, MB BS FRCS FRAOS LOUIS ISAAC LANDAU, MD BS FRALP THOMAS GLOVER MADDISON, MD BS Adel. FRALP VALERIE MAYNE, MB BS FRALP SAMUEL MENAHEM, MD BS FRALP MALCOLM BENBOW MENELAUS, MD BS FRCS FRAOS WILLIAM WALL WARNER MOONEY, MB BS FALS FRCS

FRAOS IAN PETER McINTYRE, MB BS MRCPE MARGERY CLARE McKiNNON, MB BS FRALP DCH JOHN MARTIN McNAMARA, MB BS FRALP BERNARD WILLIAM NEAL, MD BS FRALP DipEd FRANK OBERKLAID, MB BS FRALP DCH PETER DUHIG PHELAN, BSc MD BS Q'/d FRALP HARLEV ROBERT POWELL, MB BS FRALP WINSTON SELBY RICKARDS, MD BS BSc FRALP FRANZCP

FRCPsych ABPsS MAPsS DPM LLOYD KEITH SHIELD, MB BS FRALP LIONEL ERIC GEORGE SLOAN, MB В S FRALP FRACMA EDWARD DURHAM SMITH, MD MS FRAOS FALS JOIN RIDLEY SOLOMON, MB BS FRCS FRAOS GEOFFREY PHILLIP TAURO, MB BS FRCPA PhC ALEXANDER WYNNE VENABLES, MD BS FRALP ELISABETH MAUD WANN, BA MB ChB Dubl. FRANZCP KEITH DANIEL WATERS, MB BS FRALP GARRY LEIGH WARNE, MB BS FRALP ALAN LLEWELLYN WILLIAMS, MD BS 'CPA FRCPA PETER FREDERICK WILLIAMS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Associates

ALAN DOUGLAS BRYAN, MB BS FRALP ENVER BAJRASZEWSKI, MB BS DCH FRALP DONALD JAMES CAMERON, MB BS FRALP ELIZABETH CARSE, MB BS FRALP ANTHONY PHILIP JOSEPH CHANDRASEKERA, MB BS Ceyl.

DPM Engl. and lreI. GEORGE LAWRENCE CHRISTIE, BSc DPM FRANZCP

MRCPsych OHUNG WO CHOW, MB BS FRCPA KEVIN JOHN COLLINS, MB BS FRALP OWEN RUSSELL COLE, MB BS FRAOS FALS PETER DERMOTT GURWEN-WALKER, MB BS FRCS HAROLD EDWARD DAVIES, BSc IAACB PETER FRANCIS DAVlDsON, BA MAudSA JOHN DE CAMPO, MB BS DRACR DAVID ROBERT VERNON DICKENS, MB BS FRAOS CYNTHIA EDGELL, LACST MAASR BRIAN DAVID EDIS, MB BS FRALP HUGH ROBERT GARNER, MB BS MRANZLP TIOW HOE GOH, MB BS FRALP

148

Teaching Staff

HENRY GRANT HAMMOND, MB BS DLO DENNIS WARREN HAIN, MB BS FRALP ANTHONY DAVID HOLMES, MB BS FRACS DAMIAN CHRISTOPHER ROCH IRELAND, MB BS FRACS

FRCS HELEN JULIE JONES, BSc FRANZCP DPM DipCrim EDMOND HENRY KEIR, BA TTCTD MApsS MAudSA PATRICIA LEAPER, MA PhD PHYLLIS LEWIS, MB BS FRANZCP DPM MRCPsych JUDITH LINNANE, MB BS MRANZCP DPM PETER MICHAEL LOUGHNAN, MB BS FRALP ANNE MORGAN, MB BS DCH ANTHONY OLINSKY, MD ChB DipPaed FCPSA DINAH SUSAN REDDIH0UGH, BSc MB ChB FRALP JOHN GRAHAM ROGERS, MB BS DCH FRALP KATHERINE SYLVIA ROWE, MB BS FRCP MICHAEL SIMON SILVERSTEIN, MB BS FRAOS FRCSE FRCS KEITH BRADLEY STOKES, MB BS FRACS SUZANNA TARYAN, MB BS MRANZCP JOIN WILLIAM VORRATH, MB BS FRCS FRACS


PETER GRIFFITH JONES, MB MS FRCS FRACS FAGS JEANNINE PATIN, BSc MB BS

Pathology

Chairman of Department and Professor JOIN VICTOR HURLEY, MD BS PhD FRACP FRCPA FRCPath

Professor (with part-time duties in Medical History)

HAROLD DALLAS ATTWOOD, MD ChB St.And. MD FRACP FRCPA FRCPath

Professor

IAN FARQUHAR CAMPBELL McKENZIE, MD BS PhD FRACP FRCPA#

Professor/Director of Pathology Royal Melbourne Hospital

tpRITRVlpALL SINGH 6HATHAL, MB BS Adel. PhD FRCPA

Reader in Neuropathology

ROSS McDONALD ANDERSON, MB BS FRCPA MRCPach

Senior Lecturers

KATHRYN NAKASHIAN HAM, BA Calif. MD Chic. PhD JOIN DAMIEN TANGE, RD MB BS FRCP FRALP FRCPA

Senior Lecturer at Austin Hospital

CHRISTOPHER JOHN LOUIS, MB BS PhD FRCPath

Senior Lecturer at Repatriation General Hospital

SHEUNG TO CHOU, MB Taiwan PhD H.K. MRCPath

149

Faculty of Medicine

Lecturers

THELMA JEAN BAXTER, MSc PhD REX NEWBURY LE PAGE, MSc Adel. PhD IAN SELWYN ROBINSON, MB BS O'1á. FRCPA PETER JOHN THURLOW, MB BS FRALP FRCPA

Stewart Lecturer

VACANT

Lecturer-Demonstrators

'MICHAEL PHILIP KENDAL SHOOBRIDGE, MB BS DCP Lind. FRCPA

'ALISON KINNEAR GARVELA, MB BS Syd. DCP FRALP FRCPA

Senior Associates in Pathology

tMAURICE NICHOLAS CAUCHI, MD Maita MSc PhD Lind. DPI R.C.P. & Ѕ . FRCPA MRCPath

tDAVID JOHN DAVIES, BSc ChB MD Liv. FRCPA tNORMAN ALEXANDER DAVIS, MB BS FRCPA tDENYS WOODESEN FORTUNE, MB ChB Brist. FRCP Edin.

FRCPA FRCPath tPHILIP NORMAN JENNINGS TRONSIDE, MB BS DipPath Eng.

MAACB FRCPA tVERNON DOUGLAS PLUECKHAHN, 03E ED MD BS Adel.

FRALP FRCPA FRCPath FAACB MIAC tFREDERICK ANGELO TOSOLINI, MB BS Adel, PhD A.N.U.

FRCPA tBEN MacMAHON WADHAM, MB BS DCP Lind. FRCPA

FRCPath MIAC tJAMES SА VILLE WILEY, BSc Oxf. MD BS Syd. FRALP FRCPA tALAN LLEWELLYN WILLIAMS, MD BS FRCPA tJOSEPH MICHAEL XIPELL, MB BS FRCPA MIAC tVALENTINE HUGH YOUNG, MB BS DCP Lind. MRCPath

Research Fellows

'JILL MERRILYN BLUNCK, MB BS PhD 'NORMAN PETER MADSEN, MSc PhD O'/w. CLAUDIA ANN MICKELSON, BSc Antioch College, Ohio MSc

PhD Rochester, N.Y. GEOFFREY ALLAN PIETERSZ, BSc CHRISTOPHER HENRY THOMPSON, BSc Monash tROBERT GURNER WYLLIE, MB BS Adel. MLA Johns H.

Associates in Pathology

tJOHN MICHAEL CONNELLAN, BSc O'Id. PhD A.N.U. tMERVYN PATRICK HEGARTY, MSc PhD O'Id. FRAC1 tJOHN GORDON ROWAN HURRELL, BSc PhD fiHENRY JOIN COOK lREYON, MD Tor. FRCPA tDIANE MARIE WILSON, MB BS FRALP

National Health & Medical Research Council Senior Research Officers

PHILLIP MARK H0GARTH, BSc PhD MAURO SERGIO SANDRIN, BSc PhD

150

Teaching Staff

Senior Research Officer

IAN WALKER, BSc PhD Adel.

Research Scholars

JOHN ANDREW MUNRO GALL, BSc Q'Id. BRIAN LESLIE GRILLS, BSc HOWARD JOHN GROSSMAN, BSc MB BS MARK AUSTIN HENRY, BSc GAYLE MAREE JONES, BSc ROBERT WILLIAM LAMBERT, BSc KATHLEEN ERIN LOVERING, BSc ROBERT ARMOUR PAINE, BSc CHRISTOPHER MARK PILBEAM, BMedSc MB BS JULIENNE RADFORD, BSc A.N.U, MALCOLM CHARLES SMAIL, BSc ROSEMARY LOUISE SPARROW, BSc Monash VIVIEN RUTH SUTTON, BSc TAMARA SZTYNDA, MSc JOSEPH ALBERT TRAPANI, MB BS NICK VARDAXIS, BSc JOHN RAYMOND ZALCBERG, MB BS

Pharmacology

Professor MICHAEL JOHN RAND, PhD Syd. MSc

Reader in Applied Pharmacology, joint appointment with Department of Medicine, St. Vincent's Hospital MAURICE LAURENCE MASHFORD, MB BS Syd. MSc FRALP

Senior Lecturers MAX RAPHAEL FENNESSY, BSc PhD MARIAN WYN McCULLOCH, BSc Land. MSc PhD MICHAEL WILLIAM NOTT, PhD Strath. BSc DAVID FREDERICK STORY, BSc PhD

Lecturer JORMA TAPIO AHOKAS, BSc Q'Id. PhD Oulu

Lecturer in Pharmacy

LOUIS ROLLER, MSc BPharm PhC FPS DipEd ARACI

Principal Tutor

WAN SOON GAY, MSc

Senior Tutor

CATHERINE SARANTOS-LASKA, BSc PhD

Senior Associates

tALLEN CHRISTOPHERS, MB BS BSc DipPH Syd. tJOCELYN NINA O'NEIL, MSc PhD Syd. t COLIN RAPER, BPharm PhD Lind. PhC MPS

Senior Research Fellow

JANINA STASZEWSKA-BARCZAK, MD PhD Warsaw

t Personal Chair in the Department of Pathology.

151

Faculty of Medicine


ANTHONY JOHANNES MARIA VERBERNE, BSc PhD

Research Officer IRENE SUTTON, PhD Lind. BSc

Graduate Research Assistant HELEN WONG-DUSTING, BSc PhD

Physiology

Chairman of Department and Reader SANDFORD LLOYD SKINNER, BS MD Adel. FRACP

Professors

ALLAN JOHN DAY, BS MD Adel. DPhil Oxf. DSc IAN DARIAN-SMITH, BS MD Adel.

Readers

CHRISTOPHER BELL, MSc PhD DSc ELVIE MARELYN WINTOUR-COGHLAN, MSc PhD

Senior Lecturers

MARY HAZEL DEAN CHENNELLS, BSc PhD Lind. JOHN SIMON McKENZIE, MSc PhD KENNETH HILL S Н ANKLY, MSc NEIL THOMAS WILLIAMS, PhD

Lecturers

JOHN MICHAEL DAVIS, MSc PhD ANTHONY WILFRED GOODWIN, MSc PhD Cal. Tech. ROBERT EDWARD KEMI, MSc PhD

Senior Tutor

LYNETTE NOEL WILCOCK, MSc

Tutors

GEORGE KWEIFIO-OKAI, BSc Q'Id. MSc Syd. GRAHAM DOUGLAS LAMB, MSc JOHN WILLIAM MORLEY, MSc


SUGITANI MIChIO, BSc Kyoto MD Osaka


KANCHANA KANCHANASUT, BSc DipCompScl Q'Id. MSc BRIAN DAVID MULLER, BSc Monash LESLEY WALKER, BSc Monash

Psychiatry


BRIAN MICHAEL DAVIES, ID BCh Wales DCH DPM Lend. FRCP FRACP FRANZCP FRCPsych

152

Teaching Staff

Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital

Senior Lecturer (Repatriation General Hospital)

PAUL EDWARD DEBENHAM, MA MB BChir Climb, MPhil Lind. MRCP MRCPsych MRANZCP

Senior Lecturer (Austin Hospital)

EDWIN HARARI, MB BS DPM MRANZCP

Lecturer (Austin Hospital)

PAUL WENDIGGENSEN, MD Hamburg MRCPsych Lind. MRANZCP

Senior Associates In Psychiatry

tDAVID JOHN HARDING BARLOW, BA MB Witw. FACIA DUM MRCPsych FRANZCP

tJAMES ALEXANDER CARSON, MB BS Syd. DPM Lond. MRCPsych MRANZCP

tJOHN MATHEW FIELDING, MD DPM FRANZCP MRCPsych tTERRY GIDLEY, MB BS DPM MRANZCP tNORMAN GOLD, MB BS Lind. MRCS LRCP MRSPsу ch

FRANZCP tJOHN HANSON LLOYD, MB ChB DRCOG DPM FRANZCP tJAMES STEVENSON, MB ChB Edin. DipSocMed Edin.

FRANZCP tBRUCE JAMES TINGE, MB BS Monesh DPM MRCPsych

FRANZCP

Associates in Psychiatry

tALGAFPA ARUMUGAM, MB BS FRANZCP tWENDY BRUMLEY, MA PhD tMAXWELL BRUCE GAYNER, MB BS DPM MRCPsych

MRANZCP tARTHUR WILLIAM HARRISON, MAgrSci MB ChB DPM

MRANZCP tSTEPHEN DOUGLAS JOSHUA, MB BS MRCPsych

MRANZCP tZYGMUNT KAMINSKI, BMedSc MB BS DPM Otago

MRANZCP tJOHN GODFREY KING, MB BS DPM MRANZCP tCRISTEA MILESHKIN, MB BS Syd. DPM Lind. MRANZCP tANTHONY BEVAN OWEN, MB BS DPM MRANZCP t В ASIL PINKEY, MB BCh BAO Dub. MRCP MRANZCP tRANVIR KIMAR SODD, MB BS MRANZCP

Clinical Instructors In Psychiatry tDAVID LINLEY HARE, MB BS DPM MRANZCP FRACP t MARY FRANCES LYON GRAHAM, BSc MD Illinois tRICHARD JOHN KELLY, MB BS MRACGP tSUMAPHY KRISHNASWAMY, MB BS MRANZCP t PAUL MO YAN LEE, MB BS MRANZCP tDAVID LIST, PhD MAPsS tJEANETTE MILGROM-FRIEDMAN, PhD MAPsS tCARLYLE FELICIAN PERERA, MB BS DPM MRANZCP

163

Faculty of Medicine

tGORDON ALFRED WILLIAM PRYOR, MB BS tJOHN EDWARD SHEEDY, MB BS FRACGP DPM t BARRY JOHN WILLIAMSON, MB BS DPM

Royal Melbourne Hospital

First Assistant and Reader

GRAHAM DENE BURROWS, BSc N.Z. MB ChB Otago MD DPM FRANZCP FRCPsych

Senior Lecturers

LORRAINE DENNERSTEIN, MB BS PhD DPM MRANZCP BRENDAN JOHN HOLWILL, MB BS Monash MRANZCP

Senior Lecturer in Medical Psychology

DAVID JAMES de LANCY HORNE, BA Adel. ‚Phil PhD Lind. ABPsS MAPsS

Lecturers In Medical Psychology

JULIE CORNWELL, BSc Monash MSc TPTC Т SрТ C MAPsS ROBB OWEN STANLEY, BSc BSc DipCrimPsych Cant. MAPsS

Tutors in Medical Psychology

ANNE D'ARCY EVANS, MSc MAPsS 'CHRISTINE SPENCER-GARDNER, BA DipAppSocPsych

Swinburne MAPsS

Research Fellow

TREVOR RONALD NORMAN, BSc PhD Adel.

Senior Associates in Psychiatry

tHERBERT MICHAEL BOWER, MD BS DPM FRANZCP MRCPsych

'ALLEN AUSTIN BARTHOLOMEW, MB BS DPM FRCPsych FRANZCP

tFRANK IVIR BISHOP, MB BS DPM FRANZCP tJOHN PAUL COGHLAN, DSc PhD tJOHN CHARLES PROCTOR CONE, MB BS MD FRANZCP

FRCPsych tHARRY ALFRED DERHAM, MB BS MRACP DPM FRANZCP tJACK LEWIS EVANS, MB BS Syd. DPM FRANZCP tPHILIP DAVID LEONARD, MB BS DPM FRANZCP tGEORGE LUCIEN LIPTON, MB BS FRANZCP FRACP

MRCPsych tJOHN HANSON LLOYD, MB ChB DROOG Lind. DPM

FRANZCP tWINSTON SELBY RICKARDS, BSc MD BS DPM FRACP

FRANZCP FRCPsych ABPsS MAPsS tBRUCE ALAN SCOGGINS, MAgrSc Comb, PhD t ТН OMAS BRINLEY STEPHENS, BSc MB BS FRCP FRCPsych

DPM DTY&H FRANZCP tWARREN MURRAY WHITE, MB BS DPM FRANZCP

MRCPsych

154

Teaching Staff


tBARBARA GWENYTH BURROWS, MB BS FFARACS tANNETTE WILSON CALLAN, MB BS FALD tJOAN CHRISTIE, SRN RPN DNA FRNA tGEORGE FOENANDER, BA MSc MAPsS tYVONNE GREENBERG, MB 8S DPM MRANZCP tARTHUR DAVID GROUNDS, MB 8S FRACP FRANZCP tROSS HOWARD MARTIN, MB BCh Otago DPM MRANZCP tGEORGE SZEGO, MB PhD MRANZCP tLIV10 ROGER TURECEK, MB BS DPM FRANZCP


tLESLEY JEAN GRANTON, MB BS PhD DPM tDAVID HORGAN, MB BCh BAO Dub. MPhil DPM Lind.

MRCPsych MRANZCP

St. Vincent's Hospital Director' Professor

tJAMES RICHARD BALDWIN BALL, MB BS Durh. MD N'cle. (U.K.) DPM FRANZCP

First Assistant

IVOR HUGH JONES, MD MRCP FRANZCP FRCPsych DPM Find PsychA

Senior Lecturer

EDMOND CHID, MB BS Q'id. DPM FRANZCP

Senior Associates in Psychiatry

tHERBERT MICHAEL BOWER, MD BS DPM FRANZCP tJOHN HANSON LLOYD, MB ChB DROOG Lind. DPM

FRANZCP tIAN HOLLAND MARTIN, MD BS Adel. DPM FRANZCP

FRCPsych tROWLAND ERIC SEAL, MA MB BS FRACP DPM FRANZCP tJAMES STEVENSON, MB ChB DipSocMed Edin. FRANZCP LENG-SEONG TAN, MB BS FRCPsych DPM FRANZCP


tMAXWELL BRUCE GAYNER, MB BS DPM MRCPsych FRANZCP

tDONALD CHARLES GRANT. MB BS Adel. DPM FRANZCP FRCPsych

tKWEE KEAT LIM, MA MB BCh BAO Dubi. MRCPsych MRANZCP

tMARGARET ANN EMMA PICKLES, BSc MB BS DPM MRANZCP IBA

tRICHARD JERZY PRYTULA, MB BS Monash FRANZCP tMOSES SATYADAS RASALAM, MB BS DPM FRCPsych

MRANZCP tRANVIR KIMAR SOOD, MB BS MD FRANZCP tNIGEL HENRY MARK STRAUSS, MB BS DPM MRANZCP tROBERT LAWSON YEWERS, MB BS DObstRCOG DPM

MRANZCP

166

• Faculty of Medicine


tLEONARDO CONGIU, MB BS DPM MRANZCP tNIC0LINO PAOLETTI, MB BS DPM MRANZCP

Parkville Psychiatric Unit and Institute of Mental Health Research and Postgraduate Training

Senior Associates

tJERZY KRUPINSKI, Medical degree Gdansk MD Warsaw DOCENT Warsaw

?MICHAEL JOHN MALONEY, MB BS MRCPsych MRANZCP

Associates tBARBARA URSULA CHARLOTTE KNOTHE, MB BS DPM t PETER JACOB PUSZET, MB BS MRANZCP

Associates in Medical Psychology

tGWEN GRAVES, MA М APsS t ТН OMAS VERBERNE, BA MAPsS

Radiology

Chairman of Department and Edgar Rouse Professor

WILLIAM SAMUEL CALHOUN HARE, MD BS DDR FRCR FRACR FRACP DDU

First Assistant

BRIAN MAXWELL TRESS, MB BS FRACR FROR

Senior Lecturer . JOSEPHINE SYBIL KAVANAGH, BMedSc MB BS MRACR

Senior Associates (Royal Melbourne Hospital)

tLEON SLONIM, MB BS DDU FRACR FROR ?JAMES ROBERT SYME, MB B$ Q'1d MD DDR FROR FRACR

FRACP

Senior Associate (St Vincent's Hospital)

tERIC JOHN GILFORD, MB BS FRACR FROR

Senior Associate (Austin Hospital)

tDAVID POWELL THOMAS, MB BS Q'Id DMRD Lind. FROR FRACR •

Senior Associate (Peter MacCallum Clinic)

?JOHN JOSEPH MARTIN, MB BS FROR FRACR

Senior Associate (Preston and Northcote Community Hospital)

tWINFIELD ROBERT CURTIS BENNETT, MB BS FROR FRACR

Senior Assoc'ate ('.lercy Нозра ')

f CHRISTINE MARY ACTON, MB BS DDU MRACR

Associates (Royal Melbourne Hospital)

TERRENCE DOYLE, MB BS MRACR DDR f MAURICE MALCOLM McKEOWN, MB BS DDR FRACR

156

Teaching Staff

DONALD MCOMISH, MB BS FRACS MRACR DDR WILLIAM JOSEPH ROGERS, MB BS MRACR MRACGP KENNETH ROBERT THOMSON, MB BS MRACR

Associate (Peter MacCallum Clinic)

tJOHN BARRY DRAKE, MB BS DDR MRACR

Senior Associate (Royal Children's Hospital)

DAVID WILLIAM BOLDT, MB BS Otago MRACR

Surgery: Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital

Chairman of Department and Professor KENNETH JOHN HARDY, MB BS FRACS FALS

Austin Hospital First Assistant

MALCOLM CHARLES DOUGLAS, MB BS FRACS

First Assistant in Orthopaedic Surgery

•JOHN EDWARD CRITCHLEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FALS

Lecturer DAVID ROWLEY FLETCHER, MB BS W.Aust. FRACS

Senior Associates

ALEXANDER WILLIAM AULDIST, MB BS FRACS JOHN ALLAN BUNTINE, MB BS FRAOS DAVID COLLIS BURKE, MB BS DPRM FRACS FRALP JAMES MURRAY CALVERT, MB BS FRCS FRAOS BARRY DESMOND COOTS, MB BS Syd. DO Lind. FRCS Edin.

FRCS FRAOS JAMES RUSSELL FERGUSON DOWNIE, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

JOHN MACKINNON GRANT, MB BS FRAOS GEORGE LIONEL GRAY, AO MB BS Q'Id. DLO FRCS FRAOS PETER FRANCIS HART, MB BS FRCS FRACS RONALD ATKINSON HURLEY, BCE MB BS MRACP MORA

FFR NEIL JOHNSON, MB MS FRCS FRAOS ANDREW ROBERT McLEISH, MB BS FRAOS JAMES GARDINER OGILVY, MB BS MRCOG FRCS Edin. JOHN PETERSON ROYLE, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS FRACS

FALS WILFRED LAURENCE SIMPSON, MB BS FCCP FRAOS ROBIN WILLIAM SMALLWOOD, MB BS FFARACS HAROLD FREDERIC ROWE STORY, MB BS FRCS FRACS LEONARD THOMAS STRETTON, MB BS Q'Id, FRAOS RODNEY ROBIN ADLINGTON SYME, MB BS FRCS FRAOS DAVID POWELL THOMAS, MB BS O'id. DMRD Lind. FFR

Lind. FRACR FRCR JOHN MICHAEL WOODWARD, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Associates

ALFRED ARTHUR ANDERSON, MB BS Ceylon DLO RDS Lind. ROBERT JOHN BARTLETT, MB 8S FRACS HARLEV KILGOUR BAXTER, MB BS FRACS

157

Faculty of Medicine

LAWRENCE DOOLAN, MB BS FFARCS Eng. IAN GUNN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS GEOFFREY ALLAN GUTTERIDGE, MB BS FFARACS BRYAN HARTLEY, MB BS MRACR FRACS FFR BOMAN NASHERWAN 'RAN', MB BS Bombay FRCS(C)

FRACS FALS BERNARD WISMUNDAS JARASIUS, MB BS FRAOS FRCS PETER KING, MB BS FRAOS PETER SUTHERLAND LAWSON, MB BS FRCS FRAOS LEONARD RUBIN LEVIN, MB BCH Witw. DMR CS RCP&S

DMRD Liv. MRACR DAVID ALEXANDER LYNCH, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRAOS PETER LAURENCE McNICOL, MB BS FFARCS Lind. KEITH CHARLES MARKWICK, MB BS Lind. FRCS DODA JOHN FALVEY O'BRIEN, MB BS FRAOS ANDREW KINGSLEY ROBERTS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FACS RODNEY JEFFERSON sill, MB BS FRAOS STEFAN JACEK SOKOLOWSKI, MUDr Vienna MD Gdansk GERARD WOLFE SORMANN, MB BS FRAOS MARK JOHN SULLIVAN, MB BS FFARACS JAMES TATOULIS, MB BS FRACS

Research Fellow

ARTHUR SHULKES, BSc PhD


GARY DAVID GROSSBARD, MB BS FRACS GRAEME ALEXANDER THOMPSON, MB BS FRACS FRCS FAME ANNETTE WALKER, MB BS FRACO FRACS

Repatriation General Hospital

Professor

GABRIEL ANDREW KUNE, MB BS FRACS FRCS FALS

First Assistant

AVNI SALI, MB BS PhD Monash FRACS

Senior Lecturer

•TREVOR JONES, MB BS FRACS

Senior Associates

JAMES HERBERT MARTIN, MB BS DO Melb. FRCS FRACS KENNETH JOHN MILLAR, MB BS FRCS FRAOS JAMES RICHARD McCOY, MB MS FRCS FRAOS LAURENCE RYAN, MB BS FRCS FRACS DLO MICHAEL JAMES SHANNON, MB BS FRAOS

Associates

ALAN JAMES BASHAM, MB BS FRACS ANTHONY JOHN CASS, MB BS FRAOS FRCS LINDSAY ALAN CASTLES, MB BS FRACS LAURENCE CLEEVE, MB BS FRACS HAROLD FRYDENBERG, MB BS FRACS MURRAY WILLIAM JOHNS, MB BS BSc PhD

158

Teaching Staff

PETER RUSSELL LITTLE, MB BS FRAOS ALAN MALCOLM NAGLEOD, MB BS FRAOS ANANTHASWAMY NAGESH, MB BS Mysore FRCS FRAOS DARYL HEATH NYE, MB BS FRAOS JOHN THOMAS GOODCHILD RENNEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS DAVID WILLIAM STONEY, MB BS FRAOS GORDON YOUATT, MB BS FFARACS

Surgery: Department of James Stewart Professor, The Royal Melbourne Hospital

Chairman of Department and James Stewart Professor

GORDON JAMES AITKEN CLUNIE, MB ChM Edin. FRCS FRCS Edin. FRACS

First Assistant

HARRY ROSS, MB BS FRACS

Senior Lecturers

JOHN FREDERICK FORBES, BMedSc MB MS FRAOS FRCS

'ROBERT JOHN SHEDDEN THOMAS, MB BS FRAOS FRCS (Stewart Scholar)

Senior Lecturer in Anaesthetics

DAVID PILKINGTON CRANKSHAW, MB BS PhD FFARACS

Senior Lecturer in Surgery to Dental Students

'JOHN RODNEY ALLSOP, MD BS FRACS

Lecturers

RODNEY THOMAS JUDSON, MB BS FRAOS FRCS PETER ALLEN BRAITHWAITE, MB BS FRCS


ANTONY WILKS BURGESS, BSc PhD ALAN MORTON CUTHBERTSON, MB MS FRCS FRAOS FAGS DONALD GORDON MACLEISH, MB MS FRCS FRAOS

Senior Associates

JAMES MATTHEW BELL, MB BS DA FFARACS DAVID SCOTT BARRINGTON BROWNBILL, MB BS FRACS JOHN PAXTON COLLINS, MB BS FRACS FRCS IAN ALLAN COOPER, MB BS FRALP FRCPA TREVOR TALBOT CURRIE, MB BS DA FFARCS FFARACS BRUCE ALEXANDER CRAWFORD, MB BS DO FRCS FRAOS

MACO tNANCYE EUNICE EDWARDS, MB BS FFARACS tPETER LLEWELLYN FIELD, MB BS FRAOS tWILLIAM BRIAN FLEMING, MB MS FRCS FRACS tJAMES EWEN KIRKWOOD GALBRAITH, OBE MB BS FRCS

FRACS tEDGAR ROBERT NISBIT GILLIES, MB BS FFARACS t FRANK JAMES HAM, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOHN TURNER HUESTON, MB MS FRCS FRAOS

159

Faculty of Medicine

tTHOMAS MICHAEL MACKENZIE LONG, MB 8S FRACS FRCS tIAN ALEXANDER McDONALD, MB 85 FRCS FRCOG FAGG tPATRICIA MACKAY, MB ChB N.Z. DA FFARCS FFARACS tGRAEME RODERICK MCLEISH, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FRCOG

FAG tHUGH SIMPSON MILLAR, MB BS DLO FRCS FRACS tKINGSLEY WALLIS MILLS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS ?PETER GUSTAV BRYAN NELSON, MB MS FRCS FRAOS

FACS tHERBERT NEWMAN, MB 8S DA FFARACS tIAN NORMAN NUNN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tALFRED OWIES, MB BS DA FFARACS tPETER REGINALD PRIDEAUX, MB ChB Liv. FFARACS LIAN SHEARER RUSSELL, MB MS FRCS FRACS tPETER ROBERT SCOTT, MB BS FRCS Lind. & Edin. FRAOS

FALS tNOEL DESMOND SHERSON. MB BS FRCS FRAOS ?GRAHAM ADLINGTON SYME, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tROWAN GEORGE WEBB, MB MS FRCS FRAOS tGEORGE WILLIAM WESTLAKE, MB BS FRAOS

Research Associates

tROBERT GEOFFREY ASHCROFT, BSc Syd. PhD N.S. W. tGRAHAM SHERARD BALDWIN, BSc PhD tROBERT HENRY WHITEHEAD, 'Sc Q'Id. PhD Wales

Visiting Research Fellow

'IBOLYA BARBARA NYULASI, DipSci Cert Diet MAAD

Graduate Research Assistants JUDITH ANN ALGER, ВВ Sс LaT,

BRIAN RICHARD HALL, BE(EIec) MAppSc RUSSELL LINDSAY THOMSON, MSc LaT. BRONWYN CLARE WRAITH, BSc

Professor Emeritus

MAURICE ROSSIE EWING, MB ChB Edin. HonMD Monash FRCS Lind. & Edin. FRACS HonFACS

Surgery: Department of Hugh Devine Professor, St. Vincent's Hospital

Chairman of Department and Professor RICHARD CLAYTON BENNETT, MB MS Adel. FRCS FRACS

First Assistant

BRUCE NATHANIEL GRAY, MB MS Tufts PhD FACS FRACS 'BRIAN THOMAS COLLOPY, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Senior Lecturers

JOHN GEORGE BULS, MB BS FRACS DABCRS 'ROY LAURENCE WILLIS FINK, MB 8S FRCS FRAOS (Guy

Miller Tutor) CHRISTOPHER JOHN MARTIN, MB BS syd. FRACS

160

Teaching Staff

Lecturers

'THELMA JEAN BAXTER, MSc PhD


tJOHN KEVIN cLARE8ROUGN, OBE MB BS FRCS FRAOS JOHN LEONARD CONNELL, MB MS FRCS FRAOS tHENRY VERNON CROCK, MD MS FRCS FRAOS

Senior Associates

tJOHN DOUGLAS ABERDEEN, MB BS FRAOS tTHOMAS EMMANUEL ANTONIE, MB BS FRCS FRAOS THOMAS GEORGE WILLIAM BAKER, MB BS FFARACS tHENRY MICHAEL BRAY, MB BS FFARACS tKENNETH STEWART BREARLEY, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS

FRACS tRALPH REGINALD CLARK, MB BS DA FFARCS FFARACS tBRENDAN JOHN DOOLEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOHN COUNDLEY DOYLE, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOHN BERNARD FETHERS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOHN KEITH HENDERSON, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tDESMOND GARVAN HURLEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOHN TIMOTHY KENNEDY, MB BS FRAOS DABO tKEVIN FRANCIS KING, MB BS FRCS FRACS tDANIEL LENAGHAN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS t JAMES RICHARD McCOY, MB MS FRCS FRACS tCOLIN FERGUSON MACDONALD, MB BS FRCOG tJAMES HERBERT STEPHENS MARTIN, MB BS DO FRCS

FRACS 1PETER JAMES MORTENSEN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tR1CHARD KERNAN NEWlNG, VRD MD BS FRCS FRACS JONATHAN RUSH, MB BS FRAOS tPETER JOHN RYAN, MB MS FRCS FRACS 1JAMES MICHAEL SHAW, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tVILIM STAN1S1CN, MB BS DA Lond, FFARCS FFARACS tPAUL KEITH STEEDMAN, MB BS FRCS FRACS tGORDON WALGRAVE TRINCA, MB BS FRAOS two DO^Д INIC VELLAR, MB BS FRCS FRACS tARTHUR FREDERICK WOOD, MB BS Adel. FFARACS

Associates

tJOHN HALSEY ANDREW, B М edSci MB ChB Otago MRCP Lind. FRCPA MASM

tDAVID LEE BALL, MB BS MRACR tFELIX CORNELIUS BEHAN, MB BS FRCS FRACS tABHOY KUMAR BIOWAL, MB BS FRACR tPETER FRANCIS BURKE, MB BS FRAOS FRCS tNOEL MORRIS CASs, MB BS FFARCS FFARACS tMAURICE JOHN CLIFFORD, MB BS FRACS tJAMES THOMAS CUMMINS, MB BS FRCS tMICHAEL JOSEPH DAVIES, MB BS FFARACS tANN DIAMOND, MB BS tCHARLES MARCEL DOMAINGUE, MB BS FFARACS tTERENCE CHARLES DOYLE, MB ChB Otago tJOHN FRANCIS GURRY, MB BS FRAOS FRCS

161 Е

Faculty of Medicine

'MICHAEL BARRIE HIGGINBOTHAM, BPharm MB BS FRACP tRUPERT NEVILLE HOOD, MB BS FRCS FRAOS 'FRANCESCO INCANI, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tAUBREY WILLIAM JANSZ, MB BS FRCS FRAOS 'JOSEPH GERARD JOYCE, MB BS FRAOS tJOSEPHINE KAVANAGH, MB BS MRACR tEUSTACE JULIAN KEOGH, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tALAIN MAURICE LAVOIPIERRE, MB BS MRACR tGERALD JAMES LITTLE, BCE LS MB BS DLO Loud. FRCS

(din. tBRUCE RICHARD TYLDÈN LOVE, MB BS FRAOS tJOHN RICHARD MACKAY, MB BS FRAOS FRCS tALAN MALCOLM MACLEOD, MB BS FRACS tOONALD McOMISH, FRAOS DDR MRACR DDR tRONALD JOHN MERCER, MB BS Syd. FRCS (din. FRAOS t PETER JULIAN METZNER, MB BS FRCS (din. FRAOS tWAYNE ALLAN JOHN MORRISON, MB BS FRACS tDARYL HEATH NYE, MB BS FRACS t BRIAN CLIVE PYMAN, MB BS DLO FRACS t PETER ANTHONY JOHN ROSS, MB BS BSci DMRD MRACR

FRACR tTERENCE BRYAN RUSHFORD, MB BS FFARACS tGARRY PATRICK SHERMAN, MB BS FRACS tSTANLEY FREDERICK SCHOFIELD, MB BS FRCS FRACS tARNOLD MAX SINGER, MB BS FRAOS tJAMES ROBERT SYNE, MB BS FRCS FRACS tJOHN WILLIAM McKENZIE UPJOHN, MB BS FRCS FRACS tOON1NIC VELLAR, MB BS FRACS FRCS tJOHN DENNIS V1DOVICH, MB BS FRACS FRCS t ROBERT LANGLEM WEBB, MB BS DLO FRACS tJOHN ZELCER, MB BS BMedSci FFARACS

STAFF FROM ASSOCIATED INST1TUTIONS

Recognized General and Special Hospitals

Clinical Instructors of the Austin Hospital and Repatriation Hospital Clinical Schools

Associate Dean (Clinical) of the Clinical School

BERNARD SWEET. MB BS FRACP FRCP

Hospital staff:

AUSTIN HOSPITAL

DEPARTMENT OF MEDICINE

Senior Physicians

ROBERT NEIL HOPE, MB BS FRALP ANDREW COLGATE NEWELL. MD BS FRALP BERNARD SWEET, MB BS FRCP FRAC?

162

Staff from Associated Institutions

Physicians

DAVID HARDING, MB BS DCH Lind. MRCP FRALP ROBERT LEFKOVIYS, MB 85 FRALP MARY ROSE STEWART, MB BS FRALP GWYNNE WILTON THOMAS, MD ChB DPhil MRCP FRALP

Assistant Physicians . SADANAND NEGESHROA ANAVEKAR, MB BS PhD FRALP

SANDFORD LLOYD SKINNER, MD BS Adel. FRALP JEFFREY MAX SLONIM, MB BS FRALP MAXIM WILSON, MD FRALP

Psychiatrists

KEITH ADEY, MB BS DPM JOHN EDWARD SHEEDY, MB BS FRACGP DPM

Senior Clinical Psychologist GEORGE ARTHUR STORY, BA DipEd DipPsych MAPsS MACE

Clinical Psychologist

KEVIN WALSH, BA MB BS MSc

DEPARTMENT OF CHILD ADOLESCENT PSYCHIATRY

Director of Child Psychiatric Services

BRUCE JOIN TONGE, MB BS Monash DPM MRCPsych MRANZCP

Senior Adolescent Psychiatrist

MIKE JONAS, MB BS MRANZCP DPM McG

Child Psychiatrist , ANGELICA ZIMMERMAN, MB BS FRCPCC MRANZCP

Assistant Child Psychiatrist

MICHAEL NEWINGTON EPSTEIN, MB BS Monash

DEPARTMENT OF SURGERY

Senior Surgeons

LEONARD THOMAS STRETTON, MB BS FRACS NEIL JOHNSON, MB MS FRCS FRACS JAMES RUSSELL FERGUSON DQWNIE, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Surgeon

PETER FRANCIS HART, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Senior Orthopaedic Surgeon

JOHN MACKINNON GRANT, MB BS FRACS

Orthopaedic Surgeons ROBERT JOHN BARTLETT, MB BS FRACS NEIL GRAEME CULLEN, MB BS FRACS JOHN FALVEY 0'RR1EN, MB BS FRACS RODNEY JEFFERSON SIMM, MB BS FRACS

163

Faculty of Medicine

Assistant Orthopaedic Surgeon

GARRY DAVID GROSSBARD, MB BS FRACS

Senior Cardiothoracic Surgeon

BRIAN FOWELL BUXTON, MB MS FRCS FRACS FACS

Cardiothoracic Surgeon

JAMES TATOULIS, MB BS FRACS

Thoracic Surgeon

WILFRED LAURENCE SIMPSON, MB BS FRACS FCCP

Senior Vascular Surgeon

JOHN PETERSON ROYLE, MB BS FRCS FRACS FRCS Edin.

Vascular Surgeon

ANDREW KINGSLEY ROBERTS, MB BS FRCS FRACS FAGS

Colo-Rectal Surgeon

ANDREW ROBERT McLE1SH, MB BS FRACS

Senior Neurosurgeon

JAMES MURRAY CALVERT, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Neurosurgeons

JOHN MICHAEL WOODWARD, MB BS FRCS STÉFAN JACEK SOKOLOWSKI, MUDr Vienna MD Gdansk

Senior Ophthalmologist

BARRY DESMOND COITE, MB BS Syd. DO Lind. FRCS Edin. FRCS FRACS

Ophthalmologist

KEITH MARKWICK, MB BS Lind. DO DA FRCS FRACS

Assistant Ophthalmologist

FAYE ANNETTE WALKER, MB BS FRACS FRACO

Senior Plastic Surgeon

JOHN ALLAN BUNTINE. MB BS FRACS

Assistant Plastic Surgeons

WILLIAM GILBERT, MB BS FRACS GERARD WOLFE SORMANN, MB BS FRACS

Senior Otolaryngologist

GEORGE LIONEL GRAY. AO MB BS l'id. DLO FRCS FRACS

Otolaryngologists

ALFRED ARTHUR ANDERSON, MB BS Ceylon DLO RCS DAVID ALEXANDER LYNCH, MB BS l'id. FRCS (din. FRACS

Assistant Otolaryngologist

BOMAN NASHERWAN IRANI, MB BS Bombay FRCS( С ) FRACS FRCS

164


Senior Urologist

HAROLD FREDERIC ROWE STORY, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Urologists

PETER SUTHERLAND LAWSON, MB BS FRCS FRACS RODNEY ROBIN ADLINGTON SYME, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Senior Paediatric Surgeon

ALEXANDER WILLIAM AULDIST, MB B5 FRACS

Paediatric Surgeon

EUSTACE JULIAN KEOGH, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Oral Surgeons

JOHN CAMPBELL, MDSc LDS FIAIS FRAODS JOHN BURNETT RICHARDSON, MB BS MDSc LDS

Director of Diagnostic Radiology

DAVID POWELL THOMAS, MB BS Q'Id. DMRD FRCR FRACR

Senior Radiologist

LEONARD LEVIN, MB BCh Witw. DMRD MRACR FRCR

Radiologist

BRYAN HARTLEV, MB BS MRCS LRCS FRAOS MORA FFR

Director of Anaesthesia

ROBIN WILLIAM SMALLWOOD, MB BS FFARACS

Assistant Director of Anaesthesia

GEOFFREY ALAN GUTTERIDGE, MB BS FFARACS

Staff Anaesthetists

STEPHEN CHARLES CHESTER, MB BS FFARACE LAWRENCE DOOLAN, MB BS FFARACS PETER LAURENCE McNICHOL, MB BS FFARACS MARK JOHN SULLIVAN, MB BS FFARACS

Anaesthetists

ROBERT WILLIAM COWIE, MB BS FFARACS MALCOLM EVANS, MB BS Lind. DA FFARACS NANCY LILIAN FERGUSON, MB BS DA FFARACS BRUCE SPALFORD OWEN FOX, MB BS FRACGP FFARACS EDGAR ROBERT NISBETT GILLIES, MB BS FFARACS JOHN KOHN, MB BS FFARACS JAMES ARTHUR LOWSON, MB BS FFARACS COLIN MacDONALD MELVILLE, MB BS DA Lind. FFARACSI

FFARACS SILVIA PLESMANN, MB BS FFARACS PHILLIP RUBINSTEIN, MB BS FFARACS MICHAEL JOHN SEYFORT, MB BS FFARACS COLUMBIA STEEDMAN, LRCP S1 LM Rotunda DA

Medical Director Spinal Injuries Unit

DAVID COLLIS BURKE, MB BS DPRM MRACP

165

Faculty of Medicine

Deputy Medical Director of Spinal Injuries Unit

GERALD UNGAR, MB ChB Liv. DipPhysMed

BOX HILL AND DISTRICT HOSPITAL


Senior Physicians

EDWARD FRANCIS O'SULLIVAN, MB BS FRALP GRAHAM THEODORE SCHMIDT, MB BS MRCP Edin. MRCP

Lind. FRALP CHARLES WILLIAM EDGAR WILSON, MB BS MRCP FRALP

Physicians

JAMES GEOFFREY HINDHAUGH, MB BS FRALP GEOFFREY DONALD KERR, MB BS FRALP PETER McINTOSH ROBERTSON, MB BS FRALP

Senior Dermatologist

PETER ALFRED BERGER, MB BS MRCP Edin. MACD


Senior Surgeons

RAYMOND HERBERT KERNUTT, MB MS FRACS FRCS GEOFFREY WILLIAM GLADSTONE SINCLAIR, MB MS FRACS

FRCS

Surgeons

JOHN ROBERT COCKS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS JOHN HARRIS McLEAN DAWSON, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS

FRAOS

Associate Surgeons

GEORGE RUSSELL JONES, MB BS FRACS JOHN RICHARD MACKAY, MB BS FRACS CEDRIC RUPERT NAYLOR, MB BS FRACS FRCS


PETER HARDY-SMITH, MB BS DO FRCS FRACS


IAN McNICOL SMITH, BA MB BCh FRCS

Director of Accident and Emergency Department

EDWARD BRENTNALL, MBE SBStJ MB BS FRACGP DObstRCOG

Director of Radiology GEORGE DUNCAN, MB ChB Glas. MRACR

Director of Pathology

MICHAEL PHILIP KENDALL SHOOBRIDGE, MB BS DCP Lind. FRCPA

166


REPATRIATION GENERAL HOSPITAL


Hospital staff:

Senior Physician

TREFOR OWEN MORGAN, BSc(Med) MD FRALP

Physician (General)

ROGER WILKE BROWN, MB BS FRALP

Senior Thoracic Physician

COLIN EDWIN BARTER, MB BS FRALP

Thoracic Physicians

LEWIS WILLIAM FAULKS, MB BS FRALP PETER WILLIAM HOLMES, MB BS FRALP COLIN LINDSAY MATHEWS, MB BS FRALP WILLIAM MURRAY IVAN MAXWELL, MD FRCP FRALP ROBERT JOHN PIERCE, MB BS FRALP

Renal Physicians .

WILLIAM ROBERT ADAMS, MD PhD FRALP GWYNNE WILTON THOMAS, MB ChB DPhil MRCP FRALP DIANE MARIE WILSON, MB BS FRALP

Gastroenterologists

HENRY SAMUEL HILLMAN, MB BS FRALP JOHN HENRY ISER, MB BS FRALP IAN CHARLES ROBERTS-THOMPSON, MD FRALP ANTHONY VICTOR INCANI, MB BS FRALP

Cardiologists

SADANAND NAGESHRAO ANAVEKAR, MB BS FRALP PhD ANTHONY CHARLES DORTIMER, MB BS FRALP PETER GRAEME HABERSBERGER, MB BS FRALP MICHAEL RANDLE LUXTON, MB BS FRALP NEWMAN BENJAMIN PINKUS, MB BS FRALP

Neurologists

JOHN ROBERT MERORM, MB BS FRALP GRAEME ROBERT SYMINGTON, MB BS FRALP JACOB JOHN VERNEA, MD

Rheumatology and Rehabilitation

MURRAY LANE INGPEN, MB BS MRCP(Ed.)D.Phys.Med. ROBERT GORDON NEWNHAM, MB BS FRALP

Specialist-in•Charge Nuclear Medicine Department

LIONEL BARRY ARKLES, MB BS FRALP

Specialist (Nuclear Medicine)

GARY DAVID GILL, MB BS FRALP

167

Faculty of Medicine

Specialists (Oncology)

ROY HERBERT DONALD BEAN, MB BS FRALP CHEN PARK LIM, MB BS FRALP

Senior Psychiatrist

TERENCE HERBERT GIDLEY, MB BS DPM

Psychiatrists

GEOFFREY CONRON, MB BS DPM FRACP MRANZCP KWEE KEAT LIM, MB BS DPM MRCPsych KEVIN JAMES MEAGHER, MB BS DPM MRANZCP JEFFREY FRANCIS TAYLOR, MB BS DPI

DEPARTMENT OF PATHOLOGY

Senior Specialist-in-Charge

BEN MACMAHON WADHAM, MB BS DCP Lind. FRCPA FRCPath

Specialist—Biochemistry

ANN READ, BSc MAACB FRCPA

Specialists—Haematology

JOHN DESMOND PARKIN, MD FRALP FRCPA JOHN COURTNEY DUGGAN, MB BS FRAOP

Specialist—Histopathology

ARTHUR RAYMOND PARKIN, MB BS FRCPA


Senior Specialist

KENNETH JOHN MILLAR, MB 8S FRCS FRAOS

Specialists—General Surgery

LINDSAY ALAN CASTLES, MB 8S FRACS JAMES RICHARD McCOY, MB 8S FRACS FRCS JOHN RENNEY, MB BS FRAOS FRCS DAVID WILLIAM STONEY, MB BS FRACS

Specialists—Orthopaedic Surgery

DAVID ARTHUR GILLIES BRACY, MB 8S FRAOS CLIVE JONES, MB BS FRACS MCI. ORTH. IAN ROBERT JONES, MB BS FRACS MICHAEL JAMES SHANNON, MB BS FRAOS

Neurosurgeon

DARYL HEATH NYE, MB BS FRCS

Vascular Surgeons

•PETER LLEWELLYN FIELD, MB BS FRACS •DONALD GORDON MACLEISH, MB MS FRCS FRACS •ANDREW KINGSLEY ROBERTS, MB 8S FRCS FRACS FAGS

• 168


Plastic Surgeons

•ALLAN MALCOLM MACLEOD, MB BS FRACS 'WAYNE ALLAN MORRISON, MB BS FRACS

Specialist lead and Neck Surgery

NEVILLE WILLIAM QUINN, MB BS FDSc FRCS FDSRCS F RAC CS

Thoracic Surgeons

'IAN HAIG McCONCHIE, MB MS FRACS 'GEORGE WILLIAM WESTLAKE, MB BS FRA С .S

Uroioglcal Surgeons

LAWRENCE KEITH CLEEVE, MB BS FRACS LAURENCE MILNER HARWOOD, MB BS FRACS RODNEY ROBIN ADLINGTON SYME, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Surgeons—ENT

ALAN JAMES BASHAM, MB BS FRAOS LAWRENCE MICHAEL RYAN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS DLO MICHAEL JULIAN WILSON, MB BS FRAOS

Ophthalmological Surgeons

PETER HARDY-SMITH, MB BS FRCS FRAOS 00 HENRY RONALD LEW, MB BS FRAOS FRACO JAMES HERBERT STEPHENS MARTIN, MB BS FRCS FRACS

DO FRACO

Specialist—Resuscitation

RICHARD MATTHEW MILLILER, MB 8S FRAOS

DEPARTMENT OF RADIOLOGY

Hospital Staff:

Senior Specialist-in-Charge

BRYAN HARTLEV, MB BS MRACR FRAOS FFR

Radiologists

JOHN NORMAN CHAMBERLAIN, MB BS MRACR DObs RLOG PAMELA HARRIS-WRIGHT, MB BS DRMD MRACR PETER JULIAN JOHNSTON, MB BS MRACR

JOSEPH KREMER, MB BS MRACR ALAN FRANCIS LEO NEAL, MB BS MRACR EDWIN KEITH MUNTZ, MB BS MRACR DAVID POWELL THOMAS, MB BS MRACR FFR KARL NEILSON, UHD MD BS MRACR RUDI VELENTINE WEBSTER, MB BS DDR FRCR MRACR

DEPARTMENT OF ANAESTHETICS

Director

GORDON YOUATT, MB BS PhO FFARACS

169

Faculty of Medicine

Anaesthetists

HANNAH MARGARET PARKER, MB BS FFARACS MICHAEL SAM ROZEN. MB BS FFARACS PHILLIP RUBINSTEIN, MB BS DA FFARACS GEOFFREY ROBERT SCHRODER, MB BS FFARACS ROBERT MORRIS SCHWEITZER, MB BS FFARACS GORDON VICTOR STANTON, MB BS DA FFARACS RICHARD LAKE CLAYDEN SUTCLIFFE, MB BS FFARACS GORDON BRIAN WESTMORE, MD BS MRCP FFARACS

Clinical Instructors of the Fairfield Hospital Clinical School

Chairman of the Clinical School

ALVIS KULERS, MB BS FRALP

Clinical Instructors in Communicable Diseases (Specialist Physicians)

NOEL McKENZIE BENNETT, MB BS FRCP Edin. FRALP FRACMA

ALVIS KULERS, MB BS FRALP CHARLES RONALD LUCAS, MB BS FRALP HUGH FRANCIS NEWTON-JOHN, MB BS MRCP FRALP ALISTAIR MURRAY SANDLAND, MB BS DTM&H Syd. BRYAN RICHARD SPEED, MB BS FRALP PETER ANTHONY STANLEY, MB BS FRALP ALLEN PENG PUNG, MB BS FRALP

Clinical Pathologist

PETER CAVANAGH, MA MD BCh Dubl. FinstBiol DIPBact FRCPA

Medical Virologists

IAN DAVID GUST, MD BS BSc(Mе d) DipBact Lind. FRCPA

KATHLEEN HAYES, MB BS FRCPA DCH Dub,.

Medical Microbiologist

LOUISE GAY IRVING, MB BS FRCPA

FRACP

Clinical Instructors of the Mercy Maternity and Austin Hospitals Clinical School

Chairman of Clinical School

PROFESSOR NORMAN ALBERT BEISCHER, MD BS MGO

FRCS Edin. FRAOS FRCOG FRALOG

Senior Obstetrician/Gynaecologists

CHARLES ANTONIO BARBARO, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRACS FRCOG FRALOG

KEVIN ALBERT BARHAM, MB BS FRCS FRACS FRCOG FRA COG

GERALD ARTHUR MANLY, MB BS FRCS FRACS FRCOG FRAGIG

170


Obstetrician/Gynaecologists

PETER WINTER ASHTON, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG DONALD PUI-GHEE CHAN, MB BS H.К . FRCS Edil. & Glas.

MMSA Lind, FRCOG FRACOG PETER ANTHONY LONG, MB BS Syd. MRCOG FRALOG IAN ALEXANDER MACISAAC, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FRCOG

FRACOG WILLIAM MICHAEL SOMERVILLE, MB BS FRCS Lind. & Edin.

FRCOG FRACOG

Associate Obstetrician/Gynaecologists

ROBERT JOHN HORSFALL, MB BS FRAOS MRCOG FRALOG CHRISTOPHER STEPHEN TARGETT, MB BS FRCS Edin.

MRCOGFRACOG HOWARD MACDONALD WALKER, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG

Senior Neonatal Paediatrician

HOWARD JAMES MORRIS GOLDBERG, MB BS MRCP FRALP

Neonatal Paediatrician

JOHN DAVID THORBURN, MB BS Syd. FRALP

Medical Director

JAMES ERNEST BREHENY, MB BS FRALP


ROBERT WILLIAM COWIE, MB BS FFARACS

Director of Community Medicine

LAWRENCE IVAN HATHERLEY, LRCP MRCS FRACGP

Obstetrician/Gynaecologist to Endocrinology Clinic

MICHAEL SHINE FORREST, MB BS FRCOG


LEON ISRAEL TAFT, BSc MB BS FRCPA FRCPath

Deputy Director of Pathology

JOHN BOWES HOBBS, BSc(Med) MB BS Syd. PhD A.N.U. FRCPA

Director af Radiology

CHRISTINE MARY ACTON, MB BS MRACR DDU

Resuscitation and Renal Physician

EDWARD FRANCIS O'SULLIVAN, MB BS FRALP

Clinical Instructors of the Mount Royal National Research Institute of Gerontology and Geriatric Medicine

Director

Professor DEREK MELVILLE PRINSLEM, MD BS Durh. FRCP Edin. FRACP FRSH

171

Faculty of Medicine

Hospital Staff:

Physicians WILLIAM M. BARRETT, MB BS FRALP FORM FRACMA

FACRM S. D. JOSEPH, MB BS Ceyl. FRALP ALAN NEAL, MB BS MRACR BOVNE RUSSELL, MB BS MRCP Edin. S. JOHN SHEPHERD, MB BS DIPHA FRACMA LIA DGM ROGER WARNE, LRCP MRCS MB BS MRCP FRAC?

Clinical Instructors of the Peter WmCalium Clinic

Chairman of Clinical School JAMES PATRICK MADIGAN, MD BS DTR FRALP FRCPA

Hospital Staff:

DAVID BALL, MB BS Adel. FRACR FRCR 'Professor RICHARD CLAYTON BENNETT, MB BS FRACS

FRCS АВН O У KUMAR BHOWAL, MB BS MRACR 'FELIX CORNELIUS BEHAN, MB BS l'id. FRACS IAN ALLAN COOPER, MB BS Syd. FRCPA FRALP JUE CHONG DING, MB BS Sing. FRCPA FRALP 'WILLIAM BRIAN FLEMING, MB MS FRACS FRCS FALS 'PETER ADRIAN GREY, MB BS DLO FRACS FRCS •Professor KENNETH JOHN HARDY, MB BS FRACS FACS PETER GRAEME HUGHES, MB BS Manch. FRCR FRCS RONALD ATKINSON HURLEY, BCE MB BS FRACR FRCR

FRALP PETER NORMAN JEAL. MB BS Monash FRCR •DAVID JENNER, MB BS FRACS FRCS ROBIN CLIVE KERR, MB BS FRACR FRCR KUE ONG LIEW, MB BS Sing. MRACR FRALP JAMES HENRY MATAR, MB BS FRACR FRCP Canada •IAN SHEARER RUSSELL, MB MS FRAOS FRCS THOMAS FRASER SANDEMAN, MD ChB Edin. DIRT FRCR

FRACR MIECZYSLAW WOLF, MB BS FRAC? FRCPA

Clinical Instructors of the Royal Children's Hospital Clinical School

Physicians—heads of units

DAVID ALEXANDER, McCREDIE, BSc MD В S FRALP THOMAS GLOVER MADDISON, MD BS Adel. FRALP BERNARD WILLIAM NEAL, MD BS FRALP MAXWELL JAMES ROBINSON, MD BS FRALP LIONEL ERIC GEORGE SLOAN, MB BS FRALP FACMA

Physicians

JOHN GORDON HUNTER, MB BS FRAC? DPM JAMES ASHTON KEIPERT, MB BS FRACPE DCH MARGERY CLARE McKINNON, MB BS FRALP DCH

172


JOHN MARTIN McNAMARA, MB BS FRALP SAMUEL MENAHEM, MD BS FRALP

Associate Physicians

ALAN DOUGLAS BRYAN, MB 8S FRALP IAN PETER McINTYRE, MB BS MRCPE DAVID JOHN HILL, MB BS FRALP HARLEV ROBERT POWELL, MB BS FRALP

Associate Physicians

ALAN DOUGLAS BRYAN, MB 8S FRALP DAVID JOHN HILL, MB BS FRALP PETER MICHAEL LOUGHNAN, MB BS FRALP IAN PETER McINTYRE, MB BS MRCPE HARLEV ROBERT POWELL, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Physicians

DONALD JAMES STUART CAMERON, MB 8S FRALP ALLAN CARMICHAEL, MB BS FRALP DENNIS WARREN HAIN, MB BS FRALP KATHERINE SYLVIA ROWE, MB BS FRALP

Chairman Department of Surgery

MAXWELL KENT, MB 8S FRACS

Senior Surgeon

NATHANIEL ALBERT ALFRED MYERS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Surgeons — Heads of Units

ROBERT FOWLER, ID BS FRAOS PETER GRIFFITH JONES, MB MS FRCS FRAOS FALS MAXWELL KENT, MB 8S FRACS

Surgeons

ALEXANDER WILLIAM AULDIST, MB BS FRAOS JUSTIN HENRY KELLY, MB BS FRACS EDWARD DURHAM SMITH, MD MS FRAOS FALS JOHN RIDLEY SOLOMON, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Associate Surgeon

KEITH BRADLEY STOKES, MB BS FRAOS

Assistant Surgeon

ALAN ARTHUR WOODWARD, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Clinical Assistant

JEANNINE WHITECROSS PATIN, BSc MB BS

Teaching Associate

ANTHONY PHILIP JOSEPH CHANDRASEKERA, MB BS Ceyl. DPM Eng, & Ire!.


THOMAS CHRISTOPHER KENNETH BROWN, MB ChB FFARACS

173

Faculty of Medicine

Deputy Director of Anaesthesia

NOEL MORRIS LASS, MB BS FFARCS FFARACS

Senior Anaesthetist

IAN CAMPBELL McDONALD, MB BS FFARACS

Anaesthetists

MARY ELIZABETH DWYER, MB BS FFARACS EDGAR ROBERT N1S В 1TT GILLIES, MB BS FFARACS BERYL JACK, MB BS FFARACS BRIAN THOMAS JORDAN, MB BS FFARACS

Director Department of Pathology

ALAN LLEWELLYN WILLIAMS, MD BS FRCPA

Director of Haematology Laboratory

GEOFFREY PHILLIP TAURO, MB BS FRCPA

Director of Anatomical Pathology

PETER ELLIS CAMPBELL, MB BS FRCPA

Director of Clinical Biochemistry

JOHN FRANCIS CONNELLY, MD BS MAACB

Director of Immunology Laboratory

CLIFFORD SHELLEY HOSKING, MD BS FRACP FRCPA

Neuropathologist

ROSS McDONALD ANDERSON, MB BS FRCPA McPath

Associate Histopathologist

CHUNG WO CHOW, MB BS FRCPA

Director Department of Psychiatry

WINSTON SELBY RICKARDS, MD BSc FRACP FRANZCP FRCPsych A В PsS MAPsS DPM

Deputy Director Department of Psychiatry

FRANK TVIR BISHOP, MB BS FRCS FRANZCP

Psychiatrists

GEORGE LAURENCE CHRISTIE, BSc DPM FRANZCP MRCPsych

ELISABETH MAUD WANN, BA MB ChB Dubl. FRANZCP

Associate Psychiatrists

HUGH ROBSON GARNER, MB BS MRANZCP HELENA JULIE JONES, LRCP MRCS MB BS BSc MRANZCP

DPM DipCrim PHYLLIS LEWIS, MB BS MRANZCP DPM MRCPsych JUDITH LINNANE, MB BS MRANZCP DPM

Assistant Psychiatrists

GRAHAM DAVID HOCKING, MB BS MRANZCP PETER FINERERG, MB BS MRANZCP

174


JAMES MORGAN LEES, MB BS SUZANNA TARYAN, MB ChB Otago MRANZCP

Assistant Paediatrician, Department of Psychiatry

ANN MORGAN, MB BS DCH

Director of Intensive Care Unit

ALAN WILLIAM DUNCAN, MB BS FFARCS FFARACS

Director, Department of Cardiology

ALEXANDER WYNNE VENABLES, MD BS FRACP

Deputy Director Department of Cardiology

TIOW HOE GOH, MB BS FRACP

Assistant Cardiologists

BRIAN DAVID EDIS, MB BS FRALP SAMUEL MENAHEM, MD BS FRALP

Director Department of Gastroenterology

GRAEME LAURENCE BARNES, MD BS Otago FRALP

Deputy Director Department of Gastroenterology

ARNOLD LAWRENCE SMITH, MB BS FRALP

Chief Orthopaedic Surgeon

MALCOLM BENBOW MENELAUS, MD BS FRCS FRAOS

Orthopaedic Surgeons

WILLIAM GEOFFREY COLE, MSc MB 8S FRAOS DAVID ROBERT VERNON DICKENS, MB BS FRACS WILLIAM GRANT DOIG, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Assistant Orthopaedic Surgeons

PETER DERMOTT CURWEN-WALKER, MB BS FRCS FRAOS DAVID ARTHUR GILLES BRACY, MB BS FRAOS

Director Department of Clinical Haematology and Oncology

HENRY EKERT, MB BS FRALP FRCPA

Deputy Director Department of Haematology and Oncology

KEITH DANIEL WATERS, MB BS FRALP

Associate Clinical Haematologist

RAE NANETTE MATTHFWS, MB BS DCH FRALP

Assistant Clinical Haematologist

KARIN TIEDEMANN, MB BS FRALP

Director Department of Radiology

DAVID WILLIAM BOLDT, MB ChB DRACR FRACR

Radiologist

VALERIE MAYNE, MB BS FRALP

175

Faculty of Medicine

Assistant Radiologist

JOHN FRANCIS DE CAMPO, MB BS DRACR

Dean of Postgraduate Medical Studies

BERNARD WILLIAM NEAL, MD BS FRALP DipEd

Director of Department of Thoracic Medicine

PETER DUHIG PHELAN, BSc MD BS Q'Id. FRALP

Deputy Director of Thoracic Medicine

LOUIS ISAAC LANDAU, MD BS FRALP

Paediatrician, Thoracic Medicine

ANTHONY OLINSKY, MD ChB DipPaed FCPSA

Director of Department of Developmental Paediatrics

JOHN MAURICE COURT, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Neurologist

KEVIN JOHN COLLINS, MB BS FRALP

Associate Physician, Developmental Paediatrics

ALAN DOUGLAS BRYAN, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Physician, Developmental Paediatrics

BASIL PHILLIP GLAUN, MB BS FRALP DCH

Dermatologist

JOIN ROBERT KELLY, MD BS FRCP FRALP

Physician to Diabetic Clinic

JOHN MAURICE COURT, MB BS FRALP

Director, Department of Genetics

DAVID MILES DANKS, MD BS FRALP

Deputy Director, Department of Genetics

JOHN GRAHAM ROGERS, MB BS FRALP

Endocrinologist

GARRY LEIGH WARNE, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Endocrinologists

GORDON COLWELL ENNIS, MB BS FRALP

Nephrologist

HARLEV ROBERT POWELL, MB BS FRALP

Director, Neurology

IAN JAMES HOPKINS, MD BS FRALP

Deputy Director, Neurology

LLOYD KEITH SHIELD, MB BS FRALP


KEVIN JOHN COLLINS, MB BS FRALP

176


Physician to Enuresis Clinic

BERNARD WILLIAM NEAL, MD MS FRACP

Physician-in-Charge Phenylketonuria Clinic

THOMAS GLOVER MADDISON, MD BS FRALP

Physicians to Phenylketonuria Clinic

DAVID MILES DANKS, MD BS FRACP DAVID BUXTON PITT, MD BS FRACP

Radiotherapist

CYRIL CHARLES JULIUS MINTY, DTR MCRA FFR

Director of Department of Neonatology

NEIL THOMAS CAMPBELL, MB BS FRACP

Neonatal Paediatrician

GEOFFREY LEON GILLAM, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Neonatal Paediatrician

ELIZABETH ANNE CARSE, MB BS FRALP

Director of Cardiac Surgery

ROGER MEE, MB ChB Otago FRACS

Assistant Cardiac Surgeon

WILLIAM JAMES BRAWN, MB BS FRCS

Neurosurgeon

GEOFFREY LEWIS KLUG, MB BS FRACS

Assistant Neurosurgeons

ELIZABETH ANN LEWIS, MB BS FRCS Eng. & Glas. FRACS DAVID WALLACE, MB BS FRACS FRCS

Ophthalmologist

CYRIL GREGORY KEITH, MB BS FRCS FRAOS MACO

Associate Ophthalmologist

JEFFREY LONG, BSc MB BS DO FRCS MACI

Assistant Ophthalmologists

GEOFFREY WILLIAM HARLEV, MB BS DO MACO BARRY JOHN LANSDELL, MB BS FRAOS FRACO

Otolaryngologist

WILLIAM WALL WARNER MOONEY, MB BS FALS FRCS FRACS

Associate Otolaryngologists

MICHAEL SIMON SILVERSTEIN, MB BS FRAOS FRCSE FRCS JOHN WILLIAM VORRATH, MB BS FRCS FRACS

177

Faculty of Medicine

Assistant Otolaryngologists

HENRY GRANT HAMMOND, MB BS DLO ROBERT LANGLEY WEBB, MB BS FRACS DLO

Plastic Surgeon

JOHN SANDLER BARNETT, MB BS FRACS

Deputy Plastic Surgeon

OWEN RUSSELL COLE, M8 BS FRACS FAGS

Associate Plastic Surgeon

GEORGE STRETTON GUNTER, MB MS FRCS FRACS

Assistant Plastic Surgeon

ANTHONY DAVID HOLMES, MB BS FRACS

Oral Surgeon

BRUCE AARON LEVANT, MDSc FDRCS Lind.

Surgeon-in-Charge Burns Unit

JOHN RIDLEY SOLOMON, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Assistant Surgeons

EUSTACE JULIAN KEOGH, MB BS FRCS FRACS KEITH BRADLEY STOKES, MB BS FRACS

Plastic Surgeon Burns Unit

GEORGE STRETTON GUNTER, M8 MS FRCS FRAOS

Director Ambulatory Paediatrics

FRANK OBERKLAID, MB BS FRALP

Director Casualty Services

FREDERIC NICOLET BOUVIER, MB BS FRACGP

Paedodontist and Chief Dental Officer ROGER KINGSLEY HALL, MDSc FRACDS

Clinical Instructors of the Royal Park Psychiatric Hospital Clinical School

Consultant Psychiatrists

FRANCIS THOMAS VARGHESE, MB 8S BSc Q'Id. FRANZCP DAVID CHONG, MB BS DPM MRANZCP ARUNA REDDY, MB BS BSc l'id. FRANZCP JESSIE WEBSTER, BA MB BS DPM R.C.P. & s. MRCPsych

MRANZCP

Psychiatrists

IAN FITZGERALD, MB BS BMedSc DPM THOMAS PEYTON, MB ChB Otago MRANZCP

178


Clinical Instructors of the Royal Melbourne Hospital Clinical School

Hospital staff:

Associate Dean (Clinical)

ROGER AZIZ MELICK, MD Syd. FRCP FRALP

Clinical Supervisor

CHRISTINA CLARK PENINGTON, MB BS

Physicians

GAVIN JOHN BECKER, MD BS FRALP KENNETH FAIRBURN FAIRLEY, MD BS FRCP FRALP PETER BERT GREENBERG, MD BS PhD FRALP THOMAS HENRY HURLEY, MD BS FRALP JOHN OWEN KING, MD BS FRALP MICHAEL RANDLE LUXTON MD BS FRALP JOHN STEWART PENINGTON, MD BS FRCP FRALP PETER WILLIAM TREMBATH, BPharm MB BS PhD FRALP PETER WILLIAM SUTHERLAND, MD BS FRALP HAROLD STANLEY SYMONS, MB BS FRCP FRALP PETER ALEXANDER VALENTINE, MB BS MRCP FRALP ALFRED JOHN WALL, MD BS FRALP

Assistant Physicians

QUINTUS DE ZYLVA, MB BS FRALP ERIC CAMPBELL LAIRD, MB BS FRALP IAN KAYE FORBES, MB BS FRALP ROGER WILKE BROWN, MB BS FRALP

Surgeons

JOHN RODNEY ALLSOP, MB BS FRAOS JOHN PAXTON COLLINS, MB BS FRAOS WILLIAM BRIAN FLEMING, MB MS FRCS FRAOS ALAN MORTON CU ТНВЕ RTSON, MB MS FRCS FRACS FALS IAN SHEARER RUSSELL, MB f.1S FRAOS FRCS GRAHAM ADLINGTON SYME, MB BS FRCS FRACS PETER ROBERT SCOTT, MB BS FRCS, Lind. & Edin. FRAOS

FALS THOMAS MICHAEL MACKENZIE LONG, MB BS FRAOS FALS PETER GUSTAV BRYAN NELSON, MB MS FRACS FRCS FALS NOEL DESMOND SHERSON, MB 83 FRACS FRCS ROBERT JOHN SHEDDEN THOMAS, MB BS PhD FRAOS

Assistant Surgeons

PAUL REX BALFOUR KITCHEN, MB BS FRACS JAMES CAMPBELL BOYD PENFOLD, MB BS FRACS FRCS DAVID JOHN BUTTERFIELD, MB BS FRACS

Head of Clinical Research Unit

IAN REAP MACKAY, MD BS FRCP FRALP FRCPA

Assistant Physician, Clinical Research Unit

MATHEW ALEXANDER VAIAS, MB BS Bled Sci FRALP

179

Faculty of Medicine

Allergist

SAUL WIENER, MD PhD FRALP

Director, Anaesthetics

PETER REGINALD PRIDEAUX, MBChB (Liv.) FFARACS

Deputy Director of Anaesthetics

DAVID PILKlNGTON CRANKSHAW, MB BS PhD FFARACS

Anaesthetists

RUSSELL GEOFFREY COLE, VRD MB BS DA FFARCS FFARACS

TREVOR TALBOT CURRIE, MB BS DA Eng. FFARCS FFARACS EDGAR ROBERT NISB1T GILLIES, MB BS FFARACS DAVID KOMESAR0FF, MB BS DA FFARACS MAXWELL LINDSEY, LRCP MRCS MB BS Lind. DA FFARCS

FFARACS PATRICIA MACKAY, MB ChB N.Z. DA RAGS FFARCS

FFARACS HERBERT CLAUS NEWMAN, MB BS DA FFARCS FFARACS ALFRED OWIES, MB BS DA FFARACS WILLIAM HENRY TAYLOR, MB BS FFARACS ANTHONY ROY WHITE, MB BS FFARACS ARTHUR FREDERICK WOODS, MB BS FFARACS

Assistant Anaesthetists

KARL DOUGLAS ALEXANDER, MB BS FFARACS ALEXANDER JOSEPH BABARCZY, MB BS FFARACS MALCOLM JOHN BROWN, MB BS PhD FFARCS FFARACS NANCYE EUNICE EDWARDS, MB BS FFARACS MARGARET ELIZABETH GRIGGS, MB BS FFARACS MICHAEL KISTER, MB BS Syd. FFARACS ROBERT JOHN KNIGHT, MA MB BChir Camteb. FFARACS JOHN RICHARD MARUM, MB BS FFARACS JILL MARGARET ROBERTSON, MB BS FFARACS RICHARD LAKE CLAYDEN sUTGLIFFE, MB BS FFARACS RODERICK JOSEPH BRAMSTON TIERNAN, MB BS FFARACS WILLIAM WILLIAMSON, MB ChB N.Z. FFARACS JOHN LOKMAN ZUBEVICH, MB BS FFARACS

Director of Anatomical Pathology

PROFESSOR PRITHVIPALL SINGH BHATHAL, MB BS Adel. PhD FRCPA

Deputy Director of Anatomical Pathology

JOHN PHILIP DOWLING, MB BS FRCPA

Assistant Pathologists

ROBERT WILLIAM BROWN, MB BS FRCPA MALCOLM RUSSELL CAMERON BUCHANAN, MB BS FRCPA WILLIAM McINTOSH ROSE, MD FRACP FRCP

Dire ć tor, Biochemistry

DAVID GORDON CAMPBELL, BSc N.Z. MBChB Otago FRALP

180


Director, Cardiology

VERE DAVID URQUHART HUNT, MD FRALP FACC

Assistant Director, Cardiology

JOHN TIMOTHY DOWLING, MB BS FRALP

Specialist Cardiologist

HARRY GEORGE MOND, MD FRALP FACC

Assistant Directors Nephrology

ANTHONY JOHN FREDERICK D'APICE, MD BS FRALP JUDITH ANN WHITWORTH, MD BS FRALP

Assistant Nephrologists

IAN KAYS FORRES, MB BS FRALP BENNO UWE INLE, MB BS FRALP ILEENE MARGARET MacDONALD, MB ChB Pret. PhD POROOR VIGRAMAN, MB BS FRALP ROWAN WALKER, MB BS FRALP NIGEL MARTIN ANTHONY WALTER, MA Oxon. BM BCh Oxon.

MRCP FRALP

Clinical Oncologist

JOHN RICHARD SULLIVAN, MD BS FRACP MRCP

Dermatologists

DAVID SCOTT NURSE, ID FRALP MRCP Edin. MACI

Director, Endocrine Laboratory

LEONARD CHARLES HARRISON. MD FRALP

Endocrinologist

FRANK IAN RUSSELL MARTIN, MD BS FRACP

Assistant Endocrinologist

JEANNINE WHITECROSS PATIN, BSc MB BS

Director, Emergency Dept.

ANNE D'ARCY, MB BS FRACtiP

Gastroenterologist

DAVID JOHN FONE, ID FRALP

Director, Gastroenterology

DONALD JAMES BOURNE ST. JOHN, MB BS FRALP MRCP

Geriatricians

WILLIAM MERVYN BARRETT, MB BS FRALP DEREK MELVILLE PRINSLEY, MD BS Durh. FRSH FRCP

FRACP STUART JOHN HUNT SHEPHERD, MB BS DIPHosp.Admiп .

LIA

181

Faculty of Medicine

Gynaecologist

GRAEME RODERICK McLE1SH, MB BS FRCS MRCOG FRAOS FROOG FAGG

Assistant Gynaecologists

PETER SYDNEY ALLEN, MB BS MRCOG FAGG PETER CONDOS, MB BS MRCOG FRCS Edin. CHRISTOPHER JOHN RISBY, MB BS BA RCS Lind. MRCOG

FAGG MRCS LRCP

Director, Haematology

DAVID CROSBY COWLING, MD FRACP FCPath. FRCPA

Director, Intensive Care

JOHN FRANCIS CADE, MD BS PhD LRCP (C) FRACP FACCP

Director, Medica' Microbiology

EUGENE ROBIN JOSEPH PAVILLARD, MB BS Lind. FRCPA Director, Medical Services

GEOFFREY HAMILTON DREHER, MB BS MAdmin AHA

Senior Neurologist

PETER EBELING, BSc MD BS FRCP FRACP

Neurologist

ROBERT JOHN HJORTH, MD FRACP

Neurosurgeon

DAVID SCOTT BARRINGTON BROWNBILL, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Assistant Neurosurgeon

DAVID WALLACE, MB BS FRACS FRCS GAVIN CHRISTOPHER ANDREW FABINYI, MB BS FRACS

Director, Nuclear Medicine

JOHN THOMAS ANDREWS, MB BS Lind. LRCP MRCS DObsRCOG FRACP FRACR


JAMES KIRKWOOD GALBRAITH, OBE MB BS FRCS FRACS

Ophthalmologist

BRUCE ALEXANDER CRAWFORD, MB BS DO FRCS FRACS lACO

Assistant Ophthalmologist

DAVID VICTOR KAUFMAN, MB BS FRACS FRACO


KINGSLEY WALLIS MILLS, MB BS FRCS FRACS Orthopaedic Surgeon

JOHN EDWARD HARRIS, MB BS FRACS

182



OWEN WILLIAM DEACON, MBChB Birm. FRACS FRCS PETER KUDELKA, MB BS FRCS FRACS WILLIAM FARNWORTH HEAPE, MB BSR FRACS CLIVE JONES, MB BS FRACS IAN ROBERT JONES, MB BS FRACS

Otorhinolaryngologist

HUGH SIMPSON MILLAR. MB BS DLO FRCS FRACS

Assistants to Otolaryngologist

PETER ADRIAN GREY, MB BS FRACS FRCS DLO JOHN KENNETH BARNES, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRACS ROY FRANCIS TAYLOR, MB BS FRACS

Assistant, Physical Medicine

PETER LANGTREE COLVILLE, MB BS DAVID STEINER, MB BS


FRANK JAMES HAM, MB BS FRAOS FRCS

Plastic Surgeon

GEOFFREY IAN TAYLOR, MB BS FRCS FRACS


RUSSELL CORLETT, MB BS FRAOS WILLIAM FRANCIS WILSON, MB BS FRAOS ANTHONY DAVID HOLMES, MB BS FRAOS

Psychiatrist

JOHN CHARLES PROCTOR CONE, MD BS FRANZCP MRCPsych

Assistant Psychiatrist

DAVID MORGAN, MB BCh BAO MRCPsych DPM MPhil (din.

Radiotherapist

JOHN MARTIN BRADLEY, MD FRALP FRCR FRACR DTR

Respiratory Specialist

MICHAEL COWPER FRANKLYN PAIN, MD Syd. FRALP FCCP

Thoracic Physician

ABE ROMAN RUBINFELD, MD FRALP

Senior Rheumatologist

KENNETH DAVID MUIRDEN, MD FRALP

Rheumatologist

DAVID ROY EGERTON BARRACLOUGH, MB BS FRALP

Senior Thoracic Surgeon

GEORGE WILLIAM WESTLAKE, MB BS FRAOS

183

Faculty of Mц dicine

Assistant Thoracic Surgeon

MICHAEL HENRY WILLIAM MULLERWORTH, MB BS FRCS Eng. & Edin. FRACS

Assistant Thoracic Surgeon

VETTIVETPILLAI KETHERANATHAN, MB BS LRCP FRACS FRCS

Senior Urologist

IAN NORMAN NUNN, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Urologist

WARREN JOHNSON, MB BS FRACS

Assistant Urologists

ALAN CROSТН WAITE, MB BS FRACS LAURENCE MILNER HAREWOOD, BSc MB BS FRACS LAURENCE KEITH CLEEVE, MB BS FRACS

Senior Vascular Surgeon

DONALD GORDON MACLEISH, MB MS FRCS FRACS

Vascular Surgeon

PETER LLEWELLYN FIELD, MB BS FRACS

Assistant Vascular Surgeon

PETER YULE MILNE, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Associate Assistant (Medical)

ALVIS KULERS, MB BS FRALP

BALLARAT BASE HOSPITAL

Clinical Supervisor

JOHN DAVID CORBET, MB BS FRACS FRCS

Director of Medical Education

DAVID LYALL MORTON, MB BS FRALP

Physicians

ARUNASALUM AMBIKAPATHY, MB ChB Liv. MRCP DTM&H Liv.

DAVID LYALL MORTON, MB BS FRALP DAVID MORE O'SULLIVAN, MB BS FRCP Edin. FRALP JOHN FREDERICK STICKLAND, MB BS FRALP

Psychiatrist

ALAN LESLIE NICHOLSON, MB BS FRANZCP MRCPsych

Surgeons

FREDERICK PETER DENTIN, MB BS FRACS BRUCE WILLIAM GRIFFITHS, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRACS GRAEME WARWICK HOUGHTON, MB BS Syd. FRCS Edin.

FRAOS ROGER HERBERT MITCHELL, MB BS FRAOS

184


Orthopaedic Surgeon

WILTON CAMPBELL CARTER, MB BS FRACS

Assistant Orthopaedic Surgeon

PAUL JOSEPH KIERCE, MB BS FRACS(Orth)

Radiologists

IAN CHRISTOPHER GOY, MB BS FRACP FRCR FRACR ROSS CONWAY WILKE, MB BS MRACR PETER ROBERT ENGLISH, MB BS MRACR

Urologist

KENNETH JOHN NEERHUT, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRACS

Assistant Urologist

DONALD IVAN McLEOD MOSS, MB BS FRACS

Pathologists

STANLEY THOMAS HUBERT HENRY PILBEAM, MA MB BCH Cam. MRCS LRCP FRC(Path) DMedJ(Path)

HOWARD DONALD PETER THOMSON, MB BS FRCPA MIAC

Clinical instructors of the Royal Park Psychiatric Hospital Clinical School

Psychiatrist Superintendent

WILLIAM RICHARD McLEOD, BA MD BS MRCP FRACP DPM FRANZCP

Consultant Psychiatrists

HARI DRASS CHOPRA, MB В S Punjab MD Bihart DPM Ranchi MRANZCP MRCSPsych

DILEEP SINGH RASTOGI, MB BS Lucknow MD A.H.M.S. MRANZCP

Clinical Instructors of the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital Clinical School

Chairman of Clinical School

Professor GERARD WILLIAM CROCK, MB В S FRCS FRACS FRACP FRACO

Hospital Staff:

EYE SECTION

Ophthalmologists In Charge of General and Special Clinics

JAMES DAVID CAIRNS, MB BS l'id. DO FRCS FRCS Edin. FRACS FRACO

LAURENCE ARTHUR CARROLL, MB BS DO Lind. FRCS FRACS FRACO

JOHN LLEWELLYN COLVIN, MB BS l'id. DO R.C.P. & S. FRCS Edin. FRACS FRACO

185

Faculty of Medicine

BARRY DESMOND COITE, MB BS Lind. FRCS FRCS Edin. FRACSFRACO

WILLIAM ELLIOTT GILLlES, MB BS DO FRCS Edin. FRAOS FRACO

JULIAN BERNARD HEINZE MB BS DO FRCS FRAOS FRACO KENNETH GEORGE 1OWSAM, MB BS DO FRAOS FRACO

FACIA IAN FLETT ROBERTSON, MB BS DO R.C.P. & S. FRACS

FRACO JOHN NORTON TAYLOR, MB BS FRCS FRCS Edin. DO

Lind. FRACS FRACO

Specialists

ARIEL BOROWITZ, MD Jerusalem DO FRACO JAMES PAUL BORGER, MB BS Syd. DO Lind. FRACO PETER RONALD BRETT, MB BS DO FRACS FRACO LEON CEBON, MB BS DO FR/ CS FRACO WILLIAM NOEH CHIN, MB BS DO Lind. FRAOS FRACO ERNEST FINKELSTEIN, MB BS DO FRACO ROBERT LESLIE HUDSON, MB BS DO FRACS FRACO MARK GRAHAM LAZARUS MB BS DipAmerBoardOphth STEPHANIA LIBHABER, MD Gdansk JUSTIN EDWARD MURPHY, MB BS DO FRACO KEITH SAYERS MURRAY, MC BChir Iamb. MRCS LRCP

DOMS Land. FRACO BARRY WILLIAM GRISOLD NICHOLLS, MB BS DO FRACS

FRACO JOSEPH ABRAHAM REICH, MB BS DO FRACS FRACO PAUL ANTHONY ROSEN, MB BS DO FRAOS FRACO WILLIAM ALAN FIRTH-SMITH, MB BS Syd. DO JOHN EDWARD SUTTON, MB BS DO FRCS FRACO SAMUEL TROSKI, MB BS DO FRACO ROBERT HAUTREY WEST, MB BS FRCS FRACS FRACO POI LAM WING, MB BS Malaya MRCP Edin. DO FRACO JOSEPH WING SANG YEUNG, MB BS DipAmerBoardOphth

FRACO FRAOS

Emeritus Specialists

RONALD FRANCIS LOWS, MB BS PhC DOMS Lind. DO FRCS FRACS FRACO

JAMES McBRIDE WHITE, ED MB BS DO FRAOS FRACO

EAR, NOSE AND THROAT SECTION

Otolaryngologists-in-Charge

GRAEME MILBOURNE CLARK, MB MS PhD Syd. FRCS Lind. & Edin. FRACS

LAURENCE MICHAEL RYAN, MB BS DLO FRCS FRACS JOHN ROBERT ТН O;o1SON, MB BS 0'id. DLO FRCS Edin,

FRFPS Glas. FRACS IAN HENDERSON WARNER, BSc MB BS FRCS FRACS WILLIAM WALL WARNER-MOONEY, MB BS FRCS Edin.

FRAOS

188


Senior Otolaryngologists ..

QUENTIN RICHARD BAILEY, MB MB Camb. DLO FRACS CECIL NATHANIEL LOVE CANTOR, MD BS DLO R.C.P. & S.

FRCS Edin. FRACS JOHN EDWARD DELAHUNTY, MB BS FRCS Edin. PARTIA SARATY KATTULA, BA BS MB DLO Andhra & leib.

Otolaryngologists

JOHN WILLIAM HILL, MB BS В OSMAN NOSHERWAN IRANI, MB BS Bombay FRCS Can.

FRACS .

KEVIN JOHN KANE, MB BS FRCS Lind. & Edin. JOSEPH BALACHANDRA KARALAPILLAI, MB BS Ceyi. DLO

FRCS FRACS BRIAN CLIVE PYMAN, MB BS DLO FRACS ROBERT LANGLEY WEBB, MB BS DLO FRACS

Assistant Otolaryngologists

HENRY GRANT HAMMOND, MB BS DLO

Audiologists

NORAN CASEY, BCom DipAud SHEINA NICHOLLS, MA(Audiol) 'DEBORAH GRACE, BA DipAud

SPECIAL UNITS

Pathologist JOHN MARK WEINER, MB BS FRCPA

Radiologist in Charge

YUMNA HOLYOAKE, MB BS DDR FFR

Paediatrician

JAMES ASHTON KEIPERT, MB BS DCH MRCPE

Physician in Charge

JOHN FRANCIS MALL, MD BS MRCP FRALP

Physicians

JOHN JAMES BILLINGS, KCSG MD BS FRALP FRCP ISLA MARGARET WILLIAMS, MB BS DO MRCP

Allergist

SOL BRAND, MD 8S

Surgeon

JOHN COUNDLEY DOYLE, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Radiotherapist

ROBIN CLIVE KERR, MB BS ‚RCA FFR


tROBERT JOHN KNIGHT, MA Cantab. MB BChir Cantab. DA RCP&S BObst RCOG FFARACS

187

Faculty of Medicine

Medical Director

KENNETH GEORGE HOWSAM, MB BS DO FRACS FACIA

Jean Littlejohn Deafness Investigation and Research Unit

E.N.T. Specialist-in-Charge

CONSTANCE BEATRICE SARAH NAPIER, MRCS LRCP DLO RCP&S

Director of Retina Investigation Unit

GERARD WILLIAM CROCK, MB BS FRCS FRACS FRACP FRACO

Director of Orbital Plastic and Lacrimal Unit

PETER NEIL HENDERSON, MB BS DO FRACS FRACO

Clinical Instructors of the Royal Women's Hospital Clinical School

Clinical Supervisor

JAMES HENRY EVANS, MD BS MRCP Edin. FRCOG FRALOG

Senior Obstetrics

FREDERICK DOUGLAS ADEY, MB BS FRCOG FRALOG PETER HEATH, MB BS IRCOG FRALOG MICHAEL KLOSS, MB BS FRCOG FRALOG IAN CHARLES ROSS, MB BS MGO FRCOG FRACOG

Senior Obstetricians

WILLIAM CHANEN, MB BS DGO FRCS Edin. FRACS FRCOG FRACOG

PETER PEREZ GLENNING, MB BS MGO FRCS Edin. FRAOS FRCOG FRACOG

WALTER IAN HAREWOOD JOHNsTON, MB BS MGO FRCOG FRACOG

BARRY LEE GRIFFITHS KNEALE, MB BS MGO FRACS FRCOG FRACOG

Gynaecologists

JOHN STANLEY BARNES, MB BS FRCS Edin. IRCOG FRAGIG

GARRY DONALD BYRNE, MB BS MACOG FRCS Edin. FRACOG

DONALD JOHN RAWLING, MB BS FRCOG FRCS Edin. FRACOG

ROBERT MALCOLM ROME, MB BS IRCOG FRCS Edit,. FRACOG

Senior Paediatric Physicians

FRANK REX BETHERAS, MB BS FRCOG FRALOG ROBERT NEIL ROY, MB BS FRALP

Paediatric Physicians

LESLIE MARKMAN, MB BS FRALP KENNETH RAYMOND MOUNTAIN, MB BS DCH FRALP MPS LAWRENCE JAMIESON MURTON, MB BS FRALP

isa


Paediatric Surgeon

NATHANIEL ALBERT MYERS, MD BS FRCS FRAOS

Radiotherapist

JAMES HENRY MATAR, MB BS MRACP FRCP(C)

Director of Medical Services

CLIFFORD JAMES McKINNON FLOWER, MB BS GradDipHA FACIA AHA


DENYS WOODESON FORTUNE, MB ChB Brist. MRCPE MRCPath M'AC FRCPE


JOHN DAVID PAULL, MB BS FFARACS DipEd

Assistant Surgeons

GEOFFREY ALAN CLARKE, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG GREGORY BRUCE DAVISON, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG DDU THOMAS RONALD EGGERS, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG NEIL ROBERT JOHNSTONE, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG CHRISTOPHER NORMAN MAXWELL, MB BS MRCOG DipVen

Lind. FRALOG GRAHAM DAMIEN MILLER, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG ANDREW LENNOX SPEIRS, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG RUEGEN WEIN, MB BS MRCOG FRALOG

Clinical Instructors of the St. Vincent's Hospital Clinical School

Associate Dean (Clinical)

JOHN JAMES PATRICK BILLINGS, KCSG MD BS FRCP FRACP

ST, VINCENT'S HOSPITAL

Physicians to In-Patients

JOHN TERENCE CAHILL, OBE MD BS FRCP FRALP MAURICE VIVIAN CLARKE, CBE MD BS FRALP FRCP LUKE MURPHY, MD BS FRCP FRALP JOHN FRANCIS N'ALL, MD BS MRCP FRALP

Physicians to Out-patients

KERRY JOHN BREEN, MD BS FRALP GEORGE STEWART HALE, MD BS FRALP MRCP WILLIAM CARRICK HEATH, MB BS FRALP RENE HENRI DUPUCHE MB BS MRCP FRALP EDWARD FRANCIS O'SULLIVAN, MB BS FRALP JOHN EDWARD MORAN, MB BS FRALP

189

Faculty of Medicine

Assistant Physicians to Out-Patients

ANTHONY NORMAN CHAMBERLAIN, MB BS FRALP

PAUL VINCENT DESMOND, MB BS FRALP

PETER ROSS ELLIOTT, MB BS FRALP SUSAN MARY SCOTT, MB BS FRALP JEREMY HAMMOND, MB BS FRALP BRIAN CLEREHAN, ED MB BS FRALP

Relieving Assistant Physicians

WILMA MARGARET BESWICK, MB BS FRCP ROBERT ARTHUR HARRIS, MB BS JOHN HECTOR McDONALD, MB BS MRCP FRALP

Surgeons to In-Patients

THOMAS EMANUEL ANTONIE, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FALS DESMOND GARVAN HURLEY, MB BS FRCS FRACS JAMES RICHARD McCOY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS PETER JOHN RYAN, MB MS FRCS FRAOS

Surgeons to Out-Patients

BRIAN THOMAS COLLOPY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS JAMES MICHAEL SHAW, MB BS FRCS FRAOS PAUL KEITH STEEDMAN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS IVO DOMINIC ANTHONY VELLAR, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Assistant Surgeons to Out-Patients

ROY LAURENCE WILLIS FINK, MB BS FRCS FRACS FRANCESCO INCANI, MB BS FRCS FRAOS CHARLES JOHN MULLANY, MB BS FRACS FRCS JOHN DENIS VIDOVICH, MB BS FRAOS FRCS

Director Anaesthetics

RALPH CLARK, MB BS DA FFARCS FFARACS

Deputy Director and Senior Physician Perfusionist

HENRY MICHAEL BRAY, MB BS FFARACS

Cardiac Anaesthetist and Physician Perfusionist

THOMAS GEORGE WILLIAM BAKER, MB BS FFARACS

Senior Assistant Anaesthetists

VILIM STANISICH, MB BS DA Lind. FFARCSI FFARCS FFARACS

ARTHUR FREDERICK WOODS, MB BS Adel. FFARACS

Staff Anaesthetists KEITH DAVID CRONIN, MB BS FFARACS MICHAEL JOHN DAVIES, MB BS FFARACS STANISLAW SCHWEITZER, MB BS FFARACS

Senior Visiting Anaesthetists HUGH CAMERON BUTEL, MB ChB N.Z. DA FFARACS MICHAEL JOHN WATERFIELD, MB ChB Sheff. FFARACS

190


Visiting Anaesthetists

ROBERT WILLIAM COWIE, MB BS FFARACS WILLIAM HENRY TAYLOR, MB BS FFARACS TERENCE RUSHFORD, MB BS FFARACS TIMOTHY GERARD COSTELLO, MB BS FFARACS CHARLES MARCEL DOMAINGUE, MB BS BTMH DA Lond.

FFARCS FFARACS GERALD BRIAN WESTMORE, MD BS MRCP FFARACS BARBARA GWENYTH BURROWS, MB BS FFARACS MICHAEL GILBERT MALONE, MB BS FFARACS JOHN ZELCER, MB BS BMedSci FFARACS

Senior Physician, Asthma and Allergy Unit

ALAN HASKILL SHARP, MB BS Monash FRALP FRCP(C)

Assistant Physician, Asthma and Allergy Unit

WILLIAM MAURICE McCUBBERY, MB BS

Director, Biochemistry

THOMAS EDWIN BALDWIN KEEN, MD BS MSc Adel. FRALP FRCPA

Director, Cardiac Investigation Unit

IAN GREGORY McDONALD, MD BSM FRALP

Deputy Director, Cardiac Investigation Unit

VLADIMIR MICHAEL JARASLAV JELINEK, MD BS FRALP

Visiting Physicians, Cardiac Investigation Unit

GEOFFREY DONALD KERR, MB BS FRALP WILLIAM FRANCIS RYAN, MB BS FRACP MRCP (sessional)

Senior Cardiologist

GEORGE STEWART HALE, MD BS FRALP MRCP

Cardiologist

PATRICIA FOX, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Cardiologist

GEORGE LEITL, BE MB BS FRALP

Senior Cardio-Thoracic Surgeon

JOHN KEVIN CLAREBROUGH, 08E MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Cardio-Thoracic Surgeon

ANTHONY CHARLES WILSON, MB BS FRACS

Director, Casualty Services

PETER FRANCIS BURKE, MB BS FRAOS FRCS DHMSA

Director, Community Medicine and Physician to Alcoholism Clinic

JOSEPH NATALINO SANTAMARIA, MB BS FRACP

Assistant Physician, Community Medicine and Alcoholism Clinic

EVELYN BILLINGS, MB BS DCH Lind,

191

Faculty of Medicine

Medical Officer, Casualty Services

MARY BUCHANAN, MB BS FRACGP

Medical Officer, Community Medicine

PETER MURRAY PEARCE, MB BS 'EVE A. ADDIS, MB BS

Clinical Assistants, Community Medicine

PATRICK HAMILTON, MB BS JOHN JAGODA, MB BS JOHN LYNCH, MB BS

De Paul Centre—Medical Officer

DENISE O'HARA, MB BS

Consulting Surgeon

GERALD BROSNAN, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Senior Dermatologist

JOHN ANDREW BRENAN, MB BS FRALP FALD

Dermatologist

HARVEY ROTSTEIN, MB BS BRACP FALD

Assistant Dermatologist

ANDREW COSTA MICHAELIDES, MB BS FALD MRCP

Senior Physician, Diabetic Unit

FRANK PETER ALFORD, MD BS FRALP

Assistant Physician, Diabetic Unit

ANTHONY CHAMBERLAIN, MB BS FRAOS (acting)

Clinical Assistant

RICHARD SIMPSON, MB BS Monash MRCP MA 0x1.

Dietitian MARGARET BEVERLEY WOOD, BScAID (NSW)

Director, Endocrinology

FRANK PETER ALFORD, MD BS FRACP

Physician, Endocrinology

PINCUS TAFT, MD FRACP

Clinical Assistant

ALISON NANKERVIS, MB BS

Director, Gastroenterology

KERRY JOHN BREEN, MD BS FRACP

Senior Gynaecologist THOMAS WILLIAM CAPELL, MB BS FRACS FRCOG FAustCOG

192


Gynaecologist

HILARY FRANCIS JOLLY, MB BS FRCS Glas. FRAOS

FAGG FRCOG

Assistant Gynaecologist

JAMES PATRICK O'NEIL, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRAOS FRCOG

Relieving Assistant Gynaecologist

GRAHAM DAMIEN MILLER, MB BS FRCOG FAGG

Director, Haematology

BRYAN McKAY RUSH, MB BS Syd. FRALP FRCPA

Deputy Director, Haematology

NEWTON LET YEE LEE, MB BS FRALP FRCPA

Sessional Haematologists

COLIN NICHOLSON CHESTERMAN, BS Syd. PhD Oxf. FRACFA JUDITH ANNE CONSTABLE, MB BS FRACFA

Director, Intensive Care BERNARD GEORGE CLARKE, MB BS FRCP FRALP

Deputy Director, Intensive Care

DAVID CHARLES CADE, MB BS FRALP

Physician, Intensive Care

JOHN EDMOND O'DONOVAN, MB BS FRALP BENNO UWE INLE, MB BS FRALP

Director, Microbiology

JOHN HALSEY ANDREW, BMedSc Otago MB ChB Otago MRCPath FRCPA MASM

Assistant Microbiologist

LAKS Н MI CHITRA DANTANARAYANA, MB BS Ceyl. DipBac Manc FRCPA

Senior Bacteriologist

SHIRLEY DOROTHY DIXSON, BSc А AIMТ MASM

Senior Neurologist

JOHN JAMES PATRICK BILLINGS, KCSG MD BS FRCP FRALP

Neurologist and Clinical Neuro-Physiologist

EDWARD BRUCE TOMLINSON, MB BS FRALP


LESLEY JOHN ROBERTS, MB BS FRALP

Senior Neurosurgeon

JOIN KEITH HENDERSON, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Neurosurgeon

JAMES THOMAS CUMMINS, MB BS FRCS

193 a

Faculty of Medicine

Assistant Neurosurgeon

DARYL HEATH NYE, MB BS FRACS

Director, Nuclear Medicine

RUDOLPH LEOPOLD CHMIEL, MB BS DTR MRACR

Oncologist

WILLIAM IVON BURNS, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Oncologist

RAYMOND DAVID SNYDER, MB BS FRALP


JAMES HERBERT STEPHENS MARTIN, MB BS DO FRCS FRACS

Ophthalmologist

JOSEPH WING-SANG YEUNG, MB BS DipABOphth FRACS MACO

Assistant Ophthalmologists JUSTIN O'DAY, MB BS DO FRACS, FRACO YU-THUAN CHIA, MB BS Sing. DO FRACS FRACO (acting)

Senior Orthopaedic Surgeons

HENRY VERNON CROCK, MD BS FRCS FRACS BRENDAN JOHN DOOLEY, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Orthopaedic Surgeons

KEVIN FRANCIS KING, MB BS FRCS FRACS JONATHAN HOWELL RUSH, MB BS FRACS


MYRON GOLDWASSER, MB BS FRACS MSc LEONARD LENAGHAN, MB BS FRCS FRACS BRUCE LOVE, MB BS FRACS STANLEY SCHOFIELD, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Senior Otorhinolaryngologist

JOHN TIMOTHY KENNEDY, MB BS FRACS MS(IA) DABO


GERALD JAMES LITTLE, BCE LS MB BS DLO FRCS Edin.

Otorhinolaryngologist Clinical Assistant

DAMIAN CONNELLY, MB BS FRACS

Senior Respiratory Physician

BERNARD GEORGE CLARKE, MB BS FRACP MRCP

Senior Physician, Paediatrics

BASIL GLAUN, MB ChB CapeT. DCH MRCP FRACP

Senior Surgeon, Paediatrics JOHN DOUGLAS ABERDEEN, MB BS FRACS

194


Surgeon, Paediatrics

EUSTACE JULIAN KEOGH, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Director, Pathology—Anatomical

NORMAN ALEXANDER DAVIS. MB BS FRCPA FRCPath Lind.

Deputy Director, Pathology—Anatomical

DAVID JOHN DAVIES, BSc MD ChB Liv. FRCAP

Assistant Pathologist

HILARY FAY HILL, MB BS Syd. FRCPA

Visiting Pathologist

JOHN MARK WEINER, MB BS FRCPA

Pathologists (Sessional)

GRAEME BRUCE RYAN, MB BS PhD FRCPA

ROSS McDONALD ANDERSON. MB BS FRCPA

Director, Physical Sciences

RICHARD LOUIS GRAHAM KIRSNER, BE MSc PhD MIEE


RICHARD KERNAN NEWING, VRD MD BS FRCS FRACS

Plastic Surgeon

BERNARD McCARTHY O'BRIEN, BSc MD MS FRCS FRAOS FRCS


DAVID ANDREW JENNER, MB BS FRACS ALAN MALCOLM MACLEOD, MB BS FRACS WAYNE ALLAN JOHN MORRISON, MB BS FRACS

Professor/Senior Psychiatrist

JAMES RICHARD BALDWIN BALL, MD FRANZCP DPM

Senior Psychiatrist—(Hospital Unit)

ROWLAND ERIC SEAL, MA MB BS DPM FRACP FRANZCP

Senior Psychiatrist—(University Unit)

IVIR HUGH JONES, ID BS Lind. MRCP Edin. MRCPsych • MRANZCP DPI

Honorary Associate Psychiatrist

WILLIAM RICHARD MILEOD, BA MD BS DPM FRANZCP FRACP MRCPsych

Psychiatrist

DONALD CHARLES GRANT, MB BS Adel. DPI MRANZCP MRCPsych

ENG SEONG TAN, MB BS Malaya FRCPsych FRANZCP DPM

Psychotherapist

IAN HOLLAND MARTIN, MD BS Adel. DPM FRANZCP FRCPsych

195

Faculty of Medicine

Assistant Psychiatrists • .

KWEE KEAT LIM, MB BCh MA BAO Dub. DPM Ireland

MRCPsych NEVILLE EDWARD PARKER, MD BS O'/d. DPM FRCPsych MARGARET ANN EMMA PICKLES, MB BS BSc DPM

MRANZCP RICHARD JERZY PRYTULA, MB BS Monash DPM MRANZCP ROBERT LAWSON YEWERS, MB BSDO FRCOG DPM NIGEL HENRY MARK STRAUSS, MB BS DPM MRANZCP NICOLINO PAILETTI, MB BS DPM MRANZCP

Medical Officer, Department of Psychiatry

URSULA MARIE McKENNA, BSc MB

Sessional Psychologist

RONALD CONWAY, BA MEd MAPsS MACE

Director, Radiology

ERIC JOHN GILFORD, MB BS FRCR FRACR

Staff Radiologist

ALAIN MAURICE LAVOIPIERRE, MB BS MRACR ALBERT KAMINSKY, MB BS Monash MRACR

Sessional Radiologists

JENNIFER CAWSON, MB BS DRACR JOHN CHAMBERLAIN, MB BS MRACR BRIAN HARTLEY, MB BS MRCS LRCP MORA FRAOS FFR

Director, Renal Unit

JOHN FRANCIS MALL, MD BS MRCP FRALP

Renal Physician

JOHN EDWARD MORAN, MB BS FRALP

Senior Rheumatologist

JOHN BEVAN WEBB, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Rheumatologist

ELIZABETH ROMA LENAGHAN, MB BS DCH Lind MRCP

Relieving Assistant Rheumatologist

HELEN MARIE MORAN, MB BS FRALP

Clinical Assistant Rheumatology

VICTOR IVO KARLOV, MB BS FRALP

Senior Urologist

PETER JAMES MORTENSEN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Urologist

DANIEL LENAGHAN, MB MS FRCS FRACS

196


Assistant Urologists

JOHN GERARD JOYCE, MB BS FRACS PETER JULIAN METZER, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS FRACS ARNOLD MAX SINGER, MB BS FRACS

Vaccination Lecturer

BRIAN JAMES FEERY, MB BS MRACGP

Senior Vascular Surgeon JOHN LEONARD CONNELL, MB MS FRCS FRAOS FALS

Vascular Surgeon

JOHN COUNDLEY DOYLE, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Assistant Vascular Surgeon

JOHN FRANCIS GURRY, MB BS FRACS FRCS

PRESTON AND NORTHCOTE COMMUNITY HOSPITAL

Senior Physicians

RONALD KEITH DOIG, MD BS FRALP IAN HOME McKENZIE, MB BS FRALP MICHAEL JOHN BRIGNELL, MB BS FRALP

Physicians

GEOFFREY LEIGH LOGGINS, MB BS Monash FRALP VICTOR I. KARLOV, MB BS FRALP JEREMY HAMMOND, MB BS FRALP

Cardiologist

JITENDRA KANTILAL VOHRA, MD BS Bomb. MRCP FRALP

Senior Surgeons

KENNETH STEWART BREARLEY, MB BS FRCS Lind. & Edin. FRACS

JOHN BERNARD FETHERS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS GORDON WALGRAVE TRINCA, MB BS FRACS

Surgeons

DAVID MAYO CONROY, MB BS FRCS FRACS AUBREY WILLIAM JANSZ, MB BS Cey. FRCS FRACS JOHN WILLIAM McKENZIE UPJOHN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS


GEOFFREY NORMAN VAUGHAN, MB BS FRACS DO FRACO

Ophthalmologist

BARRIE WILLIAM GRISOLD NICHOLLS, MB BS FRACS DO


BRENDAN JOHN DOOLEY, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Orthopaedic Surgeon

JOHN FALVEY O'BRIEN, MB BS FRACS

197

Faculty of Medicine

Senior Otorhinolaryngologist

JOHN KENNETH BARNES, MB BS FRCS FRAOS


JOSEPH BALACHANDRA KARALA-PILLAI, MB BS Ceyl. FRCS

DLO FRACS


GEOFFREY IAN TAYLOR, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Plastic Surgeons

RUSSELL JOHN CIRLETT, MB BS FRACS MURRAY JAMES STAPLETON, MB BS FRACS

Senior Urologist

DANIEL LENAGHAN, MS MB FRCS FRACS

Urologist

JOSEPH GERARD JOYCE, MB BS FRACS

Director, Pathology

ANDREW JOHN MURPHY, MB BS FRCPA

Director, Radiology

WINFIELD ROBERT CURTIS BENNETT, MB BS FROR FRACR

The Walter and Eliza Hall Institute of Medical Research

Director

Professor Sir GUSTAV JOSEPH VICTOR NOSSAL, CBE BSc(Med) MB BS Syd. PhD Hon MD Mainz FRACP FRCPA FACIA FAA FRS


DONALD METCALF, AO MD В Sc(Med) Syd. FRCPA FRALP FAA

JACQUES FRANCIS ALBERT PIERRE MILLER, AO BSc(M е d) MB В S Syd. PhD DSc Lind. FAA FRS

Senior Associated Staff

JERRY McKEE ADAMS, BSc Emory PhD Harv. IAN REAP MACKAY, AM MD FRCP FRALP FRCPA THOMAS ELI MANDEL, MB BS GRAHAM FRANK MITCHELL, RDA BVSc Syd. PhD KENNETH DOUGLAS SHORTMAN, BSc Syd. PhD

Associated Staff

ROBIN ANDERS, BAgrSc PhD (Research Scientist, N.H. & M.R.C.)

PERRY BARTLETT, BDSc PhD (Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

FRANK BATTYE, BSc PhD LaT. (Senior Research Officer, N.H. & M.R.C.)

198


ORA BERNARD, MSc Tel-Aviv PhD McG. (Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

ANDREW BOYD, MB BS BMedSc PhD (Senior Research Officer)/The Walter & Eliza Hall Institute/Royal Mel-bourne Hospital Appointment

JENNIFER L. BRESC НК IN, BSc Monash PhD Hershey Penn. (Senior Research Officer)

GRAHAM BROWN, MPH Herv. MB BS FRACP (Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

PRUDENCE BROWN, BA DipSocStud (Social Worker) GORDON BURNS, BSc H.-W. PhD Cantab. DipBact Mmc.

(Lions' Fellow) IAN CLARK-LEWIS, BSc Find, PhD (Senior Research Officer) SUZANNE CORY, PhD Cantab. MSc (Senior Research Fellow,

N.H. & M.R.C.) KATHY M. CRUISE, BAppSc Vic. (Research Assistant) PHILIPPE De М OERLOOSE, MD Geneva (Postdoctoral Fellow) IAN H. FRAZER, BSc(MedSci) Edin, MB ChB Edin. MRCP

(U.K.) (Senior Research Officer, N.H. & M.R.C.) JENNY GAMBLE, BAppSc Vic. (Research Assistant, N.H. &

M.R.C.) LORNA J. GIBSON, BSc Glas. (Research Assistant) JAMES W. GODING, MB BS Monash BMedSc PhD (Research

Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.) EMANUELA HANDMAN, MSc PhD Jerusalem (Senior Research

Officer) ALAN HARRIS, PhD Tor. MSc (Senior Research Fellow, N.Н .

& M.R.C.) MARGARET C. HOLMES, MSc PhD (Senior Research Fellow,

N.H. & M.R.C.) GREGORY JOHNSON, BSc(Ed) BSc PhD (Research Fellow,

N.H. & M.R.C.) ANNE KELSO, BSc(Hons) PhD (Senior Research Officer) DAVID KEMP, BSc PhD Adel. (Research Fellow, N.H. &

M.R.C.) NORBERT KOCH, PhD Marburg (Postdoctoral Fellow) SUSANNE KOCH, PhD Marburg (Postdoctoral Fellow) ANGEL LOPEZ, PhD Lend. (Senior Research Officer) JANE McNEILAGE, PhD Otago (Senior Research Officer) NICOS NICOLA, BSc PhD (Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.) BEVERLEY PIKE, FAIMLS MSc (Research Officer, N.H. &

M. R.C.) EDOUARD POTWOROWSKI, MSc Montreal PhD Monash

(Visiting Scientist) JOHN PYE, 8Sc (Senior Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.) IAN C. ROBERTS-THOMSON, MD FRACP (Associate) ROBERT SAINT, BSc PhD Adel. (Senior Research Officer) JOHN SC Н RADER, MB BS Adel. BMedSc PhD (Senior Re-

search Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.) ROLAND SCOLLAY, BSc PhD A.N.U. (Senior Research Officer) TERENCE W. SPIТН ILL, BSc PhD Monash (Senior Research

Officer) WAYNE THOMAS, BSc PhD W.Aust. (Senior Research Officer,

N.H. & M.R.C.)

199

Faculty of Medicine

MATHEW VADAS, BSc( Ме d) MB BS Syd. PhD FRALP (Senior Research Fellow)

ELIZABETH WEBB, BSc (Research Officer, N.H. & M.R.C.) SENGA WHITTINGHAM, MB ChB N.Z. DCP Lind. PhD FRALP

FRCPA (Senior Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.) ANNE WILSON, BAppSc Vic. (Research Assistant) JANE YIN, BSc (Research Assistant)

Howard Florey Institute of Experimental Physiology and Medicine

Director and Professor of Experimental Physiology and Medicine

DEREK ASHWORTH DENTIN, MB BS KVA FRACP FAA

Deputy Director

JOHN PAUL COGHLAN, PhD DSc (Senior Principal Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

Associate Directors

BRYAN HUDSON, MD BS PhD FRACP FRCP HonFACP (Senior Principal Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

HUGH DAVID N'ALL, MD BS FRACP (Senior Principal Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

Principal Research Fellows

JOHN REGINALD BLAIR-WEST, MSc PhD BRUCE ALAN SCOGGINS, MAgrSc Comb. PhD GEOFFREY WILLIAM TREGEAR, PhD Monash BSc

Senior Research Fellows

HUGH WILLIAM GORDON BAKER, MB BS PhD Monash MRACP

BRUCE ERNEST KEMP, BAgrSc Adel. PhD Flind.

Research Fellows

JOHN GORDON McDOUGALL, BSc PhD MICHÁEL JOSEPH McKINLEY, MSc PhD RICHARD STUART WEISINGER, BA OkIa.C. MSc PhD Wash.

Senior Research Officers

KINGSLEY JOHN FRASER ALLEN, MSC PhD MAIP LAWRENCE WILLIAM EDDIE, BSc Manit. PhD ROSS TERRENCE FERNLEY, BSc Q'Id. PhD Monash DAVID TAI WAl FEI, BSc Manit. MSc Mcl. PhD JEFFREY JOHN GORMAN, BSc PhD PETER JOHN HUDSON, BSc Adel. PhD Camb. JOHN FREDERICK NELSON, MSc PhD DMLT ARMIT

Research Officers

ALDONA BUTKUS, DMLT ANGELA PASSM/RE GIBBON, BSc RUTH EMILY HIGGINSON, BSc Q'id. MARIE JOHN, DipChemEng Stockholm 'AUSMA MIROVICS, MSc Monash 'MARGARET HELEN SMITH, BSc JOHN RAMSAY WALBH, BSc ARMIT

200


Research Assistants

MARIO CONGUI, BSc CHRISTINA NOEL FAGAN, BSc Monash RODNEY JOHN FOX, HNDCChem Eng. DAVID RUSSELL GOODDEN, BSc W.Ont. PAUL ANTHONY JONES, ARMIT JENNIFER DIANE PENSCHOW, DIT AAIIT ELIZABETH GAY THOMAS, BSc JANETTE JOY TRESHAM, BSc W.Aust.

Consultant

Professor ROY DOUGLAS WRIGHT, DSc A.N.U. & Meib. HonLLD A.N.U. & Meib. MB MS FRALP

Visiting Scientists Associate Professor YU-CHANG DU, equiv. BSc Peking equiv.

PhD Academia Sinica Shanghai Inst. Biochem PATRICK SPENCER COX, MSc Iowa PhD Tennessee

Associated Staff

Professor KENNETH JOHN HARDY, MB BS FRACS FACS (Austin Hospital)

Professor GRAEME BRUCE RYAN, MD BS PhD FRCPA FRACP (Anatomy)

JUDITH ANNE WHITWORTH, MD BS PhD FRALP (Royal Melbourne Hospital)

ELVIE MARELYN WINTOUR, MSc PhD (Physiology)

201 н

воок І isт s (PR) = Preliminary Reading • = Essential text which students should possess

DEGREES of M.B. and B.S.

FIRST YEAR 610-005 CHEMISTRY (MEDICAL COURSE)

McTigue P T Chemistry. Key to the Earth MUP (PR) •Allinger N L et al Organic Chemistry 2nd ed Worth

Morris J G A Biologist's Physical Chemistry Arnold Experimental Chemistry Organic Physical and Inorganic Medical Course

Depart Pub cn

640-007 PHYSICS A (MEDICAL COURSE) 640-009 PHYSICS B (MEDICAL COURSE)

Nave C R and Nave B C Physics for Health Sciences 2nd ed Saunders (PR)

• Kane J W and Stornheim M N Physics Wiley Holwill M E and Silvester N R Introduction to Biological Physics Wiley Benedek G B and Villars F H M Physics with Illustrative Examples from

Medicine and Biology Vols I-Ill Addison-Wesley MacDonald S G G and Burns D M Physics for the Life afd Health

Sciences Addison-Wesley Cromer A H Physics for the Life Sciences McGraw-Hill Marion J B General Physics with Bioscience Essays 1979 Wiley

600-004 BIOLOGY (MEDICAL COURSE) Scientific American Life Sciences Books Vertebrate Structures and

Functions ed N K Wessells Paperback 1974 (PR) • Buchsbaum R Animals without backbones 2nd ed Paperback Chicago

UP 1975 •Schmidt Nielson K Animal Physiology Adaptation and Environment

2nd ed paperback CUP 1979 •Weichart C K Anatomy of the Chordates paperback 4th ed McGraw-

Hill 1970


•Hilgard E R Atkinson R C & Atkinson R L Introduction to Psychology 7th ed 1979 Harcourt Brace Johanovich

Mussen P The Psychological Development of the Child 2nd or subs ed Prentice-Hall

Eysenck H J Uses and Abuses of Psychology Pelican (PR) •Gardner G et al Social Psychology 1981 Prentice-Hall Sussex M Wand Watson W Sociology in Medicine 1971 OUP

202

Book List

Jones R K & Jones P A Sociology in Medicine 1975 English University Press

Sinclair D Human Growth After Birth 1st ed OUP McLaren D S Nutrition and Disorders 1st ed Churchill Livingstone Ford B The Elderly Australian 1978 Pelican 'Hetzel B S Health and Australian Scciety 3rd ed Penguin Glover J Causing Death and S а ving Life Penguin Duncan R C et a1 Introductory Biostatistics for the Health Sciences

Wiley Adams G Essentials of Geriatric Medicine Oxford Med. Pub ns Coni N Davis W and Webster S Lecture Notes on Geriatrics Blackwell

Sci Pub

516-011 ANATOMY

TOPOGRAPHICAL ANATOMY •Cunningham's Manual of Practical Anatomy vol 1 14th ed OUP 'Moore K L Clinically Oriented Anatomy Williams & Wilkins

HISTOLOGY 'Copenhaver W M Kelly D E & Wood R L Bailey's Textbook of His-

tology 17th ed Williams & Wilkins `Wheater P R Burkitt H G and Daniels V G Functional Histology Chur-

chill Livingstone Bloom W & Fawcett H D Textbook of Histology 10th ed Saunders

EMBRYOLOGY Hamilton W J Boyd J D Mossman H W Human Embryology 4th ed

Williams and Wilkins `Moore K L The Developing Human 2nd ed Saunders

GENETICS Thompson J S & Thompson M W Genetics In Medicine 2nd ed

Saunders

585-011 FIRST AID COURSE 'St John А mbulапсэ Assoc First Aid Ruskin 'Komesaroff D Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation VACGP 1980

536-011 PHYSIOLOGY

Vander A J Sherman J H & Luciano D S Human Physiology, Mech- anisms of Body Function 3rd ed 1980 McGraw-Hill (PR)

See also 536-021.

Further information re books available from department of Physiology before commencement of course.

SECOND YEAR 516-021 ANATOMY

TOPOGRAPHICAL ANATOMY

'Cunningham's Manual of Practical Anatomy 3 vols 14th ed OUP Last R J Anatomy, Regional & Applied 6th ed Churchill

203

Book List

Moore K L Clinically Oriented Anatomy Williams & Wilkins Gray's Anatomy, Descriptive & Applied 36th ed Longmans Anderson J E Grant's Atlas of Anatomy 7th ed Williams & Wilkins

HISTOLOGY

•Wheater P R Burkitt H G and Daniels V G Functional Histology Churchill Livingstone

•Copenhaver WI Kelly D E & Wood R L Bailey's Textbook of Histology 17th ed Williams & Wilkins

Bloom W & Fawcett H D Textbook of Histology 10th ed Saunders

EMBRYOLOGY

Hamilton W J Boyd J D & Mosman H W Human Embryology 4th ed Williams & Wilkins

•Moore K L The Developing Human 2nd ed Saunders

536-021 PHYSIOLOGY Vander A J Sherman J H& Luciano D S Human Physiology—Mechan-

isms of Body Function 3rd ed 1980 McGraw-Hill (PR) Brobeck ed Best & Taylor's Physiological Basis of Medical Practice

10th ed 1979 Williams & Wilkins or Guyton Textbook of Medical Physiology 2 vols 6th ed 1980 Mosby or Gallig Review of Medical Physiology 10th ed 1981 Lang or Mountcastle ed Medical Physiology 2 vols 14th ed 1980 Mosby Further information re books available from the department of Physiology

prior to commencement of course.

521-021 BIOCHEMISTRY •McGilvery R W Biochemistry A Functional Approach 2nd ed 1979

Saunders or •Stryer L Biochemistry 2nd ed 1981 Freeman Lehninger A L Principles of Biochemistry 1982 Worth Stent G S & Calendar R Molecular Genetics 2nd ed 1978 Freeman Stanbury J B Wyngaarden J 8 and Frederickson D S The Metabolic

Basis of Inherited Disease 4th ed 1978 McGraw-Hill Tietz N W Fundamentals of Clinical Chemistry 2nd ed 1976 Saunders Whitby L G Percy-Robb I W and Smith A F Lecture Notes on Clinical

Chemistry 2nd ed 1980 Blackwell

500-202 NEUROSCIENCE •Cunningham's Manual of Practical Anatomy vol 3 14th ed 1979 OUP Carpenter M B Core Text of Neuroanatomy 2nd ed 1978 Williams &

Wilkins • Mountcastle V B ed Medical Physiology 14th ed 1980 vol 1 Mosby or

N.B. Those students who select Advanced Study Units relating to the nervous system ere strongly advised to purchase Mountcastle.

204

Book List

554-201 BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCE 2 'Samson I G and Sarason B R Abnormal Psychology. The Problem of

Maladaptive Behaviour Prentice-Hall 3rd ed 1980 Price R H Abnormal Behaviour Perspectives in Conflict Holt Rinehard

& Winston 1978 2nd ed

THIRD YEAR 521-031 METABOLISM AND ENDOCRINOLOGY

Davidson S Passmore R Brock J F & Truswell A S Human Nutrition and Dietetics 7th ed 1979 Churchill Livingstone

Stanbury J B Wyngaarden J B& Fredrickson D S The Metabolic Basis of Inherited Disease 4th ed 1978 McGraw-Hill

585-301 SOCIAL AND PREVENTIVE MEDICINE

'Morton R F & Hebel J R A Study Guide to Epidemiology and Biostatis-tics 1979 Univ Park Press

Barker D & Rose G Epidemiology in Medical Practice 1976 Churchill Alderson M . An Introduction to Epidemiology 1976 Macmillan

531-031 PATHOLOGY

'Anderson J R Muir's Textbook of Pathology 11th ed 1980 Arnold or 'Robbins S L & Cotran R Pathologic Basis of Disease 2nd ed 1979

Saunders Turley J V Acute Inflammation 1st ed 1972 Churchill Livingstone Florey H General Pathology 4th ed 1970 Lloyd-Luke Louis C J Tumours 1978 Churchill Livingstone Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology 5th ed 1979 Churchill Willis R A Pathology of Tumours 4th ed 1968 Butterworth Willis R A Spread of Tumours in the Human Body 3rd ed 1973 Butter-

worth Curran R C Colour Atlas of Histopathology 2nd rev ed 1972 Harvey

Miller & Metcalf or Sandritter W & Wartman W B Colour Atlas and Textbook of Tissue and

Cellular Pathology 5th ed 1976 Yr Bk Med Pub Inc

534-031 PHARMACOLOGY Bowman W C and Rand M J Text-book of Pharmacology 2nd ed 1980

Blackwell Creasey W A Drug Disposition in Humans OUP 1979 'Goodman L S and Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Thera-

peutics 6th ed 1980 Macmillan Di Palma J R Drill's Pharmacology in Medicine 4th ed 1971 McGraw

Hill Goldstein A Aronow L and Kalman S M Principles of Drug Action 2nd

ed 1974 Wiley

205

Book List

Meyers F H Jawetz E and Goldfin A Medical Pharmacology 6th ed 1979 Lange

Passmore R and Robson J S A Companion to Medical Studies Vol 2 Pharmacology, Microbiology, General Pathology & Related Subjects 2nd ed 1978 Blackwell

Martindale's Extra Pharmacopeia 27th ed 1977 Pharmaceutical

526-032 MICRO В IOLO 7У (INCLUDIN3 IMMUNOLOGY) Burnet F M & White D O Natural History of Infectious Disease 1972

CUP (PR) •Notes on Medical Microbiology Microbiol dept of U of M •Microbiological Techniques Microbiol dept U of M 'Duguid et el Mackie and McCartney's Medical Microbiology Vol 1

Microbial Infections 13th ed 1978 Churchill Livingstone or • Braude A I ed Microbiology 1982 Saunders or 'Baron S ed Medical Microbiology 1982 Addison-Wesley or •Benacerraf B and Unanue E Textbook of Immunology 1982 Williams

& Wilkins • Benenson A S Control of Communicable Diseases in Man Amer Pub

11th Assoc Fenner F and White D O Medical Virology 2nd ed 1976 Academic

FOURTH YEAR 500-491 MEDICINE

See Sixth Year.

500-492 SURGERY GENERAL AND SPECIAL SURGERY

'Clain A Hamilton Bailey's Physical Signs in Clinical Surgery 1980 Wright

or Browse H An Introduction to the Symptoms end Signs of Surgical

Disease 1978 Arnold 'Bailey I and Love McN A Short Practice of Surgery 1981 Churchill

Livingstone or Dunphy J E and Way L W Current Surgical Diagnosis afd Treatment

1981 Lange or Schwartz S I Principles of Surgery 1979 McGraw-Hill Adams J C Outline of Fractures 7th ed 1978 Churchill Livingstone Dudley I A F Scott An Aid to Clinical Surgery 1978 Churchill Liv-

ingstone Burnett W Clinical Science for Surgeons 1981 Butterworths 'Adams J C Outline or Orthopaedics 1977 Churchill Livingstone 'Jackson C R S The Eye in General Practice 1975 Churchill Livingstone Bedford M A A Colour Atlas of Ophthalmological Diagnosis 1971

Wolfe

206

Book List

• Foxen E H M . Lecture Notes on Diseases of the Ear Nose and Throat 1980 Blackwell

Bull T R A Colour Atlas of ENT Diagnosis 1977 Wolfe

RADIOLOGY

•Simon G X-Ray Diagnosis for Clinical Students 1975 Butterworths

SURGICAL ANATOMY

Last R J Anatomy Regional and Applied 1978 Churchill Livingstone

FIFTH YEAR

500-591 PAEDIATRICS

Hull D and Johnston D I Essential Paediatrics 1981 Churchill Liv-ingstone

Kempe C I Silver I K and O'Brien D Current Pediatric Diagnosis and Treatment 5th ed 1978 Lange

Illingworth R S The Ncrmal Child 6th ed 1975 Churchill (PR) Jones P G Clinical Paediatric Surgery 2nd ed 1976 Ure Smith Rudolph A M ed Pediatrics 16th ed 1977 Appleton-Century-Crofts Silver I K et al Handbook of Paediatrics 12th ed 1977 Lange Smith D W and Marshall R F Introduction to Clinical Paediatrics 1972 Hughes J G Paediatrics 5th ed 1980 Mosby А plеу J afd MacKeith R The Child end His Symptoms 3rd ed 1978

Blackwell Forfar J O and Arneil C G Textbook of Paediatrics 2nd ed 1978

Churchill Livingstone Iilingworth R S The Development of the Infant and Young Child Normal

and Abnormal 6th ed 1975 Churchill Illingworth R S Common Symptoms of Diseases in Childhood 6th ed

1979 Churchill Livingstone Vaughan V C McKay R J and Nelson W E Textbook of Paediatrics 11th

ed 1979 Saunders

500-592 PSYCHIATRY •Davies B An Introduction to Clinical Psychiatry 1981 MUP •Dennerstein L Burrows G Cox L & Wood C Gynaecology, Sex and

Psyche 1978 MUP Bloch S An Introduction to the Psychotherapies 1979 OUP A guide with additional references will be issued.

500-593 & 500-693 OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY •Beischer N A and Mackay E V Obstetrics afd the Newborn 1976

Saunders •Townsend L Obstetrics for Students 3rd ed 1978 Macmillan (RWH) •Townsend L Gynaecology for Students 3rd ed 1975 Macmillan Pepperell R J Hudson B and Wood C The Infertile Couple 1980 Chur-

chill Livingstone •Beischer N A and Mackay E U Colour Atlas of Gynaecology 1981

Saunders

207

Book List

500-594 COMMUNITY MEDICINE AND CLINICAL PRACTICE

'Plueckhahn V D Lectures on Forensic Medicine and Pathology 5th ed Melb Uni

Knight B Legal Aspects of Medical Practice 2nd ed Churchill Liv-ingstone

Scorer G and Wing A Decision Making in Medicine The Practice of its Ethics 1st ed Pitman

Thomson WAR A Dictionary of Medical Ethics and Practice 1977 Burton A W Medical Ethics and the Law 3rd ed Aust Med Publ Adams G Essentials of Geriatric Medicine 2nd ed Oxf led Pubin and Coni N et al Lecture Notes on Geriatrics 2nd ed Blackwell Sci Pub Howe A L Towards an Older Australia 1st ed CUP Bradford D VD in Australia 1st ed MUP Morrell D An Introduction to Primary Medical Care 1st ed Churchill

Livingstone Fry J Common Diseases Their Nature Incidence and Care 1974 МТР 'Adams J C Outline of Fractures 1978 Churchill Livingstone • Birch A A and Tolmie J D Anaesthesia for the Uninterested 1st ed

Univ Park or •Lunn J N Lecture Notes on Anaesthetics 1979 Blackwell Norris W and Campbell D Anaesthetics Resuscitation and Intensive

Care A Textbook for Students and Residents 6th ed Livingstone

SIXTH YEAR

As for 500-492, 500-591, 500-592, 500-593, 500-594 and in addition the following:—

Lovell R R H and Doyle A E An Introduction to Clinical Medicine 2nd ed 1971 MUP

Davidson S ed The Principles and Practice of Medicine 12th ed 1977 Livingstone

Beeson P B and McDermott W Textbook of Medicine 15th ed 1979 Saunders

Harrison T R Principles of Internal Medicine 9th ed 1980 McGraw-Hill MacLeod J Clinical Examination 5th ed Livingstone 1979 Krugman S and Katz S Infectious Diseases of Children and Adults 7th

ed Mosby 1980 Christie A B Infectious Disease Epidemiology end Clinical Practice 3rd

ed Livingstone 1980 Kucers A and Bennett N lcK The Use of Antibiotics 3rd ed Heinemann

1979 Laurence D R and Bennett P N Clinical Pharmacology 5th ed 1980

Churchill Livingstone Bowman W C and Rand I J Textbook of Pharmacology 2nd ed Black-

well Goodman L S and Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics

6th ed 1980 Macmillan Martindale W The Extra Pharmacopoeia 27th ed 1977 Pharmeceutical Avery G S ed Drug Treatment Principles and Practice of Clinical Phar-

macology and Therapeutics 2nd ed 1980 Adis

208

Book List

Graham J D P An Introduction to Human Pharmacology 1979 OUP Girdwood R H ed Clinical Pharmacology 24th ed 1979 Bailliere Tindall Vaughan D and Asbury T General Ophthalmology 8th ed 1977 Lange

(PR)

Cormack J et al Practice A Handbook of Primary Medical Care 1976 Kluwer-Harrap

Hodgkin K Towards Earlier Diagnosis 1973 Church:II Livingstone Barber J H and Biddy E A General Practice Medicine 1975 Churchill

Livingstone Browne K and Freeling P The Doctor-Patient Relationship 1976 Chur-

chill Livingstone Walpole R Community Health in Australia 1st ed Pelican

DEGREE OF MASTER OF GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS

PART 1

516-731 ANATOMY Gray's Anatomy, Descriptive and Applied 36th ed Longmans Cunningham's Textbook of Anatomy 12th or sub ed OUP

516-732 EMBRYOLOGY & HISTOLOGY

Bloom W & Fawcett H D Textbook of Histology 10th ed Saunders Hamilton W J Boyd J D & Mossman H W Human Embryology 4th ed

MacMillan Roberts J A F An Introduction to Medical Genetics 4th ed 1970 OUP

579-735 PHYSIOLOGY, BIOCHEMISTRY AND PHARMACOLOGY

PHYSIOLOGY

Brobeс k J R ed Best & Ta у lor's Physiological Basis of Medical Practice 10tß) ed 1979 Williams г Wilk n з

Passmore R & Robson J S A Companion to Medical Studies Vol 1: Anatomy, Biochemistry, Physiology and Related Subjects 2nd ed 1976 Blackwell

Claye A & Bourne A British Obstetrical and Gynaecological Practice 3rd ed 1963 Н eiпе mа nп Ρ

Dawes G S Foetal and Neonatal Physiology 1968 Yr Bk Pbl Goodman L S & Gilman A Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics 1975

Macmillan Hytten F E & Leitch I The Physiology of Human Pregnancy 2nd ed 1971

Blackwell Mountcastle V B ed Medical Physiology 14th ed 1980 Mosby Shearman R ed Human Reproductive Physiology 1972 Blackwell 'Phillip and Barnes Scientific Foundations of Obstetrics and Gynae-

cology 2nd ed 1977 Heinemann

209

Book List

Catt K J An ABC of Endocrinology 1971 The Lancet Laurence D R Clinical Pharmacology 4th ed 1973 Churchill Martin E W Hazards of Medication 1971 Lippincott 'Melmon K & Morrelli H Clinical Pharmacology 2nd ed 1978 Macmillan

'Passmore R & Robson J A C о '? рап i оп to Medical Studies Vol II:

Pharmacology, Microbiology, Gen Pathology and Related Subjects 2nd ed Blackwell

• Bowman & Rand Textbook of Pharmacology 3rd ed 1980 Blackwell

BIOCHEMISTRY

McGilvery R W Biochemistry A Functional Approach 2nd ed 1979 Saunders

Stryer L Biochemistry 2nd ed 1981 Freeman White A et al Principles of Biochemistry 6th ed 1978 McGraw-Hill

PHARMACOLOGY

Bowman W C and Rand M J Textbook of Pharmacology 2nd ed 1980 Blackwell

Melmon K L and Morrelli H F Clinical Pharmacology 2nd ed 1978 Mac-millan

Passmore R and Robson J S A Companion to Medical Studies Vol II: Pharmacology, Microbiology, General Pathology and Related Sub-jects 2nd ed 1978 Blackwell

500-733 PATHOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY

PATHOLOGY

Hurley J V Acute Inflammation 1st ed Churchill Livingstone 'Novak E Gynecologic and Obstetric Pathology 8th ed Saunders Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology 5th ed Churchill

MICROBIOLOGY

Braude A 1 ed Medical Microbiology and Infectious Diseases 1981 Saunders

or Mandell G L et al Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases 1979

Wiley Duguid et al Medical Microbiology Vol I 13th ed 1978 Churchill

Livingstone Fenner F & White D O Medical Virology 2nd ed 1976 Academic Benacerraf B and Unanue Textbook of Immunology 1982 Williams &

Wilkins Relevant microbiology topics in current Australian, American and English

medical journals

579-734 OBSTETRICS INCLUDING NEO-NATAL PAEDIATRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY

Kerr J M M Operative Obstetrics ed by Moir J C and Myerscough P R 9th ed 1977 Dailliere Tindall & Cassell

Stallworthy J A & Bourne G L Recent Advances in Obstetrics and Gynaecology 12 ed 1977 Churchill

210

Book List

•Greenhill J P & Friedman E A Biological Principles and Practice of Obstetrics 1974 Saunders

•Howkins J & Stallworthy J Bonney's Gynaecological Surgery 8th ed 1974 Bailliere Tindall

Mattingly R F Te Linde's Operative Gynecology 5th ed 1977 Lippin-cott

Jeffcoate T N A Principles of Gynaecology 4th ed Butterworth •Novak E R Jones G S & Jones H W Novak's Textbook of Gynecology

9th ed 1975 Williams & Wilkins

DIPLOMA IN OPHTHALMOLOGY PART 1

516-801 ANATOMY Wolff, E The Anatomy of the Eye & the Orbit 7th ed Saunders Duke-Elder S System of Ophthalmology Vols 1 2 3 1968 1961 1963-4

Kimpton Mann I C Developmental Abnormalities of the Eye 2nd ed OUP Mann I C The Development of the Human Eye 3rd ed Grune & Stratton Hamilton W J Boyd J D & Mossman H W Human Embryology 4th ed

Macmillan Bloom W & Fawcett D Textbook of Histology 10th ed Saunders

536-801 PHYSIOLOGY AND PHARMACOLOGY PHYSIOLOGY

Mountcastle V B ed Medical Physiology 14th ed 1980 Mosby Dayson H Physiology of the Eye 3rd ed 1972 Churchill Duke-Elder S System of Ophthalmology Vol IV 1968 Kimpton Handbook of Sensory Physiology Vol VII 1 2 3 4 1972 Springer Verlag Broback J R ed Best & Taylor's Physiological Basis of Medical Prac-

tice 10th ed 1979 Williams & Wilkins

PHARMACOLOGY

Vale J and Cox B Drugs and the Eye 1978 Butterworth Havener W H Ocular Pharmacology 4th ed 1978 Mosby O'Connor D P H The Actions and Uses of Ophthalmic Drugs 2nd ed

1981 Butterworth 'Goodman & Gilman The Pharmacol Basis of Therapeutics 6th ed 1980

Macmillan . •Bowman W & Rand M J Textbook of Pharmacology 1980 Blackwell

OPTICS

Dayson H Physiology of the Eye Sections Il IV & V 3rd ed 1972 Chur- chill

Duke-Elder S System of Ophthalmology Vol V 1970 Kimpton Duke-Elder S System of Ophthalmology Vol VII 1973 Kimpton Dayson H The Eye Vol 4 Part 1 4th ed 1980 Academic Bennett A G Emsley & Swaine's Ophthalmic Lenses 1968 Hatton Bennett A G Optics of Contact Lenses 4th ed 1966 Assoc of Disp

Opticians Fincham W H A Optics 7th ed 1965 Hatton

211

Book List

Reinecke R D & Herne R J Refraction A programmed Text 1965

Appleton-Century-Crofts Glossary of terms relating to ophthalmic lenses 1962 Brit Standard 3521

531-801 PATHOLOGY INCLUDING MICROBIOLOGY PATHOLOGY

'Hogan M Ophthalmic Pathology 1962 Saunders 'Greer C H Ocular Pathology 3rd ed 1978 Blackwell 'Reese A B Tumors of the Eye 3rd ed 1976 lieber 'Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology 5th ed 1979 Churchill Hurley J V Acute Inflammation 1st ed 1972 Churchill Livingstone

MICROBIOLOGY

Duiguid et al Medical Microbiology Vol 1 13th ed 1978 Churchill Livingstone

Braude A I Medical Microbiology and Infectious Diseases 1981

Saunders or Mandell G L et al Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases 1979

Wiley Duiguid et al Medical Microbiology Vol 1 13th ed 1978 Churchill

Livingstone Fenner F & White D 0 Medical Virology 2nd ed 1976 Academic Benacerraf B and Unanue E Textbook of Immunology 1982 Williams &

Wilkins Relevant microbiological topics in current American, Australian and

English medical journals

DIPLOMA IN LARYNGOLOGY AND OTOLOGY PART 1 .

516-811 ANATOMY Frazer J E Anatomy of the Human Skeleton 8th ed Churchill Gray's Anatomy, Descriptive and Applied 35th ed Longmans or Cunningham's Textbook of Anatomy 12th ed OUP Negus V E Comparative Anatomy end Physiology of the Larynx 1949

Heinemann Negus V E The Comparative Anatomy & Physiology of the Nose and

Paranasal Sinuses 1958 Livingstone Bloom W & Fawcett D Textbook of Histology 10th ed 1975 Saunders Hamilton W J Boyd J D & MosSman H W Human Embryology 4th ed

MacMillan

536-811 PHYSIOLOGY Mountcastle V B Medical Physiology 14th ed 1980 Mosby or Keidel W & Neff W Handbook of Sensory Physiology Vol 5 i Auditory

System 1974 Springer Verlag Bekesy G Von Experiments in Hearing Tr and ed by Wever 1960

McGraw-Hill

212

Book List

577-811 OTOLARYNGOLOGY

Friedman .I Pathology of the Ear 1974 Blackwell 'Montgomery W W Surgery of the Upper Respiratory System (2 vols)

Lea & Febiger Mawson S R Diseases of the Ear 3rd ed Lewis 'Hinchcliffe & Harrison Scientific Foundations of Otolaryngology Heine-

mann ' Scott-Brown Ballantyne J & Groves J Diseases of the Ear, Nose &

Throat new ed Buttorworth 'Stall P & Магап A G D Head & Neck Surgery 1972 Heinemann Anson B J & Donaldson J A Surgical Anatomy of the Temporal Bone

and Ear 2nd ed Saunders Katz J Handbook of Clinical Audiology 2nd ed Williams & Wilkins Lore J M An Atlas of Head and Neck Surgery (2 vols) 2nd ed Saunders Moss W T & Brown W N Therapeutic Radiology: Rationale Technique

Results 3rd ed Mosby

CURRENT JOURNALS

Acta Otolaryngologica Annals of Otology, Rhinology & Laryngology Archives of Otolaryngology Clinical Otolaryngology Journal of Laryngology and Otology Journal of the Otolaryngological Society of Australia Laryngoscope

PATHOLOGY INCLUDIN3 MICROBIOLOGY

PATHOLOGY

'Anderson J R Muir's Textbook of Pathology 11th ed 1980 Arnold 'Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology 5th ed 1979 Churchill Friedman I Pathology of the Ear 1st ed 1974 Blackwell Hurley J V Acute Inflammation 1st ed 1972 Churchill Livingstone Friedman I & Osborn D A Systemic Pathology vol 1 chs 4, 5 and 6

2nd ed 1976 Symmers W S ed Churchill Livingstone

MICROBIOLOGY

Braude A I ed Medical Microbiology and Infectious Diseases 1981 Saunders

or Mandell G L et al Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases 1979

Wiley Duguid et al Medical Microbiology Vol I 13th ed 1978 Churchill

Livingstone Fenner F and White D 0 Medical Virology 2nd ed 1976 Academic Benacerraf B and Unanue Textbook of Immunology 1982 Williams &

Wilkins Relevant microbiological topics in current American, Australian and

English medical journals

213

DIPLOMA IN DIAGNOSTIC RADIOLOGY

YEAR 1

516-821 ANATOMY

• Frazer J E Anatomy of the Human Skeleton 6th ed Churchill •Gray's Anatomy, Descriptive & Applied 35th ed Longmans or •Cunningham's Textbook of Anatomy 10th or sub ed OUP or •Lockhart R D Hamilton G F & Fyfe F W Anatomy of the Human Body

1965 Faber Meschan I Anatomy Basic to Radiology 1975 Saunders Hamilton W J Boyd J D & Mossman H W Human Embryology 4th ed

MacMillan Weir J & Abrahams P An Atlas of Radiological Anatomy Pitman Medical Kieffer S A & Heitzman E R An Atlas of Cross-Sectional Anatomy

Harper & Row

555-821 PHYSICS

'Christensen E E Currey T S & Dowdey J E An Introduction to the Physics of Diagnostic Radiology 2nd ed 1978 Lea & Febiger

•Early P J Razzak M A & Sodee D B Textbook of Nuclear Medicine Technology 2nd ed Mosby

• ICRP Publication No 26 Recommendations of the International Com• mission on Radiological Protection. Annals of the ICRP Vol 1 No 3 1977 Pergamon

• ICRP Publication Nos 15 & 21 Combined Protection against Ionizing Radiation from External Sources Pergamon .

• ICRP Publication No 25 The Handling, Storage, Use and Disposal of Unsealed Radionuclides in Hospitals and Medical Research Estab-lishments. Annals of the ICRP Vol 1 No 2 Pergamon

• ICRP Publication No 16 Protection of the Patient in X-ray Diagnosis Pergamon

• ICRP Publication No 17 Protection of the Patient in Radionuclide Investigation Pergamon

•McDicken W N Diagnostic Ultrasonics Principles and Use of Instru-ments Crosby Lockwood Staples

New P F J & Scott W R Computed Tomography of the Brain and Orbit 1975 Williams & Wilkins

•Revised Radiation Protection Standards for Individuals Exposed to Ioniz-ing Radiation 1967 NH & MRC

•Dose Equivalents, Maximum Permissible Doses and Dose Limits of Ionizing Radiation 1969 NH & MRC

•Minimizing of Radiological Hazards to Patients 1966 NH & MRC (T) Notes on Medical Procedure for Radiation Accidents and Radioactive

Contamination 1968 NH & MRC (Copies of NH & MRC publications may be obtained free of charge from

the Secretary National Health and Medical Research Council PO Box 100 Curtin ACT 2605)

214

Book List

555-822 RADIODIAGNOSIS GENERAL RADIOLOGY

Keats T E An Atlas of Normal Roentgen Variants 1973 Med Pub Year Book

Lasser Elliot C Dynamic Factors in Roentgen Diganosis 1967 Williams & Wilkins

Reeder M M & Felson B Gamuts in Radiology 1975 Audiovisual Radio-logy of Cincinnati

'Sutton D A Textbook of Radiology and Imaging 1980 Churchill Livingstone

RADIOGRAPHY AND RADIOGRAPHIC ANATOMY

Clarke K C Positioning in Radiography 10th ed 1979 Heinemann Meschan I Radiographic Positioning and Related Anatomy 1968 Saun-

ders Meschan I An At/es of Normal Radiographic Anatomy 1959 Saunders

CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM AND HEAD

Newton & Potts Radiology of Skull & Brain Vols 1 & 2 Mosby Pearson H 0 & Kieffer S A Introduction to Neuroradiology 1972

Harper & Row Shapiro R Myelography 2nd ed 1968 Med Pub Year Book Traveras J M and Wood E H Diagnostic Neuroradiology 2nd ed 1976

Williams & Wilkins

PAEDIATRICS

"Caffey J Paediatric Xray Diagnosis Vols 1 & 2 6th ed Med Pub Year Book

SKELETAL SYSTEM AND SOFT TISSUE Murray R O and Jacobson H G The Radiology of Skeletal Disorders

Vols 1 2 & 3 1977 Churchill Livingstone Kohler A Borderlands of the Normal and Early Pathological in Skeletal

Roentgenology 1968 Grune & Stratton English trans

G I TRACT

Anacker Endoscopic Retrograde Pancreaticocholargiography Margulis & Burherme Alimentary Trac Roentgenology Vol I & I1 1967

Mosby Marshak & Lidner Radiology of the Small Intestine 1976 Saunders Marshak et el Radiology of the Colon 1980 Saunders

CARDIOVASCULAR

Abrams H L Angiography Vol I & II 2nd ed 1971 Little Brown Cooley R N & Schreiber M H Radiology of the Heart and Great Vessels

3rd ed Williams & Wilkins

CHEST

'Felson B Chest Roentgenology 1973 Saunders Fraser and Pare Diagnostic Diseases of the Chest Vols I to IV 1979

Saunders Simon G Principles of Chest Xray Diagnosis 4th ed Butterworth

215

Book List

GENITO-URINARY TRACT

Emmett & Witten Clinical Urography Vol I II & III 3rd ed Saunders

NUCLEAR MEDICINE •Andrews J & Milne M J Nuclear Medicine, Clinical and Technological

Bases 1977 Wiley

ULTRASOUND

'Taylor Atlas of Gray Scale Ultrasonography Churchill Livingstone

DENTAL

Bhaskar S N Radiographic Interpretation for the Dentist 2nd ed Mosby

MAMMOGRAPHY

Wolfe J N Xeroradiography of the Breast Thomas Wolfe J N Xeroradiography, Uncalcified Breast Masses Thomas

YEAR 2

531-821 PATHOLOGY

'Anderson J R Muir's Textbook of Pathology 11th ed 1980 Arnold or • Robbins S L & Cotran R Pathologic Basis of Disease 2nd ed 1979

Saunders •Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology 5th ed 1979 Churchill Anderson W A D Pathology 7th ed Mosby Payling Wright G & Symmers W St C Systemic Pathology 2nd ed 1975

Longmans Hurley J V Acute Inflammation 1st ed 1972 Churchill Livingstone Louis C J Tumours 1978 Churchill Livingstone Willis R A Spread of Tumours in the Human Body 3rd ed 1973 Butter-

worth Willis R A Pathology of Tumours 4th ed 1968 Butterworth

DIPLOMA IN PSYCHOLOGICAL MEDICINE PART 1

554-841 MEDICAL PSYCHOLOGY •Hilgard E R Atkinson R C & Atkinson R L Introduction to Psychology

7th ed Harcourt Brace Jovanovich Gardner G et al Social Psychology 1981 Prentice-Hall Milton T Theories of Psychopathology and Personality 2nd ed Saun-

ders Griffiths D Psychology and Medicine 1981 Macmillan Eysenck H J & Wilson G D A Textbook of Human Psychology 1976

MIT Price R H Abnormal Behaviour Perspective in Conflict 2nd ed 1978

Holt Rinehart & Winston

216

Book List

516-841 NEUROANATOMY Barr M L The Human Nervous System 3rd ed 1979 Harper & Row Brodai A Neurological Anatomy in Relation to Clinical Medicine 2nd

ed 1969 OUP Carpenter M B Human Neuroanatomy 7th ed 1976 Williams & Wilkins Crosby E C Humphrey T and Lauer E W Correlative Anatomy of the

Nervous System Macmillan Hamilton W J et al Human Embryology 4th ed Macmillan Peale T L The Neuroanatomic Basis for Clinical Neurology 3rd ed 1976

McGraw-Hill Research Publications of the Association for Research in Nervous and

Mental Disease Williams & Wilkins

536-841 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM Mountcastle V B Medical Physiology Vol 1 14th ed 1980 Mosby

534-841 PHARMACOLOGY 'Goodman L S & Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics

6th ed 1980 Macmillan 'Bowman W C & Rand M J Textbook of Pharmacology 2nd ed 1980

Blackwell 'Julien R M A Primer of Drug Action 2nd ed 1978 Freeman 'Iversen S D & Iversen L L Behavioural Pharmacology 1975 OUP 'Levine R R Pharmacology Drug Actions and Reactions 2nd ed Little

Brown Barchas J D et al Psychopharmacology From Theory to Practice 1977

OUP

PART 2

Comprising

554-004 GENERAL PSYCHIATRY

554-005 PSYCHOTHERAPY AND PSYCHOPATHOLOGY

554-006 GENERAL MEDICINE

554-007 NEUROLOGY AND NEUROPATHOLOGY

554-008 CHILD PSYCHIATRY 'MacLeod J Davidson's Principles and Practice of Medicine 12th ed

Livingstone Mayer-Gross W et al Clinical Psychiatry 3rd ed Macmillan Brain R Diseases of the Nervous System 8th ed OUP

'Nicholi A M ed Harvard Guide to Modern Psychiatry, HUP Hilliard LT and Kirman B H Mental Deficiency 2nd ed 1965 Churchill 'Kanner L Child Psychiatry 4th ed Black Zilboorg G A History of Medical Psychology Norton Sainsbury P and Krietman N Methods of Psychiatric Research 2nd ed

OUP Wily H J and Stallworthy K R Mental Abnormalities and the Law 1962

Регуег Blackwood W Green field's Neuropathology 3rd ed Yr Bk Med

217 Ј

Book List

Russell D and Rubinstein L J The Pathology of Tumours of the Nervous System 4th ed Arnold

•Dennerstein L et al Gynaecology Sex and Psyche 1978 MUP •Brain R Diseases of the Nervous System 8th ed OUP •Nicholi A M ed Harvard Guide to Modern Psychiatry HUP Hilliard L T & Kirman B H Mental Deficiency 2nd ed Churchill •Kanner L Child Psychiatry 4th ed Black Zilboorg G A history of Medical Psychology Norton Sainsbury P & Krietman N Methods of Psychiatric Research 1963

OUP Wily H J & Stal!worthy K R Mental Abnormalities & the Law Peryer Greenfield J G Neuropathology Arnold Russell D & Rubinstein L J The Pathology of Tumours of the Nervous

System 3rd ed 1971 •Dennerstein L et al Gynaecology, Sex and Psyche 1978 MUP

DIPLOMA IN AUDIOLOGY 577-861 ACOUSTICS

'Durrant J D & Lovrinic D H Bases of Hearing Science 1977 Williams & Wilkins

Smith B J Acoustics 1971 Longman Jerger J Clinical Impedance Audiometry 1975 American Eiectromedics Feldman A S & Wilber L A Acoustic Impedance and Admittance 1976

Williams & Wilkins

577-865 ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY Keidel W D & Neff W D eds Auditory System Anatomy Physiology

Ear, Handbook of Sensory Physiology Vol V/1 1974 Springer-Ve г lа q Mountcastle V B Medical Physiology Vol II 13th ed 1973 Mosby Tobias J V Foundations of Modern Auditory Theory Vols I & II 1970

& 1972 Academic

536-861 BIOPHYSICS •Dewhurst D J An Introduction to Biomedical Instrumentation 1976

Pergamon McPherson D L & Thatcher J W Instrumentation in the Hearing

Sciences 1978 Grune & Stratton

577-866 PSYCHOLOGY McNicol D A Primer of Signal Detection Theory 1st ed George Allen

& Unwin 1972

577-862 AUDIOLOGY

EDUCATIONAL AUDIOLOGY

Ross Mark and Giolas Auditory Management of Hearing-Impaired Chil-dren Principles and Prerequisites for Intervention 1978 Univ Park

Ling D and Ling A H Aural Habilitation 1978 AGB

218

Book List

GENERAL AUDIOLOGY

'Durrant J D & Lovrinic D H Bases of Hearing Science 1977 Williams & Wilkins

'Katz J Handbook of Clinical Audiology 1978 Williams & Wilkins David H & Silverman S R Hearing and Deafness 4th ed 1978 Holt

Rinehart & Winston 'Jerger J and Northern J Clinical Impedance Audiometry 2nd ed 1980

Amer Elec Corp Jerger J Modern Developments in Audiology 2nd ed 1974 Academic Bradford L J and Hardy W G Hearing and Hearing Impairment 1979

Grune & Stratton Rintelmann W F Hearing Assessment 1979 University Park 'Hodgson W R Basic Audiologic Evaluation 1980 Williams & Wilkins

AURAL REHABILITATION

Brocklehurst J C Textbook of Geriatric Medicine and Gerantology 1973 Churchill Livingstone

'Jeffers J & Barley M Speechreading (Lipreading) 1971 Charles C Thomas

Alpiner J G Handbook of Adult Rehabilitative Audiology 1978 Williams & Wilkins

Pollack M C ed Amplification for the Hearing-Impaired 2nd ed 1980 Henoch M A ed Aural Rehabilitation for the Elderly 1st ed Grune &

Stratton 1979 Schow R L and Nerbonne M A eds Introduction to Aural Rehabilitation

1st ed Univ Park

HEARING AIDS

Studebaker G A and Hochberg I ed Acoustical Factors Affecting Hearing Aid Performance 1980 Univ Park

Pollack M C ed Amplification for the Hearing Impaired 2nd ed 1980 Grune & Stratton

Donnelly K Interpreting Hearing Aid Technology 1974 Thomas

INDUSTRIAL AUDIOLOGY

Lipscombe D Noise and Audiology 1977 Univ Park Kryter K D The Effects of Noise on Man 1970 Academic

PAEDIATRIC AUDIOLOGY

Illingworth R G The Development of the Infant and Young Child Normal and Abnormal 4th ed 1973 Livingstone

'Sheridan M D Children's Developmental Progress 1973 NEER pub Ferguson C F & Kendig E L Paediatric Otolaryngology Vol II 1972

Saunders • Fraser G R The Causes of Profound Deafness in Childhood 1976 Johns

Hopkins UP Freeman P Understanding the Deaf Blind Child 1975 Heinemann Fulton P R & Lloyd L L Auditory Assessment of the Difficult to Test

1975 Williams & Wilkins Martin F Pediatric Audiology 1st ed Prentice Hall 1978 Gerwin K and Glorig A Detection of Hearing Loss and Ear Diseases in

Children 1974 Thomas

219

Book List

Northern J L ed Hearing Disorders 1976 Little Brown Northern J L & Downs M Hearing in Children 1974 Williams & Wilkins

SPEECH AND LANGUAGE

Ainsworth W A Mechanisms of Speech Recognition 1976 Pergamon 'Danes P & Pinson E The Speech Chain Anchor Science Study series Ladefoged P Elements of Acoustic Phonetics 1962 Univ of Chicago

Press 'Fry D B The Physics of Speech 1st ed CUP

577-864 OTOLARYNGOLOGY Maloney W H Otolaryngology 1972 Hagerstewn Mawson S R and Ludman H Diseases of the Ear 4th ed 1979 Arnold

220

APPENDIX 1

UNIVERSITY'S GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR ENTRY TO FIRST YEAR UNDERGRADUATE COURSES

1. Preamble

1.1 Selection Committee

1.1.1 There shall be a selection committee for each course con-sisting of the Dean of the faculty or the Chairman of the board of studies concerned, or a person nominated by them, and such other members as may be approved by the Academic Board on the recommendation of that faculty or board of studies. If any member of a selection committee is unable to act, the Chairman of the Academic Board may approve the appointment of a sub-stitute. on the recommendation of the Dean of the faculty or the Chairman of the board of studies concerned. 1.1.2 A selection committee shall identify those applicants to whom offers shall be made for places within the quota or sub-quotas for that course. 1.1.3 A selection committee shall make its decisions by the vote of a majority of the members present and voting and shall report those decisions to the Academic Board as soon as possible.

1.2 Applications

1.2.1 Applicants for selection should submit applications on the appropriate form by the date prescribedl, or by such closing date as may be prescribed for the receipt of Iate applications. 1.2.2 No application for selection lodged after such closing date shall be considered unless the selection committee con-cerned is satisfied that special circumstances exist which justify a later application. 1.2.3 University Regulation 1.1.2 permits the Academic Board to declare eligible for admission persons who lack qualifications ordinarily required for admission.2 Persons wishing to be con-sidered under this Regulation should apply to the Registrar.

1.3 Special and General Principles

1.3.1 Special principles of selection for any faculty or board of studies may be approved by Council on the recommendation of the Academic Board. 1.3.2 Except insofar as is provided by general principles of selec-tion those special principles shall not conflict with the general principles.

2. Selection Procedures 2.1 Pursuant to the following principles and to any special principles

approved by Council, the selection committee shall identify and rank those applicants who are considered most likely to pursue successfully the course concerned; and places shall be offered

1 The normal closing date is the Friday nearest to the end of October, but should be confirmed by reference to the Victorian Universities Admissons Committee or the Principal Dates as published by the University.

2 In the past, the Academic Board has declared certain disadvantaged applicants, par-ticularly persons of Aboriginal extraction, eligible for selection under this provision.

221

Faculty of Medicine

in accordance with such ranking until the places available in the quota or sub-quotas fixed by Council have been filled. 2.1.1 Selection shall be based primarily on academic merit as judged by reference to the results of the applicant in the Vic- torian Higher School Certificate examinations.$

2.1.2 (a) Where applicants have not attempted the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination, their qualifications shall as far as possible be accorded such standing as will enable their academic merit to be compared with that of other applicants for selection in the relevant quota or sub-quota for that course. (b) In assessing the relative likelihood of success of appli-cants who have not attempted any subject at the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination prescribed by special principles of selection as a prerequisite subject for a course. a selection committee shall give due credit to an applicant who has successfully completed a subject which, In the opinion of the selection committee, is not substantially different in content or standard from the prerequisite sub-ject prescribed.

2.1.3 In establishing the relative likelihood of success of any applicant, a selection commitee may, at its discretion, also take into account:

( а ) the results of any examinations attempted subsequent to the Victorian Higher School Certificate or equivalent ex-amination;

(b) the age of an applicant when attempting any examinations relied on as qualifying the applicant for admission;

(c) any illness, war or military service, or serious hardship as a result of which the studies or examination perform-ance of an applicant have, in the opinion of the committee, been adversely affected;

(d) physical handicaps or disabilities; (e) school principals' reports, where those reports may assist

the selection committee in evaluating the effect of factors referred to in paragraph (c) or (d).

2.1.4 A selection committee may conduct interviews to elucidate the matters referred to in section 2.1.3 above or for such pur-poses as may be provided for in special principles of selection. 2.1.5 A selection committee may also take into account any special principles of selection or other factors approved by Council on the recommendation of the faculty or board of studies concerned and the Academic Board.

2.1.6 Ni selection committee shall take into account to the pre-judice of an applicant the fact that the applicant has expressed a lower preference for the course concerned than other applicants with whom the applicant would otherwise be directly comparabI e.

2.2 In assessing academic merit as judged by reference to results in the Victorian Higher School Certificate examination, the formula

3 The details of university entrance requirements based on the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination are set out in the separate statement forming Appendix 2 to this Handbook.

222

Appendix 1

adopted by the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee shall be used where applicable provided that:

2.2.1 special principles of selection may provide that applicants must have obtained a grade of D or higher in certain subjects at the Higher School Certificate examination or its equivalent as a prerequisite for selection into a course may further provide that the results obtained in one or more prerequisite subjects shall be substituted for the results obtained in one or more of the 'best four' subjects referred to in the formula. Where the results in prerequisite subjects are so substituted they shall be substituted for the subject or subjects in which the applicant has obtained the lowest results.

•2.2.2 special principles of selection may provide that results obtained in particular subjects shall not be included either as one of the 'best four' subjects or as bonus subjects, or both, in cal-culations made under the formula.

2.2.3. where an applicant has attended for more years than are usual in the senior years of secondary school before sitting for the Higher School Certificate examination or its equivalent, special principles of selection may provide that any advantage which the applicant may have thereby received be taken into con-sideration.

•2.2.4 unless special principles of selection provide otherwise, for courses where the results of prerequisite subjects must be included in the 'best four' subjects, where an applicant has, on more than one occasion, obtained a grade of D or higher in at least four subjects:

(a) if the applicant has obtained a grade of D or higher in any prerequisite subject on only one of those occasions, the applicant shall be given credit for that result in determining the 'best four' subjects.

(b) If the applicant has obtained a grade of D or higher in any prerequisite subject on more than one of those occasions, the applicant shall be given credit for the best of those results in determining the 'best four' subjects.

•2.2.5 special principles of selection may provide for special debits and bonuses to be applied to an applicant's score de-termined under the formula.

2.2.6 in deciding between applicants at or near the borderline, the relative academic merit of the applicants as determined by the formula may be adjusted after considering the results obtained in particular subjects.

•2.3 Unless special principles of selection provide otherwise or in the absence of special reasons, applicants who have not yet completed a course at a university or any other tertiary institution shall be preferred to applicants who have completed such a course.

•2.4 Unless special principles of selection provide otherwise and notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 2.1.1, applicants who have completed a course at a university or any other tertiary institution will be considered in the light of their entire academic

223

Faculty of Medicine

records and such other written information which they may submit.

2.5 The number of overseas applicants admitted to any course shall not normally exceed by more than 10% the annual average num-ber of such applicants admitted to that course over the preceding three years4 . No overseas applicants shall be selected in prefer. ence to an Australian applicant of equal or superior merit.

2.5.1 An overseas applicant means an applicant who has been or may be permitted to enter Australia as a temporary resident or whose permanent home in the opinion of the selection com-mittee is overseas but does not include an applicant who is an Australian citizen resident overseas.

•2.5.2 Special Principles of Selection may provide that in con-sidering an overseas applicant for selection, account may be taken of the availability to the applicant of a specified type of education in any other country and the existence of any agreed programmes of assistance to any other country.

•2.6 Special principles of selection may provide that in the selection of applicants whose permanent home is, in the opinion of the selection committee, outside Victoria, the committee may take into account the availability to the applicant of a specified type of education in other states and territories of Australia.

2.7 An applicant who is not selected into the course for which a first preference has been expressed shall be considered for the course of second and, if necessary, subsequent preference and shall be ranked for selection in preference to any other applicant of inferior academic merit.

3. Reservation of Places in Quotas (Deferment) •3.1 For applicants who have been selected as a result of having

completed the full Higher School Certificate examination or its equivalent in one of the two years prior to the year of selection, places in the succeeding year's quota shall be reserved for appli-cants at their request provided that a faculty or board of studies may fix the number of places to be reserved in any year, having regard, where appropriate, to the number of applicants who have requested the reservation of places in previous years. Special principles of selection may further provide that deferment may be granted either with or without reasons for other categories of applicants who have been selected.

•3.2 Where a faculty or board of studies limits the number of places which may be reserved in the succeeding year's quota, special principles of selection shall provide for a method of choosing between applicants when the number of applicants exceeds the number of places fixed. Provision may be made for the use of reports from school principals.

4. Faculties from time to time offer places to certain overseas students who, pursuant to the provisions of the Overseas Students Charge Collection Act 1979, are sponsored by the Commonwealth or, in certain circumstances, by another Government or under a specified reciprocal exchange between the University and an overseas tertiary institution. Up to two such applicants may be selected by each faculty in any year in advance of the normal process, if the faculty selection committee considers that the applicants are of equal or superior merit to other applicants likely to be selected for that year into the course for which the overseas applicants have applied.

224

Appendix 1

'3.3 Special principles of selection may further require an appli-cant who is ranked in the lowest 20% of those to whom places have been offered and who has requested the reservation of a place in the succeeding year's quota to submit a reason for the request. A submission from a school principal may also be con-sidered. If, in the opinion of the selection committee, the reason is insufficient, it may refuse the request.

З .А . The selection of an applicant to a course in the year for which selection is principally being made shall not be prejudiced by an application for reservation of a place in the succeeding year's quota having been made prior to or at the time of accepting the offer of a place.

3.5 Where an applicant has been granted a deferred place pursuant to paragraph 3.1, the applicant shall notify the faculty or board of studies concerned by January 15th in the succeeding year, or by any earlier date as may be prescribed by special principles of selection: .

(a) whether or not the place so reserved will be taken up in that succeeding year;

(b) whether a further deferment for a second year is sought. A selection committee may, after considering such evidence and conducting such interviews as It thinks fit, and subject to any special principles of selection, grant a deferred place for а second period of one year.

• Makes provision for Speciel Principles to be proposen.

225

APPENDIX 2

UNIVERSITY'S GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR ENTRY TO SECOND AND LATER YEARS OF UNDERGRADUATE COURSES

1. Preamble


1.1.1 There shall be a selection committee for second and later year entry to each course consisting of the Dean of the faculty or Chairman of the board of studies concerned, or a person nominated by the Dean or Chairman, and such other members as may be approved by the Academic Board on the recommendation of the faculty or board of studies. If any member of a selection committee is unable to act, the Chairman of the Academic Board may approve the appoint-ment of a substitute, on the recommendation of the Dean or the Chairman.

1.1.2 A selection committee shall identify those applicants to whom offers shall be made for places available for that course.

1.1.3 A selection committee shall make its decisions by the vote of a majority of the members present and voting and shall report those decisions to the Academic Board as soon as possible.

1.2 Applications

1.2.1 Applicants for selection for second year or a later year of a course who have successfully completed part of or all of a course other than a course offered in any faculty or board of studies of the University of Melbourne must sub-mit applications to the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee' ar, where specified, to the Assistant Registrar of the faculty or board of studies on the appropriate form by the date prescribed2 or by such closing date as may be prescribed for the receipt of late applications.

1.2.2. Unless special principles of selection provide for applica-tions to be made to the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee applicants for selection for second or later years of a course who have successfully completed part of or all of a course offered in any faculty or board of studies of the University of Melbourne must submit the application form available from the Assistant Registrar of the faculty or board of studies to which application is being made by the date prescribed on that form.

1.2.3 No application for selection lodged after such closing date shall be considered unless the selection committee con-concerned is satisfied that special circumstances exist which justify a Iate application.

1 The normal closing date is the Friday nearest the end of October. but should be confirmed by reference to the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee or the the Principal Dates as published by the University.

2 Such dates, if any, will be prescribed in special principles of selection.

226

Appendix 2


1.3.1 Special principles of selection for any faculty or board of studies may be approved by Council on the recommendation of the Academic Board.

1.3.2 'Except insofar as is provided by general principles of selec-tion those special principles shall not conflict with the gen-era1 principles.

• 1.4 Eligibility

Pursuant to Regulation 1.1 and Regulation 3.3, applicants for selection to second and later years of a course must have: (al satisfied the University entrance requirements3; (b) satisfied any prerequisite requirements for the course for

which selection is sought; (c) successfully completed, to a standard satisfactory to the ap-

propriate faculty or board of studies, courses of study which, in the opinion of the faculty or board of studies, are equivalent to those for which standing or credit is sought; and

(d) complied with any requirements for eligibility in the special principles of selection for second and later years of the course for which selection is sought.

1.5 Level of Entry

1.5.1 The selection committee shall consider applicants for se-lection at the year or level of the course which is determined in accordance with the relevant course regulation and any working rules* of the faculty or board of studies.

1.5.2 To the extent necessary to establish the year or level for which an applicant is to be considered for selection, credit to be granted for work done in other courses may be de-termined by a selection committee in accordance with Regulation 3.3 and any working rules, if the faculty or board of studies has not provided otherwise for such a determination.

1.5.3 Unless the applicant has specified otherwise, any applicant found to be ineligible for selection at a particular level shall be considered for selection at the highest level for which the applicant is eligible.

2. Selection

2.1 Pursuant to the following principles and to any special principles approved by Council, the selection committee shall identify those eligible applicants who are considered most likely to pursue suc-cessfully the course concerned. Such applicants shall be ranked by the selection committee and places shall be offered In accord-ance with such ranking until the places available have been filled.

3 The statement of University entrance requirements is attached to the General Prin-available in Faculty Handbooks and from the offices of Assistant Registrars. (See Appendix 2 to this Handbook.)

4 Where working rules are used a copy may be obtained from the Assistant Registrar of the faculty or board of studies concerned.

5 Places available shall be determined by Council in accordance with resolutions agreed by Council from time to time and notified in terms it quotas and sub-quotas of Weighted Student Units reserved for each of the courses of the University.

227

Faculty of Medicine

•2.1.1 Selection shall be based primarily on academic merit as judged by reference to the whole academic record of the applicant. Special principles may provide for weighting to be given to components of the academic record of appli-cants, including results obtained in the Victorian Higher School Certificate or equivalent examination and the results obtained in any tertiary course.

•2.1.2 Special principles of selection may provide that applicants must have successfully completed, to a satisfactory stand-ard, part of or all of a course of study as a prerequisite for selection into a course.

•2.1.3 In establishing the relative likelihood of success of any applicant, a selection committee may, at its discretion, take into account: (a) the age of an applicant when completing part of or all

of a course of study relied on as qualifying the appli-cant for admission and the period of time which has passed since completion of those studies;

(b) any illness, war or military service, or serious hardship as a result of which the studies or examination per-formance of an applicant have, in the opinion of the committee, been adversely affected;

(c) physical handicaps or disabilities; (d) reports from persons with relevant professional quali-

fications, where those reports may assist the selection committee in evaluating the effect of factors referred to in paragraph (b) or (c);

(e) the applicant's reasons for wishing to pursue the course; (f) any work experience which, in the opinion of the se-

lection committee, may be relevant to the proposed course of study;

(g) any other matters specified in the special principles of selection of the course for which selection is sought.

•2.1.4 A selection committee may conduct interviews to elucidate the matters referred to in section 2.1 .3 above or for such purposes as may be provided for in special principles of selection.

2.1.5 A selection committee shall take into account any relevant written information submitted by an applicant.

• 2.1.6 A selection committee may conduct written or other tests for such purposes as may be provided for in special prin-ciples of selection.

2.1.7 A selection committee may also take Into account any other factors approved by Council.

2.1.8 No selection committee shall take into account the fact that an applicant has expressed a higher or lower preference for the course concerned than other applicants with whom the applicant would otherwise be directly comparable.

2.2 An applicant who has applied through the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee and who is not selected into the coursa for which a first preference has been expressed shall be con-

228

Appendix 2

sidered for the course of second and, if necessary, subsequent preference and shall be ranked for selection in preference to any other applicant of inferior academic merit.

•3. Conditional Selection

Pursuant to Regulation 3.3, section 1(1), special principles of selec-tion may provide for the imposition of conditions subject to which admission may be granted.

4. Reservation of Places in Quotas (Deferment)

•4.1 Special principles may provide that for applicants who have been selected for a second or later year, places in the succeeding year's quota shall be reserved for applicants at their request pro-vided that a faculty or board of studies may fix the number of places to be reserved in any year, having regard, where appro-priate, to the number of applicants who have requested the reservation of places in previous years.

4.2 The selection of an applicant to a course in the year for which selection is principally being made shall not be prejudiced by an application for reservation of a place in the succeeding year's quota having been made prior to or at the time of accepting the offer of a place.

•4.3 Where an applicant has been granted a deferred place pursuant to paragraph 4.1, the applicant shall notify the faculty or board of studies concerned by December 31 in the year for which deferment has been granted, or by any earlier date that may be prescribed by special principles of selection: (a) whether or not the place so reserved will be taken up in that

succeeding year; (b) whether a further deferment for a second year is sought. A selection committee may, after considering such evidence and conducting such interviews as it thinks fit, and subject to any special principles of selection, grant a deferred place for a second period of one year.

• Makes provision for Special Principles to be proposed.

229

APPENDIX 3

UNIVERSITY'S GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR ENTRY TO POSTGRADUATE COURSES

1. Preamble

1.1 Applicability These principles shall not apply to postgraduate courses under the control of the Academic Board pursuant to Regulation 3.60 (Doctor of Philosophy) and Regulation 3.90 (Master of Environ-mental Studies).


1.2.1 There shall be a selection committee for entry to each postgraduate course consisting of the Dean of the faculty or Chairman of the board of studies concerned, or a person nominated by the Dean or Chairman, and such other members as may be appointed by the faculty or board of studies. If any member of a selection com-mittee is unable to act, the Dean of the faculty or Chairman of the board of studies may approve the appointment of a substitute, on behalf of the faculty or board of studies concerned.

1.2.2 A selection committee shall identify those applicants to whom offers shall be made for places available for that course.

1.2.3 A selection committee shall make its decisions by the vote of a majority of the members present and voting and shall report those decisions to the faculty or board of studies as soon as possible.

1.3 Applications

'1.3.1 Applicants for selection should submit applications on the appropriate form by the date prescribed or by such closing date as may be prescribed for the receipt of late applicationsl.

1.3.2 No application for selection lodged after such closing date shall be considered unless the selection committee concerned is satisfied that special circumstances exist which justify a late application.


1.4.1 Special principles of selection for any faculty or board of studies may be approved by Council on the recom-mendation of the Academic Board.

1.4.2 Except insofar as is provided by general principles of selection those special principles shall not conflict with the general principles.

1.5 Eligibility

Except as otherwise provided in special principles of selec-tion applicants for selection to the first or later years of a postgraduate course must have:

such dates, if any, may be prescribed in special principles of selection or by notification in the relevant Handbook for the course concerned.

230

Appendix 3

( а ) satisfied the University entrance requirements; (b) satisfied any prerequisite or entry requirements for and the

provisions of any regulations applicable to, the course for which selection is sought;

(c) successfuly completed, to a standard satisfactory to the appropriate faculty or board of studies, courses of study which, in the opinion of the faculty or board of studies, are equivalent to those for which standing or credit is sought; and

(d) complied with any requirements for eligibility contained in special principles of selection for the course for which selection is sought.

1.6 Level of Entry: (Applicable only to postgraduate courses which are divided into years.)

1.6.1 The selection committee shall consider applicants for selection at the year or level of the course which is determined in accordance with the relevant course regu-lation and any working rules" of the faculty or board of studies.

1.6.2 To the extent necessary to establish the year or level for which an applicant is to be considered for selection, credit to be granted for work done in other courses may be determined in accordance with Regulation 3.3 and any working rules, if the faculty or board of studies has not provided otherwise for such a determination.

1.6.3 Unless the applicant has specified otherwise, any appli-cant found to be inel'gibl a for selection at a particular level shall be considered for selection at the highest level for which the applicant is eligible.

2. Selection

2.1 Pursuant to the following principles and to any special principles approved by Council, the selection committee shall identify those eligible applicants who are considered most likely to pursue successfully the course concerned. Such applicants shall be ranked by the selection committee and places shall be offered in accordance with such ranking until the places avail-able:t have been filled.

2.1.1 Selection shall be based primarily on academic merit as judged by reference to the whole academic record of the applicant.

2.1.2 In establishing the relative likelihood of success of any applicant, a selection committee may, at its discretion, take into account: (a) the age of an applicant when completing part of or

all of a course of study relied on as qualifying the

s Where working rules are used a copy may be obtained from the Assistant Registrar of the faculty or board of studies concerned.

s Places available shall be determined by Council in accordance with resolutions agreed by Council from time to time afd notified in terms of target figures, quotas or sub-quotas of Weighted Student Units attributable to postgraduate students, reserved for each faculty, board of studies or postgraduate course of the University, as the case may be.

231

Faculty of Medicine

applicant for admission and the period of time which has passed since completion of those studes;

(b) any illness, war or military service, or serious hard-ship as a result of which the studies or examination performance of an applicant have, in the opinion of the committee, been adversely affected;

(c) physical handicaps or disabilities;

(d) reports from persons with relevant professional qualifications, where those reports may assist the selection committee in evaluating the effect of factors referred to in paragraph (b) or (c);

(e) the applicant's reasons for wishing to pursue the course;

(f) any work or research experience which, in the opinion of the selection committee, may be relevant to the proposed course of study;

• (g) any other matters specified in the special principles of selection of the course for which selection is sought.

•2.1.3 A selection committee may conduct interviews to eluci-date the matters referred to in section 2.1.2 above or for such purposes as may be provided for in special principles of selection.

2.1.4 A selection committee shall take into account any relevant written information submitted by an applicant.

•2.1.5 A selection committee may conduct written or other tests for such purposes as may be provided for in special principles of selection.

•2.1.6 A selection committee may also take into account any special principles of selection or other factors approved by Council on the recommendation of the faculty or board of studies concerned.

2.2 A selection committee shall select a candidate only if it is satisfied that the faculty or board of studies can arrange for the adequate supervision of the candidate and can provide, or arrange access to, adequate facilities for the support of that candidate.

•3. Conditional Selection

Pursuant to Regulation 3.3, section 1(1), special principles of selection may provide for the imposition of conditions subject to which admission may be granted.

•lakes provision f or Special Principles to be proposed.

232

APPENDIX 4

CONTINUING EDUCATION COURSES IN THE UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE

Continuing Education courses in the University of Melbourne fall into two categories. The first of these, known as Category A, enables students to obtain access to a variety of courses of the University which have been modified for continuing education purposes. In this way continuing education students participate in University courses with undergraduate or graduate students. Category A courses cannot, however, be credited towards a course of study for a degree or diploma of this University. The administration of Category A continuing education courses is the responsibility of the Registrar, and is co-ordinated through the Office for Prospective and New Students. The range of Category A courses avail-able varies from year to year and enquiries about them should be addressed to the Office for Prospective and New Students. Intending students must complete an application form, by 30 January, 1983. These forms are obtainable in December and January from the Office for Prospective and New Students, or from faculty offices. Success-ful applicants will be notified, and will be required to complete enrolment details including payment of fees, with the University's Students' Records Office. The Office for Prospective and New Students can also provide information about the methods of enrolment for degree studies, including additional subjects, complementary courses, admission ad eundem statum, the details of which are dealt with in faculty offices, and for which enrolments are completed through the Students' Records Office. Other continuing education courses are known as Category В courses, and are specifically planned to meet the needs of particular professional, vocational, or community groups. These include short refresher courses, seminars, and summer schools such as "An Introduction to Bio-Med'cal Instrumentation", "Statistics for Research Workers", "Summer Schools of Languages" and a Course in Anaesthetics. Most of these continuing education courses are proposed by the staff of the University, but it is possible for individuals with appropriate expertise to mount such courses in association with relevant departments of the University. The administration of Category B courses is the responsibility of the sponsoring faculty, and details of courses, their cost, and other relevant matters may be obtained from the individual departments or faculties which are proposing such courses for the public.

233

APPENDIX 5

UNIVERSITY ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR 1983

1. Tertiary Entrance in 1983

1.1 Enquiries about admission to any courses in universities and tertiary colleges should be directed to the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee (V.U.A.C.), 11 Queens Road, Melbourne 3004, or to the individual institution concerned. The following arrangements for university entrance will apply in 1983. In some instances candidates who fail to meet the specified univer-sity entrance requirements may be considered for tertiary places. Further information is available in a publication of V.U.A.C. entitled 'Guide for Prospective Students'.

1.2 Persons seeking entry to universities should note that the rules of the Victorian Institute of Secondary Education for satisfactory completion of a Year 12 course of study will differ in some important aspects from those set out in this document.

2. Requirements for Entrance

2.1 Before admission to a course at any of the Victorian universities candidates must normally satisfy: 2.1.1 the general university entrance requirements, and 2.1.2 any special course or other requirements of the individual

university concerned. Special course requirements are set out in the V.U.A.C, Guide for Prospective Students and in the relevant course handbooks of the universities. Completion of the requirements under 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 ensure eligibility but does not automatically give right of entrance to a course.

3. Methods of Satisfying University Entrance Requirements

3.1 There are four methods by which candidates may fulfil the general university entrance requirements: 3.1.1 the normal method; 3.1.2 by compensation; 3.1 .3 under the special provisions for mature age candidates; 3.1.4 under the concessional arrangements for part-time studies.

3.2 Normal Method

3.2.1 Persons under 21 years of age on 31 December In the year in which examinations are taken will normally be expected to satisfy university entrance requirements by a full attempt at the H.S.C. (i.e. Grade Dl or above in four Group 1 subjects approved for university entrance including Englishe taken at one sitting.

'VISE Year 12 Examination Grades for Group 1 subjects. The results of the VISE Year 12 Examinations will be issued in the form of grades based upon the standardised marks for each subject as follows:

Grade A, 80/100; Grade В , 70/79; Grade C, 60/69; Grade D. 50/59; Grade Е . 40/49; Grade F. 5/39.

'References to the Group 1 subject 'English' may be read alternatively as the Group 1 subject 'English As A Second Language' which is available to those students who are eligible under VISE rules.

234

Appendix 5

3.2.2 For Deakin University the minimum requirement is success-ful completion at the one sitting of three approved Group 1 subjects (Grade D or above) and one Group 2 subject approved by Deakin University (see Appendix (i)) provided that: (a) one of these subjects is an approved course of study

in English; and (b) combinations of Group 1 and Group 2 subjects must

not have significant overlap of content. Unapproved Group 1 subjects will be regarded as Group 2 subjects.

3.2.3 For a list of Group 1 subjects approved for 1982 for University entrance in 1983 refer to Appendix (i) of this document.

3.2.4 The restrictions on subject choices for the 1982 VISE Year 12 Examinations are listed in Appendix (i) of this document.

3.2.5 Faculty or School prerequisites and recommended subjects are listed in Appendix (ii) of this document.

3.3 By Compensation

3.3.1 Entrance requirements for all four universities may be satisfied by compensation at the VISE Year 12 Examinations provided that candidates:

3.3.1.1 attempt at least four approved Group 1 subjects including English at one examination, and

3.3.1.2 obtain Grade D or above in at least three approved Group 1 subjects at the same examination and in the fourth subject satisfy by compensation as set out in 3.3.2, and

3.3.1.3 obtain Grade D or above in Group 1 English or are granted compensation on the basis of English as the fourth approved Group 1 subject under section 3.3.2.

3.3.2 The following rules for compensation are based on the fact that the lowest standardised mark for Grade D is 50 in all Group 1 subjects. Candidates will fulfil the requirements of

3.3.1.2 and 3.3.1.3 by compensation if

3.3.2.1 they obtain not less than 40 marks in a fourth approved Group 1 subject and the excess of marks over 150 in the three approved Group 1 subjects in which they obtain Grade D or above is twice the deficiency in the approved Group 1 subject in which they obtain a grade below D, or

3.3.2.2 they obtain less than 40 marks in a fourth approved Group 1 subject, and the excess of marks over 150 in the three approved Group 1 subjects in which they obtain Grade D or above is not less than 2n + 2(n-10) where n is the deficiency in the approved Group 1 subject In which they obtain a grade below D. .

235

Faculty of Medicine

3.4 Mature Age Candidatesi

3.4.1 Entrance requirements for all four universities may be satisfied by candidates who:

3.4.1.1 are twenty-one years of age or more on 31 December of the year in which, under this provision, they first present for an approved Group 1 subject2 or subjects including the Test in English (available prior to 1981);

3.4.1.2 obtain Grade D or above in Group 1 English and two other approved Group 1 subjects including, where applicable. specified Group 1 subjects (see Appendix (iii) for list of faculty prerequisites and recommended subjects) of the VISE Year 12 Examination, provided that at least two of the three subjects are obtained at the same sitting; OR

3.4.1.3 obtain a pass in the Test in English (available prior to 1981) in lieu of Grade D or above in Group 1 English and obtain Grade D or higher in two other approved Group 1 subjects including, where applicable specified Group 1 subjects (see Appen-dix (iii) for list of faculty prerequisites and recom-mended subjects) which must be obtained at the same sitting.

3.4.2 Mature Age candidates are advised that they can count only one subject from each of the following combinations of Н .S.C. or approved VISE Group 1 alternative subjects:

3.4.2.1 Ancient Greek OR Greek obtained in 1971 or earlier.

3.4.2.2 Applied Mathematics OR Calculus and Applied Mathematics obtained in 1971 or earlier.

3.4.2.3 Australian History OR Australian History 1788-1950 OR Australian History obtained in 1976 or earlier.

3.4.2.4 Eighteenth Century History OR British History 1714-1799 OR British History 1688-1799 OR Eighteenth Century History obtained in 1975 or earlier OR Eighteenth Century European History obtained in 1980 or earlier.

3.4.2.5 Earth Science OR Geology obtained in 1975 or earlier.

3.4.2.6 English OR English Expression obtained in 1971 or earlier.

1. Candidates who are not permanently resident in Australia cannot take advantagь of these provisions in respect of entry to Monash University.

2. Subjects passed at the Matriculation Examination (before 1970) and subjects passed at the H.S.C. Examination (before 1981) may be counted with VISE Group 1 subjects.

236

Appendix 5

3.4.2.7 Environmental Science OR Agricultural and Environmental Science obtained in 1975 or 1976 OR Agricultural Science obtained in 1974 or earlier.

3.4.2.8 Music В OR Music (History & Literature) obtained in 1980 or earlier.

3.4.2.9 Politics OR Social Studies obtained in 1975 or earlier.

3.4.2.10 Australian History OR Themes in Australian History obtained in 1980 or earlier.

3.4.2.11 Music В OR Music (Theoretical) obtained in 1980 or earlier.

3.4.2.12 Physical Science OR Physical Science Scheme I obtained in 1980 or earlier OR Physical Science Scheme 11 obtained in 1980 or earlier.

3.4.2.13 Physics OR Physics Scheme A obtained in 1980 or earlier OR Physics Scheme В obtained in 1980 or earlier.

3.4.2.14 General Mathematics OR General Mathematics (Computing Option) obtained in 1980 or earlier.

3.4.2.15 Legal Studies OR Commercial and Legal Studies obtained in 1980 or earlier.

3.4.2.16 Music A OR Music Practical obtained in 1980 or earlier.

3.4.3 Faculty and School Prerequisite and Recommended Subjects for Mature Age Entry In addition to the requirements set out in 3.4.2 above the university faculties and schools impose various limitations on the choice of approved Group 1 subjects, in which Grade D or above must be obtained in addition to Group 1 English or the Test in English, available prior to 1981, for candidates who are twenty-one years of age or more. These requirements are detailed in Appendix (iii).

3.5 Concessional Arrangement for Part-time Studies For all universities, persons under twenty-one years of age who are prevented from undertaking full-time Higher School Certificate studies, including persons in full-time employment, may apply to V.U.A.C. for permission to undertake Higher School Certificate studies on a concessional basis in order to satisfy minimum university entrance requirements. Applications for such permission should be made in advance of commencing studies and must reach the V.U.A.C. office by 31 March in the year in which applicants commence their studies. Persons who commenced studies and took H.S.C. examinations prior to 1981 under the former V.U.S.E.В . provision relating to candidates in full-time employment will be permitted to complete university entrance requirements in terms of that provision.

237

Faculty of Medicine

3.6 Alternative Qualifications (including the Tertiary Orientation Programme)

3.6.1 Candidates who have not sat for the VISE YEAR 12 Exami- nations may still be admitted to a university course on the basis of comparable qualifications. Such candidates, who lodge an application for university admission for 1983. will be considered by V,U.A.C. and selection authorities will be advised whether or not they have been granted exemption on the basis of their other qualifications.

3.6.2 Т .O.Р . candidates may satisfy university entrance require-ments in 1981 and thereafter by either of the following procedures:

(a) Completion of a full-time Tertiary Orientation Pro-gramme and satisfying the requirements for entry to a degree course at Deakin University provided that the subjects taken in the Tertiary Orientation Programme have been passed at the one sitting.

OR

Completion of a full-time Tertiary Orientation Pro-gramme and satisfying the requirements for entry to a course for a degree registered with the Australian Council on Awards in Advanced Education at a College of Advanced Education which is recognised for such purposes by the Victorian universities provided that the subjects taken in the Tertiary Orientation Pro-gramme have been passed at the one sitting and pro-vided that the degree course for which the applicant has qualified for entry is one recognised by the Victorian universities.

3.7 VISE Group 2 Subjects and Study Structures

With the exception of Deakin University (refer 3.2) university entrance requirements for 1983 are specified elsewhere in this document in terms of approved Group 1 subjects. La Tribe University, Monash University and the University of Melbourne have decided that for entrance in 1983, results in Group 2 subjects and study structures will not be counted in determining whether university entrance requirements have been met. However in the case of La Tribe University, results in other subjects including Group 2 subjects afd subjects accumulated over more than one year will be taken into account for applicants to the School of Humanities or the School of Social Sciences. Successful applicants who have not matriculated will be admitted to the university as provisional matriculants on the authority of the Academic Board.

4. Scoring

4.1 First Attempt Applicants who have met the university entrance requirements by a full-time attempt at the H.S.C. examination within a period of six years prior to the year of selection and who have no other

(b)

238

Appendix 5

qualifications are N11 applicants. For these applicants a score is compiled on the following general basis: add the marks of the best four subjects then add ten per cent of the marks obtained in any other approved subject in which the applicant obtained at least 40 marks, but only to a maximum of four such subjects. Applicants for courses at Monash who gain less than 50 marks in English or English as a Second Language will have their total score reduced by the deficiency.

NB: Some course selection committees use variations of the general formula for applicants to their courses. An applicant may, therefore, be considered for entry to several courses with different scores, based on the same H.S.C. results. In addition, selection committees may take other considerations into account. Prospective applicants should check for details of these in relevant course descriptions.

4.2 Second Attempt

The score of an N11 applicant who has made two full attempts at the H.S.C. is adjusted for selection purposes by deducting 10% of the second attempt score after adjustment for bonuses. Candidates should note that they may be regarded as having had a second attempt at H.S.C. if they have spent 2 years at Year 12 level even if examinations were not taken In the first year of study. The results of examinations on VISE certificates will not be adjusted. The 10% deduction is carried out irrespective of the reason for the second attempt. This must be stressed: it is made whatever the reason for repeating (age, failure, feeling of immaturity, travel, illness, finance), and even if the student does completely different subjects. It was devised not as a penalty on repeating students but as a means of equating them as fairly as possible with one-attempt applicants. A student who is repeating should, however, draw attention to any reasons which might affect the decision of selection committees (which can vary or even waive the adjustment). Application should be made direct to V.U.A.C. for this purpose on a form which is available from school principals or from the V.U.A.C. office. It is difficult to make a brief general statement about the second attempt scoring system without being misleading. Students in doubt should consult V.U.A.C., individual course selection authorities, school principals or careers advisers. It is acknowledged that there may be reasons for another year at school and a second attempt at the examination, This is a matter which each applicant must decide after discussion with school authorities and parents.

4.3 Other Applicants

The scoring principles in paragraph 4.2 above apply principally to N11 type applicants and do not necessarily apply to other categories of applicants.

239

Faculty of Medicine

Appendix (i)

LIST OF 1982 GROUP 1 SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR UNIVERSITY ENTRANCE PURPOSES

VISE subject numbers are shown in brackets.

1. English (83-12-009) 2. English as a Second

Language (81-12-015) 3. English Literature (83-12-010) 4. Ancient Greek (83-12-018) 5. Chinese (83-12-022) 6. Czech (85-12-039) 7. Dutch (83-12-037) 8. French (85-12-011) 9. German (83-12-034)

10. Hebrew Classical and Modern (83-12-048)

11. Hungarian (84-12-021) 12. Indonesian (84-12-028) 13. Italian (84-12-016) 14. Japanese (84-12-049) 15. Latin (83-12-017) 16. Latvian (83-12-023) 17. Lithuanian (83-12-033) 18. Modern Greek Language and

Culture (83-12-013) 19. Polish (85-12-042) 20. Russian (85-12-004) 21. Serbo-Croatian, Croatian

and Serbian (82-12-038) 22. Spanish (83-12-019) 23. Turkish (85-12-060) 24. Ukrainian (85-12-036) 25. Applied Mathematics

(83-12-057 ) 26. Pure Mathematics

(83-12-058 ) 27. General Mathematics

(83-12-059) 28. Biology (84-12-030)

29. Chemistry (83-12-051) 30. Earth Science (84-12-029) 31. Environmental Science

(84-12-054) 32. Geography (85-12-020) 33. Physical Science

(85-1 2-050) 34. Physics (84-12-035) 35. Asian History (83-12-025) 36. Australian History

(83-12-026) 37. Eighteenth Century History

(83-12-027 ) 38. European History 1300-1600

(83-12-056) 39. Greek History (85-12-031) 40. Roman History (85-12-032) 41. Accounting (84-12-014) 42. Art (84-12-046) 43. Biblical Studies (83-12-006) 44. Classical Civilisation

(83-12-007) 45. Legal Studies (83-12-024) 46. Economics (83-12-008) 47.. Graphic Communication

(83-12-055) 48. Home Economics-Human

Development and Society (85-12-012)

49. Music A (83-12-041) 50. Music B (83-12-045) 51. Politics (83-12-053) 52, Physical Education

(83-12-003)

Candidates are advised that certain restrictions apply when selecting subjects.

(a) Candidates will not receive credit for the following subject combinations: English and English as a Second Language General Mathematics and either of Pure or Applied Mathematics Physical Science and either of Physics or Chemistry.

(b) The following Group 1 subjects have not been approved for university entrance purposes:

1. Computer Science (83-12-001) 2. Secretarial Studies (83-12-043)

240

Appendix 5

Scoring of Mathematics Subjects

Monash University and La Tribe University have agreed that selection scores for applicants presenting for General Mathematics and either Pure Mathematics or Applied Mathematics in the Higher School Certifi-cate in 1981 be calculated on the normal basis of their best four subjects plus bonuses but excluding General Mathematics. It is also intended that General Mathematics not be counted for bonus purposes. However, for the information of selection committees of faculties and schools, it is proposed that a separate list of selection scores Including General Mathematics and excluding Pure Mathematics and Applied Mathematics be prepared by V.U.A.C.

Please note the existing and long-standing practice of allowing bonuses from previous attempts is not to be altered.

Deakin University and the University of Melbourne will use either a selection score based on the inclusion of General Mathematics and the exclusion of Pure Mathematics and Applied Mathematics or a selection score based upon the inclusion of Pure Mathematics and Applied Mathematics and the exclusion of General Mathematics. whichever is the higher. The following examples demonstrate the procedure to be adopted by these universities in the cases of candidates taking unapproved com-binations. Assume that a candidate obtains results as follows:

English 68 Chemistry 79 Physics 79 General Mathematics 85 Pure Mathematics 70 Applied Mathematics 70

For this candidate, the selection score will be derived by taking the results in English, Chemistry, Physics and General Mathematics. No bonus points will be awarded on the basis of the results obtained in Pure Mathematics and Applied Mathematics.

Quota score: 311

Assume that another candidate obtained results as follows: English 68 Chemistry 79 Physics 79 General Mathematics 85 Pure Mathematics 80 Applied Mathematics 75

This candidate's selection score would be derived by taking the results in Chemistry, Physics, Applied Mathematics and Pure Mathematics and 10% of the result in English. No bonus points will be awarded on the basis of the result obtained in General Mathematics in this instance.

Quota score: 320

Appendix (ii)

FACULTY AND SCHOOL PREREQUISITE AND RECOMMENDED SUBJECTS FOR APPLICANTS SATISFYING UNIVERSITY ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS BY THE NORMAL METHOD APPLICABLE TO THE UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE

Agriculture Prerequisites: Group 1 Chemistry and either Group 1 Physics or a branch of Group 1 Mathematics must be included in the best four.

Applied Science — Applied. Chemistry and Metallurgy Recommended: Group 1 Pure Mathematics, Group 1 Applied Mathe-matics, Group 1 Physics, Group 1 Chemistry and Group 1 English.

241

Faculty of Medicine

Applied Science — Electronics

Recommended: Group 1 Pure Mathematics, Group 1 Applied Mathe-matics, Group 1 Physics, Group 1 Chemistry and Group 1 English. Applicants are strongly advised to include in one of their mathematics subjects the option P11/All — Complex Numbers and Matrices.

Architecture

Recommended: Group 1 Physics, Group 1 Pure Mathematics and Group 1 Applied Mathematics. First year subjects assume a know-ledge of Physics and Mathematics to Year 12 level and Chemistry to Year 11 level.

Arts

Prerequisite: Either a language other than Group 1 English or a branch of Group 1 Mathematics. Exemptions from this prerequisite may be granted in the case of:

i. students who have completed the first year of another university course;

ii. graduates of another tertiary course; iii. applicants who in the opinion of the Faculty have obtained

excellent results in the H.S.C. examinations; iv. applicants who attempt the H.S.C. examination under the special

provision for mature age students (over the age of 21 years); but such applicants are advised not to include more than one subject chosen from Group 1 Music A, Group 1 Music B, Group 1 Art;

v. applicants whose schooling was such that study of prerequisites was virtually impossible or would have constituted a case of serious hardship.

Further enquiries should be made with the Assistant Registrar (Arts).

Building

Recommended: Group 1 Physics, Group 1 Pure Mathematics, Group 1 Applied Mathematics, Group 1 Accounting and Group 1 Humanities subjects. First year subjects assume a knowledge of Physics and Mathematics to Year 12 level and Chemistry to Year 11 level.

Dental Science

Prerequisites: Group 1 Chemistry and one of Group 1 Physics, Group 1 Biology or a branch of Group 1 Mathematics must be included in the best four. Grade D or higher in Group 1 English must also be obtained.

Economics and Commerce

Recommended: Mathematics to at least Year 11 level.

Engineering

It is strongly recommended that in addition to Group 1 English applicants should have taken Group 1 Chemistry, Group 1 Physics, Group 1 Pure Mathematics and Group 1 Applied Mathematics. In addition, applicants are strongly advised to include in mathematics the option Pli/AMi — Complex Numbers and Matrices.

242

Appendix 5

Forestry

Prerequisites: Group 1 Chemistry and either Group 1 Physics or a branch of Group 1 Mathematics must be included in the best four. Group 1 Physics is highly recommended as Physics is a compulsory subject in the Forestry course.

Law

There are no prerequisite or recommended subjects.

Medicine

Prerequisites: Group 1 English, Group 1 Chemistry and ONE of Group 1 Physics, a branch of Group 1 Mathematics or Group 1 Biology. The prerequisites must be included in the best four subjects. Appli-cants should be aware that within the best four subjects only one branch of Group 1 Mathematics may be included except in cases where there is no other Group 1 subject available for inclusion. Applicants under the age of seventeen years may be interviewed by the selection committee before being approved for admission.

Music Prerequisite: Group 1 Music A must be included in the best four. Note: All applicants are recommended to take where possible the subject Group 1 Music B.

Optometry Although there are no formal prerequisites for entry into first year Science Optometry a student without at least Group 1 Chemistry, a branch of Group 1 Mathematics or Group 1 Physics will have considerable difficulty.

Science

Recommended: Group 1 Chemistry,. a branch of Group 1 Mathe-matics, Group 1 Physics. The biological sciences assume a know-ledge of Group 1 Chemistry and Group 1 Physics, the physical sciences assume an understanding of Group 1 Physics and/or Group 1 Pure Mathematics, Students without the recommended subjects will have difficulty in planning a course.

Surveying

Recommended: Group 1 Chemistry, Group 1 Physics, Group 1 Pure Mathematics and Group 1 Applied Mathematics. Applicants are strongly advised to include in one of their mathematics subjects the option Pli/All — Complex Numbers and Matrices.

Town and Regional Planning Recommended: Group 1 General Mathematics and a broad range of Group 1 subjects from the humanities/social science group is desir-able, e.g. Group 1 Economics, Group 1 Geography, Group 1 Politics.

Veterinary Science Prerequisites: Group 1 Chemistry and either Group 1 Physics or a branch of Group 1 Mathematics must be included in the best four. Recommended: It is assumed that students have studied Group 1 Physics and Group 1 Biology at Year 12 level. Applicants under the age of seventeen years may be Interviewed by the selection committee.

243

Faculty of Medicine

Appendix (iii)

FACULTY AND SCHOOL PREREQUISITE AND RECOMMENDED SUBJECTS FOR APPLICANTS SATISFYING UNIVERSITY ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS UNDER MATURE AGE PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THE UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE

Agricultural Science and Forestry

Group 1 English, Group 1 Chemistry and either Group 1 Physics or a branch of Group 1 Mathematics. Group 1 Physics is highly recom-mended for those wishing to do Forestry as Physics is a compulsory subject in the Forestry course.

Applied Science (Applied Chemistry, Electronics and Metallurgy)

Group 1 English and any two of Group 1 Chemistry, Group 1 Physics, a branch of Group 1 Mathematics are strongly recommended. Candi-dates should make an appointment with the Assistant Registrar (Engineering) concerning preparatory studies.

Architecture and Building and Town and Regional Planning

Group 1 English and any two approved Group 1 subjects but candi-dates are advised to consult the Faculty handbook or the Assistant Registrar of the Faculty concerning preparatory studies.

Arts Group 1 English and any two Group 1 subjects but candidates are advised not to include more than one of the following:

Art; Music A; Music B; Music (Practical) obtained prior to 1981; Music (Theoretical) obtained prior to 1981; Music (History & Literature) obtained prior to 1981.

A pass in the Test in English is acceptable provided that, in addition, Grade D or above is gained in three approved Group 1 subjects, two of which are obtained at the same sitting.

Commerce Group 1 English and any two approved Group 1 subjects.

Dental Science

Group 1 English, Group 1 Chemistry and one of Group 1 Physics, Group 1 Biology or a branch of Group 1 Mathematics. A pass in the Test in English obtained prior to 1981 is not an acceptable alternative to Grade D or above in Group 1 English.

Engineering and Surveying Candidates should make an appointment with the Assistant Registrar of the Faculty concerning preparatory studies,

Law Group 1 English and any two Group 1 subjects except Music A or Music (Practical) obtained prior to 1981. Candidates are advised to present for Group 1 English and not rely on a pass in the Test in English obtained prior to 1981. Candidates who already have accountancy qualifications are advised not to select Accounting as

244 '

Appendix 5

one of their Group 1 subjects. Candidates not born in Australia and whose native language is not English are advised to consult the Senior Administrative Officer, Faculty of Law, before selecting their native language as a Group 1 subject for examination.

Medicine

Group 1 English, Group 1 Chemistry and one of Group 1 Physics, or a branch of Group 1 Mathematics or Group 1 Biology. No more than two attempts to obtain the two approved Group 1 subjects at one sitting are allowed. A pass in the Test In English obtained prior to 1981 is not an acceptable alternative to Grade D or above in Group 1 English.

Music

Group 1 English, Group 1 Music A and one other Group 1 subject. Music B is recommended. In addition, candidates must complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty, an aural test before being finally considered for admission.

Science and Science (Optometry)

Group 1 English and any two of Group 1 Chemistry, Group 1 Physics, a branch of Group 1 Mathematics are recommended.

Veterinary Science

Group 1 English, Group 1 Chemistry and either Group 1 Physics or a branch of Group 1 Mathematics.

245

Library Digitised Collections

Author/s:

The University of Melbourne

Title:

Handbook: Faculty of Medicine 1983

Date:

1983

Persistent Link:

http://hdl.handle.net/11343/128941

faculty of medicine - handbook 1983 - Digitised Collections

Documents

Transcript of faculty of medicine - handbook 1983 - Digitised Collections